505797

Hitachi CP-X2015WN Handleiding

136
Verklein
Vergroot
Pagina terug
1/259
Pagina verder
1
Projector
User's Manual (detailed)
Operating Guide
Thank you for purchasing this projector.
►Before using this product, please read all manuals for this
product. Be sure to read Safety Guide first. After reading them, store them in a
safe place for future reference.
WARNING
• The information in this manual is subject to change without notice.
• The illustrations in this manual are for illustrative purposes. They may differ
slightly from your projector.
• The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in
this manual.
• The reproduction, transfer or copy of all or any part of this document is not
permitted without express written consent.
NOTE
Trademark acknowledgment
Various symbols are used in this manual. The meanings of these symbols are
described below.
About this manual
WARNING
CAUTION
This symbol indicates information that, if ignored, could possibly
result in personal injury or even death due to incorrect handling.
This symbol indicates information that, if ignored, could possibly
result in personal injury or physical damage due to incorrect
handling.
Please refer to the pages written following this symbol.
• Mac
®
is a registered trademark of Apple Inc.
• Windows
®
, DirectDraw
®
and Direct3D
®
are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation
in the U.S. and/or other countries.
• VESA and DDC are trademarks of the Video Electronics Standard Association.
•
HDMI, the HDMI logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered
trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries.
• Blu-ray Disc
TM
and Blu-ray
TM
are trademarks of Blu-ray Disc
Association.
All other trademarks are the properties of their respective owners.
NOTICE This entry notices of fear of causing trouble.
CP-X2015WN/CP-X2515WN/CP-X3015WN/
CP-X4015WN/CP-WX2515WN/CP-WX3015WN
1
About The Symbols
Various symbols are used in this manual, the user’s manual and on the product
itself to ensure correct usage, to prevent danger to the user and others, and to
prevent property damage. The meanings of these symbols are described below.
It is important that you read these descriptions thoroughly and fully understand
the contents.
Projector
User's Manual - Safety Guide
Typical Symbols
This symbol indicates an additional warning (including cautions). An
illustration is provided to clarify the contents.
This symbol indicates a prohibited action. The contents will be clearly
indicated in an illustration or nearby (the symbol to the left indicates that
disassembly is prohibited).
This symbol indicates a compulsory action. The contents will be clearly
indicated in an illustration or nearby (the symbol to the left indicates that
the power plug should be disconnected from the power outlet).
Thank you for purchasing this projector.
NOTE
• The information in this manual is subject to change without notice.
• The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in
this manual.
• The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or contents is not
permitted without express written authority.
WARNING •
Before using, read these user's manuals of this projector to ensure
correct usage through understanding. After reading, store them in a safe place for
future reference. Incorrect handling of this product could possibly result in personal injury
or physical damage. The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for any damage caused
by mishandling that is beyond normal usage defined in these manuals of this projector.
WARNING
This symbol indicates information that, if ignored, could
possibly result in personal injury or even death due to
incorrect handling.
CAUTION
This symbol indicates information that, if ignored, could
result possibly in personal injury or physical damage
due to incorrect handling.
Read this Safety Guide first.
2
Safety Precautions
WARNING
Never use the projector if a problem should occur.
Abnormal operations such as smoke, strange odor, no image, no sound,
excessive sound, damaged casing or elements or cables, penetration of
liquids or foreign matter, etc. can cause a fire or electrical shock.
In such case, immediately turn off the power switch and then disconnect the
power plug from the power outlet. After making sure that the smoke or odor
has stopped, contact your dealer. Never attempt to make repairs yourself
because this could be dangerous.
• The power outlet should be close to the projector and easily accessible.
Use special caution for children and pets.
Incorrect handling could result in fire, electrical shock, injury, burn or vision
problem.
Use special caution in households where children and pets are present.
Do not insert liquids or foreign object.
Penetration of liquids or foreign objects could result in fire or electrical shock.
Use special caution in households where children are present.
If liquids or foreign object should enter the projector, immediately turn off the
power switch, disconnect the power plug from the power outlet and contact
your dealer.
• Do not place the projector near water (ex. a bathroom, a beach, etc.).
• Do not expose the projector to rain or moisture. Do not place the projector
outdoors.
• Do not place flower vases, pots, cups, cosmetics, liquids such as water, etc
on or around the projector.
• Do not place metals, combustibles, etc on or around the projector.
• To avoid penetration of foreign objects, do not put the projector into a case
or bag together with any thing except the accessories of the projector,
signal cables and connectors.
Never disassemble and modify.
The projector contains high voltage components. Modification and/or disassembly of
the projector or accessories could result in fire or electrical shock.
• Never open the cabinet.
• Ask your dealer to repair and clean insider.
Do not give the projector any shock or impact.
If the projector should be shocked and/or broken, it could result in an injury,
and continued use could result in fire or electrical shock.
If the projector is shocked, immediately turn off the power switch, disconnect
the power plug from the power outlet and contact your dealer.
Do not place the projector on an unstable surface.
If the projector should be dropped and/or broken, it could result in an injury,
and continued use could result in fire or electrical shock.
• Do not place the projector on an unstable, slant or vibrant surface such as
a wobbly or inclined stand.
• Use the caster brakes placing the projector on a stand with casters.
• Do not place the projector in the side up position, the lens up position or
the lens down position.
• In the case of a ceiling installation or the like, contact your dealer before
installation.
Disconnect the
plug from the
power outlet.
Do not
disassemble.
3
WARNING
Be cautious of High temperatures of the projector.
High temperatures are generated when the lamp is lit. It could result in fire or
burn. Use special caution in households where children are present.
Do not touch about the lens, air fans and ventilation openings during use or
immediately after use, to prevent a burn. Take care of ventilation.
• Keep a space of 30 cm or more between the sides and other objects such
as walls.
• Do not place the projector on a metallic table or anything weak in heat.
• Do not place anything about the lens, air fans and ventilation openings of
the projector.
• Never block the air fan and ventilation openings.
• Do not cover the projector with a tablecloth, etc.
• Do not place the projector on a carpet or bedding.
Never look through the lens or openings when the lamp is on.
The powerful light could adversely affect vision.
Use special caution in households where children are present.
Use only the correct power cord and the correct power outlet.
Incorrect power supply could result in fire or electrical shock.
• Use only the correct power outlet depending on the indication on the
projector and the safety standard.
• The enclosed power cord must be used depending on the power outlet to
be used.
Be cautious of the power cord connection.
Incorrect connection of the power cord could result in fire or electrical shock.
• Do not touch the power cord with a wet hand.
• Check that the connecting portion of the power cord is clean (with no dust),
before using. Use a soft and dry cloth to clean the power plug.
• Insert the power plug into a power outlet firmly. Avoid using a loose,
unsound outlet or contact failure.
Be sure to connect with ground wire.
Connect the ground terminal of AC inlet of this unit with the ground terminal
provided at the building using the correct power cord; otherwise, fire or
electric shock can result.
• Don’t take the core of power cord away.
Safety Precautions (continued)
Surely connect
the ground wire.
4
WARNING
Be careful in handling the light source lamp.
The projector uses a high-pressure mercury glass lamp made of glass.
The lamp can break with a loud bang, or burn out. When the bulb bursts,
it is possible for shards of glass to fly into the lamp housing, and for gas
containing mercury to escape from the projector’s vent holes.
Please carefully read the section “Lamp”.
Be careful in handling the power cord and external connection
cables.
If you keep using a damaged the power cord or cables, it can cause a fire
or electrical shock. Do not apply too much heat, pressure or tension to the
power cord and cables.
If the power cord or cables is damaged (exposed or broken core wires, etc.),
contact your dealer.
• Do not place the projector or heavy objects on the power cord and cables.
Also, do not place a spread, cover, etc, over them because this could result
in the inadvertent placing of heavy objects on the concealed power cord or
cables.
• Do not pull the power cord and cables. When connecting and
disconnecting the power cord or cables, do it with your hand holding the plug
or connector.
• Do not place the cord near the heater.
• Avoid bending the power cord sharply.
• Do not attempt to work on the power cord.
Be careful in handling the battery of the remote control.
Incorrect handling of the battery could result in fire or personal injury. The
battery may explode if not handled properly.
• Keep the battery away from children and pets. If swallowed consult a
physician immediately for emergency treatment.
• Do not allow the battery in a fire or water.
• Avoid fire or high-temperature environment.
• Do not hold the battery with the metallic tweezers.
• Keep the battery in a dark, cool and dry play.
• Do not short circuit the battery.
• Do not recharge, disassemble or solder the battery.
• Do not give the battery a physical impact.
• Use only the battery specified in the other manual of this projector.
• Make sure the plus and minus terminals are correctly aligned when loading
the battery.
• If you observe a leakage of the battery, wipe out the flower and then
replace the battery. If the flower adheres your body or clothes, rinse well with
water.
• Obey the local laws on disposing the battery.
Safety Precautions (continued)
5
Safety Precautions (continued)
CAUTION
Be careful in moving the projector.
Neglect could result in an injury or damage.
• Do not move the projector during use. Before moving, disconnect the
power cord and all external connections, and close the slide lens door or
attach the lens cap.
• Avoid any impact or shock to the projector.
• Do not drag the projector.
• For moving the projector, use the enclosed case or bag if provided.
Do not put anything on top of the projector.
Placing anything on the projector could result in loss of balance or falling,
and cause an injury or damage. Use special caution in households where
children are present.
Do not attach anything other than specified things to the projector.
Neglect could result in an injury or damage.
• Some projector has a screw thread in a lens part. Do not attach anything
other than specified options (such as conversion lens) to the screw thread.
Avoid a smoky, humid or dusty place.
Placing the projector in a smoke, a highly humid, dusty place, oily soot or
corrosive gas could result in fire or electrical shock.
• Do not place the projector near a smoky, humid or dusty place (ex.
a smoking space, a kitchen, a beach, etc.). Do not place the projector
outdoors.
• Do not use a humidifier near the projector.
Take care of the air filter to normal ventilate.
The air filter should be cleaned periodically. If the air filter becomes clogged
by dust or the like, internal temperature rises and could cause malfunction.
The projector may display the message such as “CHECK THE AIR FLOW”
or turn off the projector, to prevent the internal heat level rising.
• When the indicators or a message prompts you to clean the air filter, clean
the air filter as soon as possible.
• If the soiling will not come off the air filter, or it becomes damaged, replace
the air filter.
• Use the air filter of the specified type only. Please order the air filter
specified in the other manual of this projector to your dealer.
• When you replace the lamp, replace also the air filter. The air filter may be
attached when you buy a replacement lamp for this projector.
• Do not turn on the projector without air filter.
Avoid a high temperature environment.
The heat could have adverse influence on the cabinet of the projector and
other parts. Do not place the projector, the remote control and other parts in
direct sunlight or near a hot object such as heater, etc.
Avoid Magnetism.
Manufacture strongly recommends to avoid any magnetic contact that is not
shielded or protected on or near the projector itself. (ie.,. Magnetic Security
Devices, or other projector accessory that contains magnetic material that has not
been provided by the manufacture etc.) Magnetic objects may cause interruption
of the projector's internal mechanical performance which may interfere with cooling
fans speed or stopping, and may cause the projector to completely shut down
.
6
Safety Precautions (continued)
NOTE
Do not give the remote control any physical impact.
A physical impact could cause damage or malfunction of the remote control.
• Take care not to drop the remote control.
• Do not place the projector or heavy objects on the remote control.
Take care of the lens.
• Close the slide lens door or attach the lens cap to prevent the lens surface being
scratched when the projector is not used.
• Do not touch the lens to prevent fog or dirt of the lens that cause deterioration of display
quality.
• Use commercially available lens tissue to clean the lens (used to clean cameras,
eyeglasses, etc.). Be careful not to scratch the lens with hard objects.
Take care of the cabinet and the remote control.
Incorrect care could have adverse influence such as discoloration, peeling paint, etc.
• Use a soft cloth to clean the cabinet and control panel of the projector and the remote
control. When excessively soiled dilute a neutral detergent in water, wet and wring out the
soft cloth and afterward wipe with a dry soft cloth. Do not use undiluted detergent directly.
• Do not use an aerosol sprays, solvents, volatile substances or abrasive cleaner.
• Before using chemical wipes, be sure to read and observe the instructions.
• Do not allow long-term close contact with rubber or vinyl.
About bright spots or dark spots.
Although bright spots or dark spots may appear on the screen, this is a unique characteristic of
liquid crystal displays, and such do not constitute or imply a machine defect.
Be careful of printing of the LCD panel.
If the projector continues projecting a still image, inactive images or 16:9 aspect images in
case of 4:3 panel, etc., for long time, the LCD panel might possibly be printed.
CAUTION
Remove the power cord for complete separation.
• For safety purposes, disconnect the power cord if the projector is not to be
used for prolonged periods of time.
• Before cleaning, turn off and unplug the projector. Neglect could result in
fire or electrical shock.
Ask your dealer to cleaning inside of the projector about every
year.
Accumulations of dust inside the projector cause result in fire or malfunction.
Cleaning inside is more effective if performed before every humid periods
such as rainy season.
• Do not clean inside yourself because it is dangerous.
Disconnect the
plug from the
power outlet.
7
Safety Precautions (continued)
NOTE
About consumables.
Lamp, LCD panels, polarizors and other optical components, and air filter and cooling fans
have a different lifetime in each. These parts may need to be replaced after a long usage
time.
• This product isn’t designed for continuous use of long time. In the case of continuous use
for 6 hours or more, or use for 6 hours or more every day (even if it isn’t continuous), or
repetitious use, the lifetime may be shortened, and these parts may need to be replaced
even if one year has not passed since the beginning of using.
• Any inclining use beyond the adjustment range explained in these user’s manuals may
shorten the lifetimes of the consumables.
Before turning on the power, make the projector cool down adequately.
After turning the projector off, pushing the restart switch or interrupting of the power supply,
make the projector cool down adequately. Operation in a high temperature state of the
projector causes a damage of the electrode and un-lighting of the lamp.
Avoid strong rays.
Any strong ray (such as direct rays of the sun or room lighting) onto the remote control
sensors could invalidate the remote control.
Avoid radio interference.
Any interfering radiation could cause disordered image or noises.
• Avoid radio generator such as a mobile telephone, transceiver, etc. around the projector.
About displaying characteristic.
The display condition of the projector (such as color, contrast, etc.) depends on
characteristic of the screen, because the projector uses a liquid crystal display panel. The
display condition can differ from the display of CRT.
• Do not use a polarized screen. It can cause red image.
Turn the power on/off in right order.
To prevent any trouble, turn on/off the projector in right order mentioned below unless
specifying.
• Power on the projector before the computer or video tape recorder.
• Power off the projector after the computer or video tape recorder.
Take care not to fatigue your eyes.
Rest the eyes periodically.
Set the sound volume at a suitable level to avoid bothering other people.
• It is better to keep the volume level low and close the windows at night to protect the
neighborhood environment.
Connecting with notebook computer
When connecting with notebook computer, set to valid the RGB external image output
(setting CRT display or simultaneous display of LCD and CRT).
Please read instruction manual of the notebook for more information.
8
• If the lamp should break (it will make a loud bang when it does), unplug
the power cord from the outlet, and make sure to request a replacement
lamp from your local dealer. Note that shards of glass could damage the
projector’s internals, or cause injury during handling, so please do not try to
clean the projector or replace the lamp yourself.
• If the lamp should break (it will make a loud bang when it does), ventilate
the room well, and make sure not to breathe the gas that comes out of the
projector vents, or get it in your eyes or mouth.
• Before replacing the lamp, make sure the power switch is off and the
power cable is not plugged in, then wait at least 45 minutes for the lamp to
cool sufficiently. Handling the lamp while hot can cause burns, as well as
damaging the lamp.
Lamp
The projector uses a high-pressure mercury glass lamp. The lamp can break with a
loud bang, or burn out, if jolted or scratched, handled while hot, or worn over time.
Note that each lamp has a different lifetime, and some may burst or burn out soon after
you start using them. In addition, when the bulb bursts, it is possible for shards of
glass to fly into the lamp housing, and for gas containing mercury to escape from the
projector’s vent holes.
About disposal of a lamp • This product contains a mercury lamp; do not put in trash.
Dispose of in accord with environmental laws.
For lamp recycling, go to www.lamprecycle.org. (in USA)
For product disposal, contact your local government agency or www.eiae.org (in the US)
or www.epsc.ca (in Canada).
For more information, call your dealer.
• Do not open the lamp cover while the projector is suspended from above.
This is dangerous, since if the lamp’s bulb has broken, the shards will
fall out when the cover is opened. In addition, working in high places is
dangerous, so ask your local dealer to have the lamp replaced even if the
bulb is not broken.
• Do not use the projector with the lamp cover removed. At the lamp
replacing, make sure that the screws are screwed in firmly. Loose screws
could result in damage or injury.
• Use the lamp of the specified type only.
• If the lamp breaks soon after the first time it is used, it is possible that
there are electrical problems elsewhere besides the lamp. If this happens,
contact your local dealer or a service representative.
• Handle with care: jolting or scratching could cause the lamp bulb to burst
during use.
• Using the lamp for long periods of time, could cause it dark, not to light up
or to burst. When the pictures appear dark, or when the color tone is poor,
please replace the lamp as soon as possible. Do not use old (used) lamps;
this is a cause of breakage.
WARNING
HIGH VOLTAGE HIGH TEMPERATURE HIGH PRESSURE
Disconnect
the plug from
the power
outlet
9
Regulatory Notices
FCC Statement Warning
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
WARNING: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed
to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation.
This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference
to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur
in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio
or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on,
the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following
measures:
- Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
- Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
- Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver
is connected.
- Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
INSTRUCTIONS TO USERS: This equipment complies with the requirements of FCC
(Federal Communication Commission) equipment provided that the following conditions
are met. Some cables have to be used with the core set. Use the accessory cable or a
designated-type cable for the connection. For cables that have a core only at one end,
connect the core to the projector.
CAUTION: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
For the Customers in CANADA
NOTICE: This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Warranty And After-Service
Unless seen any abnormal operations (mentioned with the first paragraph of
WARNING in this manual), when a problem occurs with the equipment, first refer to the
“Troubleshooting” section of the “Operating Guide”, and run through the suggested checks.
If this does not resolve the problem contact your dealer or service company. They will tell
you what warranty condition is applied.
2
Contents
Introduction ...............3
Features . .....................3
Checking the contents of package
... 3
Part names . ...................4
Setting up . ................7
Arrangement ...................7
Connecting with your devices
.....10
Connecting to a power supply
.....16
Fastening the adapter cover ......
17
Using the security bar and slot . . . . 17
Remote control ............18
Installing the batteries ...........18
About the remote control signal . . . 19
Changing the frequency of remote
control signal ..................19
Using as a simple PC mouse & keyboard
. . 20
Power on/off . .............21
Turning on the power . ..........21
Turning off the power . ..........22
Operating . ...............23
Adjusting the volume ............23
Temporarily muting the sound .....23
Selecting an input signal .........24
Searching an input signal . .......25
Selecting an aspect ratio .........26
Adjusting the projector's elevator . . 27
Adjusting the zoom and focus .....27
Using the automatic adjustment feature
...28
Adjusting the position . ..........28
Correcting the keystone distortions
.. 29
Using the magnify feature ........30
Temporarily freezing the screen . . . 31
Temporarily blanking the screen . . 31
Using the menu function . .......32
EASY MENU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
A
SPECT
, A
UTO
KEYSTONE
,
K
EYSTONE
,
PICTURE MODE,
E
CO
MODE
, I
NSTALLATION
,
R
ESET
, F
ILTER
TIME
, L
ANGUAGE
,
A
DVANCED
MENU
, E
XIT
PICTURE menu . ...........36
B
RIGHTNESS
, C
ONTRAST
, G
AMMA
, C
OLOR
TEMP
,
COLOR, TINT, SHARPNESS, ACTIVE IRIS, MY MEMORY
IMAGE menu . .............39
A
SPECT
, O
VER
SCAN
, V
POSITION
, H
POSITION
,
H
PHASE
, H
SIZE
, A
UTO
ADJUST
EXECUTE
INPUT menu . .............42
PROGRESSIVE, VIDEO NR, COLOR SPACE,
V
IDEO FORMAT, HDMI FORMAT, HDMI RANGE,
C
OMPUTER IN, FRAME LOCK, RESOLUTION
SETUP menu ..............46
A
UTO
KEYSTONE
,
K
EYSTONE
, A
UTO
ECO
MODE
,
E
CO
MODE
,
I
NSTALLATION
, S
TANDBY
MODE
,
M
ONITOR
OUT
AUDIO menu . .............49
V
OLUME
, S
PEAKER
, A
UDIO
SOURCE
,
M
IC
LEVEL
, M
IC
VOLUME
SCREEN menu .............50
L
ANGUAGE
, M
ENU
POSITION
, B
LANK
,
S
TART
UP
,
M
yScreen
, M
yScreen Lock
,
M
ESSAGE
, S
OURCE
NAME
, T
EMPLATE
, C.
C
.
OPTION menu . ............56
A
UTO
SEARCH
, A
UTO
KEYSTONE
,
D
IRECT
POWER
ON
, A
UTO
POWER
OFF
,
L
AMP
TIME
, F
ILTER
TIME
, M
Y
BUTTON
,
M
Y
SOURCE
, S
ERVICE
NETWORK menu ...........67
W
IRELESS
SETUP
, W
IRELESS
INFORMATION
,
W
IRED
SETUP
, W
IRED
INFORMATION
,
P
ROJECTOR
NAME
, M
Y
IMAGE
, A
MX
D
.
D
.,
P
RESENTATION
, S
ERVICE
SECURITY menu ...........78
S
ECURITY
PASSWORD
CHANGE
,
M
yScreen
PASSWORD
, P
IN
LOCK
,
T
RANSITION
DETECTOR
, M
Y
TEXT
PASSWORD
,
M
Y
TEXT
DISPLAY
, M
Y
TEXT
WRITING
,
C
LONING
LOCK
Presentation tools . ........84
PC-LESS Presentation
...........84
Drawing Function
................
94
USB Display
(Windows computer)
.....
100
USB Display
(Mac computer)
.......
104
Maintenance .............108
Replacing the lamp ............108
Cleaning and replacing the air filter . 110
Other care ................... 112
Troubleshooting . .........113
Related messages . ........... 113
Regarding the indicator lamps . . . 115
Resetting all settings ........... 118
Phenomena that may be easy
to be mistaken for machine defects
.. 118
Specifications ............123
3
Introduction
Introduction
• Keep the original packing materials, for future reshipment. Be sure
to use the original packing materials when moving the projector. Use special
caution for the lens.
• The projector may make a rattling sound when tilted, moved or shaken, since
a flap to control the air flow inside of the projector has moved. Be aware that
this is not a failure or malfunction.
NOTE
The projector provides you with the broad use by the following features.
Checking the contents of package
This projector has a variety of I/O ports that supposedly cover for any
business scene. The HDMI port can support various image equipment which
have digital interface to get clearer pictures on a screen.
If you insert a USB storage device, such as a USB memory, into the USB
TYPE A port and select the port as the input source, you can view images
stored in the device.
This projector can be controlled and monitored via LAN connection.
Furthermore, you can use the designated USB wireless adapter (optional) to
establish wireless LAN connection.
The double layer filter system is expected to function longer and offers
youless maintenance frequency.
The built-in 16W speaker can deliver sufficient sound volume in a large space
like a classroom without external speakers.
Please see the Contents of package section in the User’s Manual (concise)
which is a book. Your projector should come with the items shown there. Require
of your dealer immediately if any items are missing.
Features
►Keep small parts away from children and pets. Take care
not to put in the mouth. If swallowed, consult a physician immediately for
emergency treatment.
WARNING
4
Introduction
►Do not open or remove any portion of the product, unless the
manuals direct it.
►Do not subject the projector to unstable conditions.
►Do not apply a shock or pressure to this product.
►Do not look into the lens and the openings on the projector while the lamp is
on.
WARNING
►Do not touch around the lamp cover and the exhaust
vents during use or just after use, since it is too hot.
►Do not attach anything onto the lens except the lens cover of this
projector because it could damage the lens, such as melting the lens.
CAUTION
(continued on next page)
Part names
(1) Lamp cover (108)
The lamp unit is inside.
(2) Speaker (
23, 49)
(3) Filter cover (
110)
The air filter and intake vent are inside.
(4) Elevator feet (x2) (
27)
(5) Elevator buttons (x2) (
27)
(6) Remote sensor (
19)
(7) Lens (
112)
(8) Lens cover
(9) Intake vents
(10) Control panel (
5)
(11) FOCUS ring (
27)
(12) ZOOM ring (
27)
(13) AC IN (AC inlet) (
16)
(14) Exhaust vent
(15) Rear panel (
5)
(8)
(9)
(4)
(7)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(2)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(10)
(1)
(11)
(12)
(5)
5
Introduction
Part names (continued)
Control panel
(1) STANDBY/ON button (
21)
(2) INPUT button (
24)
(3) MENU button (
32)
(4) LAMP indicator (
115)
(5) TEMP indicator (
115)
(6) POWER indicator (
115)
Rear panel (
10 ~ 15)
(1) LAN port
(2) USB TYPE A port(x2)
(3) USB TYPE B port
(4) HDMI port
(5) MIC port (
15)
(6) AUDIO IN1 port
(7) AUDIO IN2 port
(8) AUDIO IN3 (R,L) ports
(9) AUDIO OUT (R,L) ports
(10) COMPUTER IN1 port
(11) COMPUTER IN2 port
(12) MONITOR OUT port
(13) CONTROL port
(14) VIDEO port
(15) S-VIDEO port
(16) Security slot (
17)
(17) Security bar (
17)
(continued on next page)
(1) (3)(2) (6)
(4)(5)
AUDIO IN
1
2
3
AUDIO OUT
(11)(10)(4)(3)(2)
(5)
(8)
(16)
(7)
(9) (14)
(13)
(12)
(1)
(15) (6)
(17)
6
Introduction
Part names (continued)
Remote control
(1) VIDEO button (
24)
(2) COMPUTER button (
24)
(3) SEARCH button (
25)
(4) STANDBY/ON button (
21)
(5) ASPECT button (
26)
(6) AUTO button (
28)
(7) BLANK button (
31)
(8) MAGNIFY - ON button (
30)
(9) MAGNIFY - OFF button (
30)
(10) MY SOURCE/DOC.CAMERA button
(
25, 59)
(11) VOLUME - button (
23)
(12) PAGE UP button (
20)
(13) PAGE DOWN button (
20)
(14) VOLUME + button (
23)
(15) MUTE button (
23)
(16) FREEZE button (
31)
(17) MY BUTTON - 1 button (
58, 59)
(18) MY BUTTON - 2 button (
58, 59)
(19) KEYSTONE button (
29)
(20) POSITION button (
28, 32)
(21) MENU button (
32)
(22) ▲/▼/◄/► cursor buttons (
32)
(23) ENTER button (
32)
(24) ESC button (
32)
(25) RESET button (
32)
(26) Battery cover (
18)
Back of
the remote control
(2)
(1)
(6)
(5)
(16)
(8)
(9)
(19)
(17)
(20)
(22)
(24)
(10)
(4)
(3)
(7)
(12)
(14)
(11)
(13)
(15)
(18)
(21)
(23)
(25)
(26)
VIDEO
DOC.CAMERA
KEYSTONE
ASPECT
SEARCH
BLANK
MUTE
MY BUTTON
POSITION
ESC
MENU
RESET
COMPUTER
MY SOURCE/
AUTO
MAGNIFY
PAGE
DOWN
ON
OFF
FREEZE
UP
࡯
㧗
VOLUME
ENTER
7
Setting up
Setting up
Install the projector according to the environment and manner the projector will be
used in.
For the case of installation in a special state such as ceiling mount, the specified
mounting accessories (
Specifications in the User’s Manual (concise)) and
service may be required. Before installing the projector, consult your dealer about
your installation.
Arrangement
Refer to tables T-1,T-2 and T-3 at the back of User's Manual (concise) as well as
the following to determine the screen size and projection distance.
The values shown in the table are calculated for a full size screen.
(continued on next page)
• If the projector is used at an altitude of about 1600 m (5250 feet) or higher,
set ALTITUDE of the SERVICE item in the OPTION menu to HIGH (
59).
Otherwise, set it to NORMAL. If the projector is used with a wrong setting, it may
cause damage to the projector itself or the parts inside.
a Screen size (diagonal)
b Projection distance (±10%, from the projector’s end)
c1 , c2 Screen height (±10%)
8
Setting up
Arrangement (continued)
WARNING
(continued on next page)
►Install the projector where you can access the power
outlet easily. If an abnormality should occur, unplug the projector urgently.
Otherwise it could cause a fire or electric shock.
►Do not subject the projector to unstable conditions. If the projector falls
or topples over, it could result in injury or damage to the projector and the
surrounding things. Using a damaged projector could result in a fire and an
electric shock.
• Do not place the projector in unstable places, such as an inclined surface,
places subject to vibration, on top of a wobbly table or cart, or a surface that is
smaller than the projector.
• Do not put the projector on its side, front or rear position.
• Do not attach nor place anything on the projector unless otherwise specified in
the manual.
• Do not use any mounting accessories except the accessories specified by the
manufacturer. Read and keep the manuals of the accessories used.
• For special installation such as ceiling mounting, be sure to consult your dealer
beforehand.
►
Do not install the projector near thermally conductive or flammable
things. Such things when heated by the projector could result in a fire and burns.
• Do not place the projector on a metal stand.
►Do not place the projector where any oils, such as cooking or machine
oil, are used. Oil may harm the product, resulting in malfunction, or falling from
the mounted position.
►Do not place the projector in a place where it may get wet. Getting the
projector wet or inserting liquid into the projector could cause a fire and an
electric shock, and damage the projector.
• Do not place the projector near water, such as in a bathroom, kitchen, or
poolside.
• Do not place the projector outdoors or by the window.
• Do not place anything containing liquid near the projector.
9
Setting up
Arrangement (continued)
►Place the projector in a cool place with sufficient
ventilation. The projector may shutdown automatically or may malfunction if its
internal temperature is too high.
Using a damaged projector could result in a fire and an electric shock.
• Do not place the projector in direct sunlight or near hot objects such as heaters.
• Do not place the projector where the air from an air conditioner or similar unit
will blow on it directly.
• Keep a space of 30 cm or more between a side of the projector and other
objects such as walls.
• Do not place the projector on carpet, cushions or bedding.
• Do not stop up, block nor cover the projector's vent holes. Do not place
anything around the projector that could be sucked in or stuck to the projector's
intake vents.
• Do not place the projector at places that are exposed to magnetic fields, doing
so can cause the cooling fans inside the projector to malfunction.
►Avoid placing the projector in smoky, humid or dusty place. Placing the
projector in such places could cause a fire, an electric shock and malfunction of
the projector.
• Do not place the projector near humidifiers. Especially for an ultrasonic
humidifier, chlorine and minerals contained in tap water are atomized and could
be deposited in the projector causing image degradation or other problems.
• Do not place the projector in a smoking area, kitchen, passageway
or by the window.
• Position the projector to prevent light from directly hitting the projector's remote
sensor.
• Do not place the product in a place where radio interference may be caused.
• Check and correct the setting for ALTITUDE of SERVICE in the OPTION menu
according to the usage environment (
59). If the projector is used with a wrong
setting, it may cause damage to the projector itself or the parts inside.
• Keep heat-sensitive things away from the projector. Otherwise, they may be
damaged by the heat from the projector.
CAUTION
NOTICE
10
Setting up
Connecting with your devices
Before connecting the projector to a device, consult the manual of the device to
confirm that the device is suitable for connecting with this projector and prepare
the required accessories, such as a cable in accord with the signal of the device.
Consult your dealer when the required accessory did not come with the product or
the accessory is damaged.
After making sure that the projector and the devices are turned off, perform
the connection, according to the following instructions. Refer to the figures in
subsequent pages.
Before connecting the projector to a network system, be sure to read Network
Guide too.
►Use only the appropriate accessories. Otherwise it could
cause a fire or damage the projector and devices.
• Use only the accessories specified or recommended by the projector’s
manufacturer. It may be regulated under some standard.
• Neither disassemble nor modify the projector and the accessories.
• Do not use the damaged accessory. Be careful not to damage the accessories.
Route a cable so that it is neither stepped on nor pinched out.
WARNING
►For a cable with a core at only one end, connect the end
with the core to the projector. That may be required by EMI regulations.
CAUTION
• Do not turn on or off the projector while connected to a device in
operation, unless that is directed in the manual of the device. Otherwise it may
cause malfunction in the device or projector.
• The function of some input ports can be selected according to your usage
requirements. Check the reference page indicated beside each port in the
following illustration.
• Be careful not to mistakenly connect a connector to a wrong port. Otherwise it
may cause malfunction in the device or projector.
- When connecting a connector to a port, make sure that the shape of the
connector fits the port.
- Tighten the screws to connect a connector equipped with screws to a port.
- Use the cables with straight plugs, not L-shaped ones, as the input ports of
the projector are recessed.
NOTE
(continued on next page)
11
Setting up
• Plug-and-Play is a system composed of a computer, its operating system
and peripheral equipment (i.e. display devices). This projector is VESA DDC
2B compatible. Plug-and-Play can be used by connecting this projector to a
computer that is VESA DDC (display data channel) compatible.
-
Take advantage of this feature by connecting a computer cable to the
COMPUTER IN1 port (DDC 2B compatible). Plug-and-Play may not work
properly if any other type of connection is attempted.
-
Please use the standard drivers in your computer as this projector is a Plug-
and-Play monitor.
About Plug-and-Play capability
(continued on next page)
Connecting with your devices (continued)
12
Connecting with your devices (continued)
• Before connecting the projector to a computer, consult the computer’s
manual and check the compatibility of the signal level, the synchronization
methods and the display resolution output to the projector.
- Some signal may need an adapter to input this projector.
- Some computers have multiple screen display modes that may include some
signals which are not supported by this projector.
- Although the projector can display signals with resolution up to UXGA
(1600x1200), the signal will be converted to the projector’s panel resolution
before being displayed. The best display performance will be achieved if the
resolutions of the input signal and the projector panel are identical.
• If you connect this projector and a notebook computer, you need output the
display to an external monitor, or output simultaneously to the internal display
and an external monitor. Consult the computer's manual for the setting.
• Depending on the input signal, the automatic adjustment function of this
projector may take some time and not function correctly.
- Note that a composite sync signal or sync-on-green signal may confuse the
automatic adjustment function of this projector (
28).
- If the automatic adjustment function does not work correctly, you may not see
the dialog to set the display resolution. In such a case, use an external display
device. You may be able to see the dialog and set an appropriate display
resolution.
NOTE
(continued on next page)
AUDIO IN
1
2
3
AUDIO OUT
Computer
Setting up
13
Setting up
Connecting with your devices (continued)
(continued on next page)
• If an oversized USB storage device blocks the LAN port, use a USB
extension cable to connect the USB storage device.
NOTE
► Before connecting the projector to a network system be sure
to obtain the consent of the administrator of the network.
►Do not connect the LAN port to any network that might have the excessive
voltage.
►The designated USB wireless adapter that is sold as an option is required to
use the wireless network function of this projector.
►Before removing the USB storage device from the port of the projector, be
sure to use the REMOVE USB function on the thumbnail screen to secure your
data (
87).
►Do not use any extension cable or device when connecting the adapter to the
projector. Before you insert or pull out the USB wireless adapter from the projec-
tor, turn off the power of the projector and pull out the power cord’s plug from the
outlet. Do not touch the USB wireless adapter while the projector is receiving AC
power.
►To connect both the LAN cable and USB device to the projector, use a LAN
cable that is fl at on the side where the plug’s wire is visible. Otherwise, both of
them cannot be connected correctly, or the wire may break (malfunction).
CAUTION
AUDIO IN
1
2
3
AUDIO OUT
Computer External device
Access
point
USB
wireless
adapter
(optional)
USB
storage
device
14
Setting up
• The HDMI port of this model is compatible with HDCP (High-band-
width Digital Content Protection) and therefore capable of displaying a video
signal from HDCP compatible DVD players or the like.
- The HDMI supports the following signals.
Video signal : 480i@60, 480p@60, 576i@50, 576p@50, 720p@50/60,
1080i@50/60, 1080p@50/60
Audio signal : Format Linear PCM
Sampling frequency 48kHz / 44.1kHz / 32kHz
- This projector can be connected with another equipment that has HDMI
TM
connector, but with some equipment the projector may not work properly,
something like no video.
- Be sure to use an HDMI
TM
cable that has the HDMI
TM
logo.
- Use a Category 2-certifi ed HDMI
TM
cable to input 1080p@50/60 signal to the
projector.
- When the projector is connected with a device having DVI connector, use a
DVI to HDMI
TM
cable to connect with the HDMI input.
NOTE
Connecting with your devices (continued)
(continued on next page)
AUDIO IN
1
2
3
AUDIO OUT
VCR/DVD/Blu-ray Disc
TM
player
15
Setting up
Connecting with your devices (continued)
Monitor
AUDIO IN
1
2
3
AUDIO OUT
Speakers
(with an amplifi er)
Mic
• If a loud feedback noise is produced from the speaker, move the
microphone away from the speaker.
NOTE
•
You can connect a dynamic microphone to the MIC port with a 3.5 mm mini-plug.
In that case, the built-in speaker outputs the sound from the microphone, even
while the sound from the projector is output. You can input line level signal to
the MIC port from equipment such as wireless microphone. Select HIGH in the
MIC LEVEL item of the AUDIO menu when you input line level audio signal to
the MIC port. In the normal mode, the volume of the microphone can be adjusted
separately from the volume of the projector using the menu (
49). In the standby
mode, the volume of the microphone is adjustable with the VOLUME +/- buttons
on the remote control, in synchronization with the volume of the projector (
23).
Even when the sound of projector is set to mute mode by the AUDIO SOURCE
function (
49), the volume of the microphone is adjustable.
In both modes (standby or normal), the MUTE button on the remote control
works on the sounds of the microphone and the projector (
23).
• This projector doesn't support plug-in power for the microphone.
Microphone function
16
Connecting to a power supply
1.
Put the connector of the power cord into the
AC IN (AC inlet) of the projector.
2.
Firmly plug the power cord’s plug into the
outlet. In a couple of seconds after the
power supply connection, the POWER
indicator will light up in steady orange.
►Please use extra caution when connecting the power cord, as
incorrect or faulty connections may result in fire and/or electrical shock.
• Do not touch the power cord with a wet hand.
• Only use the power cord that came with the projector. If it is damaged, consult
your dealer to get a new one. Never modify the power cord.
• Only plug the power cord into an outlet whose voltage is matched to the power
cord. The power outlet should be close to the projector and easily accessible.
Remove the power cord for complete separation.
• Do not distribute the power supply to multiple devices. Doing so may overload
the outlet and connectors, loosen the connection, or result in fire, electric shock
or other accidents.
• Connect the ground terminal for the AC inlet of this unit to the ground terminal
of the building using an appropriate power cord (bundled).
WARNING
Please remember that when the DIRECT POWER
ON function activated (
56), the connection of the
power supply make the projector turn on.
Setting up
►This product is also designed for IT power systems with a phase-to-
phase voltage of 220 to 240 V.
NOTICE
AC IN
Power
cord
17
Use the supplied adapter cover to
prevent the USB wireless adapter from
coming off easily.
1.
Loosen the screw (marked with
triangle) on the bottom left of the
USB TYPE A port.
2.
Insert the tab of the cover into the
hole at the upper right of the USB
TYPE A port in the direction of the
arrow.
3.
Align the screw holes on the
projector and the cover. Then
insert the screw removed from the
projector into the hole and tighten
the screw.
Using the security bar and slot
A commercially available anti-theft chain or
wire can be attached to the security bar on
the projector. Refer to the fi gure to choose
an anti-theft chain or wire.
Also this product has the security slot for
the Kensington lock.
For details, see the manual of the security
tool.
►Do not use the security bar and slot to prevent the projector
from falling down, since it is not designed for it.
WARNING
►Do not place anti-theft chain or wire near the exhaust vents.
It may become too hot.
CAUTION
• The security bar and slot is not comprehensive theft prevention
measures. It is intended to be used as supplemental theft prevention measure.
NOTE
Setting up
Tab
Fastening the adapter cover
►Keep small parts away from children and pets. Take care not
to put in the mouth.
WARNING
2
1
3
Security slot
Anti-theft
chain or wire
security bar
20.3mm
17.5mm
11.7mm
18
Remote control
Installing the batteries
Please insert the batteries into the remote control before using it. If the remote control
starts to malfunction, try to replace the batteries. If you will not use the remote control for
long period, remove the batteries from the remote control and store them in a safe place.
1.
Holding the hook part of the battery
cover, remove it.
2.
Align and insert the two AA batteries
(HITACHI MAXELL or HITACHI MAXELL
ENERGY, Part No.LR6 or R6P)
according
to their plus and minus terminals as indicated in the remote control.
3.
Replace the battery cover in the direction of the arrow and snap it back into place.
►Always handle the batteries with care and use them only as
directed. Improper use may result in battery explosion, cracking or leakage,
which could result in fire, injury and/or pollution of the surrounding environment.
• Be sure to use only the batteries specified. Do not use batteries of different
types at the same time. Do not mix a new battery with used one.
•
Make sure the plus and minus terminals are correctly aligned when loading a battery.
• Keep a battery away from children and pets.
• Do not recharge, short circuit, solder or disassemble a battery.
•
Do not place a battery in a fire or water. Keep batteries in a dark, cool and dry place.
•
If you observe battery leakage, wipe out the leakage and then replace a battery.
If the leakage adheres to your body or clothes, rinse well with water immediately.
• Obey the local laws on disposing the battery.
WARNING
Remote control
213
19
(approx.)
About the remote control signal
The remote control works with the projector’s remote
sensor. This projector has a remote sensor on the front.
The sensor senses the signal within the following range
when the sensor is active:
60 degrees (30 degrees to the left and right of the sensor)
within 3 meters about.
•
The remote control signal reflected in the screen or the like may be available.
If it is difficult to send the signal to the sensor directly, attempt to make the signal reflect.
• The remote control uses infrared light to send signals to the projector (Class 1
LED), so be sure to use the remote control in an area free from obstacles that
could block the remote control’s signal to the projector.
•
The remote control may not work correctly if strong light (such as direct sun
light) or light from an extremely close range (such as from an inverter fluorescent
lamp) shines on the remote sensor of the projector. Adjust the position of
projector avoiding those lights.
NOTE
Remote control
Changing the frequency of remote control signal
The accessory remote control has the two choices on signal
frequency Mode 1:NORMAL and Mode 2:HIGH. If the remote control
does not function properly, attempt to change the signal frequency.
In order to set the Mode, please keep pressing the combination of
two buttons listed below simultaneously for about 3 seconds.
(1)
(2)
VIDEO
DOC.CAMERA
KEYSTONE
ASPECT
SEARCH
BLANK
MUTE
MY BUTTON
POSITION
ESC
MENU
RESET
COMPUTER
MY SOURCE/
AUTO
MAGNIFY
PAGE
DOWN
ON
OFF
FREEZE
UP
࡯
㧗
VOLUME
ENTER
(1) Set to Mode 1:NORMAL... VOLUME - and RESET buttons
(2) Set to Mode 2:HIGH... MAGNIFY OFF and ESC buttons
Please remember that the REMOTE FREQ. in the SERVICE item of
the OPTION menu
(
61)
of the projector to be controlled should be
set to the same mode as the remote control.
20
When the simple mouse & keyboard function of this product does not work
correctly, please check the following.
• When a USB cable connects this projector with a computer having a built-in pointing
device (e.g. track ball) like a laptop computer, open BIOS setup menu, then select the
external mouse and disable the built-in pointing device, because the built-in pointing
device may have priority to this function.
•
Windows XP SP3 or higher is required for this function. And also this function may not work
depending on the computer’s confi gurations and mouse drivers. This function can work with the
computer which can operate general USB mouse or keyboard.
• You cannot do things like press two buttons at once (for instance, pressing two buttons
at the same time to move the mouse pointer diagonally).
•
This function is activated only when the projector is working properly. This function is not
available in any of the following cases:
- While the lamp is warming up. (The POWER indicator blinks in green.)
- When either USB TYPE A or USB TYPE B port is selected.
- While displaying BLANK
(50)
, TEMPLATE
(54)
or MY IMAGE
(75)
screen.
- When any menu is displayed on the screen.
-
While using the cursor buttons to operate the sound or screen functions such as adjusting the
sound volume, correcting the keystone, correcting the picture position and magnifying the screen.
NOTE
Remote control
Using as a simple PC mouse & keyboard
The accessory remote control works as a simple mouse
and keyboard of the computer, when the projector’s USB
TYPE B port and the computer’s type A USB port are
connected.
(1)
(3)
(5)
(2)
(4)
(6)
VIDEO
DOC.CAMERA
KEYSTONE
ASPECT
SEARCH
BLANK
MUTE
MY BUTTON
POSITION
ESC
MENU
RESET
COMPUTER
MY SOURCE/
AUTO
MAGNIFY
PAGE
DOWN
ON
OFF
FREEZE
UP
࡯
㧗
VOLUME
ENTER
(1) PAGE UP key: Press PAGE UP button.
(2) PAGE DOWN key: Press PAGE DOWN button.
(3) Mouse left button: Press ENTER button.
(4) Move pointer: Use the cursor buttons ▲, ▼, ◄ and ►.
(5) ESC key: Press ESC button.
(6) Mouse right button: Press RESET button.
►Improper use of the simple mouse & keyboard
function could damage your equipment. While using this
function, please connect this product only to a computer. Be
sure to check your computer’s manuals before connecting this
product to the computer.
NOTICE
USB TYPE B
port
21
1.
Make sure that the power cord is firmly and
correctly connected to the projector and the
outlet.
Turning on the power
2.
Make sure that the POWER indicator is
steady orange (
115). Then remove the
lens cover.
3.
Press STANDBY/ON button on the
projector or the remote control.
The projection lamp will light up and POWER
indicator will begin blinking in green. When the
power is completely on, the indicator will stop blinking and light in steady
green (
115).
Power on/off
To display the picture, select an input signal according to the section Selecting an
input signal (
24).
Power on/off
The INITIAL SETTING Menu will be displayed by factory default upon startup.
Once the INITIAL SETTING Menu is set, it will not appear until FACTORY RESET
(
66) is executed. If you wish to change the settings, refer to the LANGUAGE
(
50) and ALTITUDE (59) menu.
(1) LANGUAGE: Use the ▲/▼/◄/►
buttons to select the desired language
and press the ENTER button of the
remote control or the INPUT button of
the projector to execute.
(2) ALTITUDE: Use the ▲/▼ buttons to
select NORMAL for altitude below
1600 m (5250 feet), otherwise select
HIGH and press the ENTER button of
the remote control or the INPUT button
of the projector to execute.
VIDE
O
DOC.CAMERA
KEYSTO
NE
ASPECT
SEARC
H
BLAN
K
MUT
E
MY BU
TTON
POSI
TIO
N
ES
C
MENU
RESET
COMPUTER
MY SO
URCE
/
AUTO
MAG
N
IFY
PAG
E
DOWN
ON
OF
F
FREEZE
UP
࡯
㧗
VOLUME
ENTER
STANDBY/ON button
POWER indicator
22
Power on/off
►A strong light is emitted when the projector’s power is on.
Do not look into the lens of the projector or look inside of the projector through
any of the projector’s openings.
►Do not touch around the lamp cover and the exhaust vents during use or just
after use, since it is too hot.
WARNING
1.
Press the STANDBY/ON button on the projector or the remote control.
The message “Power off?” will appear on the screen for about 5 seconds.
Turning off the power
2.
Press the STANDBY/ON button again while the message appears.
The projector lamp will go off, and the POWER indicator will begin blinking in
orange. Then POWER indicator will stop blinking and light in steady orange
when the lamp cooling is complete (
115).
3.
Attach the lens cover, after the POWER indicator turns in steady orange.
Do not turn the projector on for about 10 minutes or more after turning it off.
Also, do not turn the projector off shortly after turning it on. Such operations might
cause the lamp to malfunction or shorten the lifetime of some parts including the lamp.
• Turn the power on/off in right order. Please power on the projector
prior to the connected devices.
• This projector has the function that can make the projector automatically turn
on/off. Please refer to the DIRECT POWER ON (
56) and AUTO POWER
OFF (
57) items of the OPTION menu.
NOTE
23
Operating
1.
Adjusting the volume
Use the VOLUME +/VOLUME - buttons to adjust the volume.
A dialog will appear on the screen to aid you in adjusting the
volume. If you do not do anything, the dialog will automatically
disappear after a few seconds.
● When
is selected for current picture input port, the volume
adjustment is disabled. Please see AUDIO SOURCE item of AUDIO menu
(49).
● Even if the projector is in the standby mode, the volume is adjustable when
both of the following conditions are true:
- An option other than
is selected for STANDBY in the AUDIO SOURCE
item of the AUDIO menu
(
49)
.
-
NORMAL is selected in the STANDBY MODE item of the SETUP menu
(48).
● In the standby mode, the volume of the microphone is adjustable with the
VOLUME +/- buttons on the remote control, in synchronization with the volume
of the projector.
1.
Press MUTE button on the remote control.
A dialog will appear on the screen indicating that you have muted
the sound.
To restore the sound, press the MUTE, VOLUME + or
VOLUME - button. Even if you do not do anything, the dialog
will automatically disappear after a few seconds.
Temporarily muting the sound
● When is selected for current picture input port, the sound is always muted.
Please see AUDIO SOURCE item of AUDIO menu (
49).
● C.C. (Closed Caption) is automatically activated when sound is muted and an
input signal containing C.C. is received. This function is available only when
the signal is NTSC for VIDEO or S-VIDEO, or 480i@60 for COMPUTER IN1
or COMPUTER IN2, and when AUTO is selected for DISPLAY in the C.C.
menu under the SCREEN menu (
55).
VOLUME +/- button
MUTE button
VIDEO
DOC.CAMERA
KEYSTONE
ASPECT
SEARCH
BLANK
MUTE
MY BUTTON
COMPUTER
MY SOURCE/
AUTO
MAGNIFY
PAGE
DOWN
ON
OFF
FREEZE
UP
࡯
㧗
VOLUME
VIDEO
DOC.CAMERA
KEYSTONE
ASPECT
SEARCH
BLANK
MUTE
MY BUTTON
COMPUTER
MY SOURCE/
AUTO
MAGNIFY
PAGE
DOWN
ON
OFF
FREEZE
UP
࡯
㧗
VOLUME
Operating
24
1.
Press INPUT button on the projector.
Each time you press the button, the projector switches its
input port from the current port as below.
Selecting an input signal
● While ON is selected for AUTO SEARCH item in OPTION menu (56), the
projector will keep checking the ports in above order repeatedly till an input
signal is detected.
● It may take several seconds to project the images from the USB TYPE B port.
COMPUTER IN1 COMPUTER IN2 LAN
VIDEO USB TYPE A
S-VIDEO USB TYPE B
HDMI
1.
Press VIDEO button on the remote control.
Each time you press the button, the projector switches its
input port from the current port as below.
● While ON is selected for AUTO SEARCH item in OPTION menu,
the projector will keep checking every port sequentially till an input signal
is detected (
56). If VIDEO button is pressed when COMPUTER IN1,
COMPUTER IN2, LAN, USB TYPE A or USB TYPE B port is selected, the
projector will check HDMI port fi rst.
VIDEO button
VIDEO
DOC.CAMERA
KEYSTONE
ASPECT
SEARCH
BLANK
MUTE
MY BUTTON
COMPUTER
MY SOURCE/
AUTO
MAGNIFY
PAGE
DOWN
ON
OFF
FREEZE
UP
࡯
㧗
VOLUME
1.
Press COMPUTER button on the remote control.
Each time you press the button, the projector switches its
input port from the current port as below.
●
While ON is selected for AUTO SEARCH item in OPTION menu, the
projector will keep checking every port sequentially till an input signal is detected
(
56). If COMPUTER button is pressed when VIDEO, S-VIDEO or HDMI port is
selected, the projector will check COMPUTER IN1 port fi rst.
●
It may take several seconds to project the images from the USB TYPE B port.
COMPUTER button
VIDEO
DOC.CAMERA
KEYSTONE
ASPECT
SEARCH
BLANK
MUTE
MY BUTTON
COMPUTER
MY SOURCE/
AUTO
MAGNIFY
PAGE
DOWN
ON
OFF
FREEZE
UP
࡯
㧗
VOLUME
COMPUTER IN1 COMPUTER IN2 LAN
USB TYPE B
USB TYPE A
HDMI S-VIDEO VIDEO
Operating
INPUT
button
25
VIDEO
DOC.CAMERA
KEYSTONE
ASPECT
SEARCH
BLANK
MUTE
MY BUTTON
COMPUTER
MY SOURCE/
AUTO
MAGNIFY
PAGE
DOWN
ON
OFF
FREEZE
UP
࡯
㧗
VOLUME
MY SOURCE /
DOC. CAMERA button
1.
Press the MY SOURCE / DOC. CAMERA button on
the remote control. The input signal will be changed
into the signal you set as MY SOURCE (
59).
● This function also can use for document camera. Select the
input port that connected the document camera.
Operating
1.
Press SEARCH button on the remote control.
The projector will start to check its input ports as below in
order to fi nd any input signals.
When input signal is detected, the projector will stop
searching and display the image. If no signal is found,
the projector will return to the state selected before the
operation.
Searching an input signal
● While ON is selected for AUTO SEARCH item in OPTION menu (56), the
projector will keep checking the ports in above order repeatedly till an input
signal is detected.
●
It may take several seconds to project the images from the USB TYPE B port.
SEARCH button
VIDEO
DOC.CAMERA
KEYSTONE
ASPECT
SEARCH
BLANK
MUTE
MY BUTTON
COMPUTER
MY SOURCE/
AUTO
MAGNIFY
PAGE
DOWN
ON
OFF
FREEZE
UP
࡯
㧗
VOLUME
COMPUTER IN1 COMPUTER IN2 LAN
VIDEO USB TYPE A
S-VIDEO USB TYPE B
HDMI
Selecting an input signal(continued)
26
Operating
Selecting an aspect ratio
● ASPECT button does not work when no proper signal is inputted.
● NORMAL mode keeps the original aspect ratio setting.
● The display will be dark for a split second while switching the Aspect, but this
is not a malfunction.
For a computer signal
CP-X2015WN/CP-X2515WN/CP-X3015WN/CP-X4015WN:
NORMAL
4:3
16:9
16:10
CP-WX2515WN/CP-WX3015WN:
NORMAL
4:3
16:9
16:10
NATIVE
For a video signal, s-video signal or component video signal
CP-X2015WN/CP-X2515WN/CP-X3015WN/CP-X4015WN:
4:3
16:9
14:9
CP-WX2515WN/CP-WX3015WN:
4:3
16:9
16:10
14:9
NATIVE
For an input signal from the LAN, USB TYPE A or USB TYPE B port, or
if there is no signal
CP-X2015WN/CP-X2515WN/CP-X3015WN/CP-X4015WN: 4:3 (fi xed)
CP-WX2515WN/CP-WX3015WN: 16:10 (fi xed)
1.
Press ASPECT button on the remote control.
Each time you press the button, the projector switches the
mode for aspect ratio in turn.
ASPECT button
For an HDMI
TM
signal
CP-X2015WN/CP-X2515WN/CP-X3015WN/CP-X4015WN:
NORMAL
4:3
16:9
16:10
14:9
CP-WX2515WN/CP-WX3015WN:
NORMAL
4:3
16:9
16:10
14:9
NATIVE
VIDEO
DOC.CAMERA
KEYSTONE
ASPECT
SEARCH
BLANK
MUTE
MY BUTTON
COMPUTER
MY SOURCE/
AUTO
MAGNIFY
PAGE
DOWN
ON
OFF
FREEZE
UP
࡯
㧗
VOLUME
27
Operating
Adjusting the projector’s elevator
When the place to put the projector is slightly uneven
to the left or right, use the elevator feet to place the
projector horizontally.
Using the feet can also tilt the projector in order to
project at a suitable angle to the screen, elevating the
front side of the projector within 14 degrees.
This projector has 2 elevator feet and 2 elevator buttons.
An elevator foot is adjustable while pushing the elevator
button on the same side as it.
1.
Holding the projector, push the elevator buttons to
loose the elevator feet.
2.
Position the front side of the projector to the desired
height.
3.
Release the elevator buttons in order to lock the
elevator feet.
4.
After making sure that the elevator feet are locked,
put the projector down gently.
5.
If necessary, the elevator feet can be manually
twisted to make more precise adjustments. Hold the
projector when twisting the feet.
►Do not handle the elevator buttons without holding the
projector, since the projector may drop down.
►Do not tilt the projector other than elevating its front within 14 degrees using
the adjuster feet. A tilt of the projector exceeding the restriction could cause
malfunction or shortening the lifetime of consumables, or the projector itself.
CAUTION
FOCUS ring
ZOOM ring
1.
Use the ZOOM ring to adjust the screen size.
2.
Use the FOCUS ring to focus the picture.
Adjusting the zoom and focus
14°
To loose an
elevator foot, push
the elevator button
on the same side
as it.
To finely
adjust, twist
the foot.
28
Operating
1.
Press POSITION button on the remote control when no menu is
indicated.
The “POSITION” indication will appear on the screen.
Adjusting the position
2.
Use the ▲/▼/◄/► cursor buttons to adjust the picture position.
When you want to reset the operation, press RESET button on
the remote control during the operation.
To complete this operation, press POSITION button again. Even if
you do not do anything, the dialog will automatically disappear
after a few seconds.
●
When this function is performed on a video signal or an s-video signal, some image
such as an extra-line may appear at outside of the picture.
● When this function is performed on a video signal or s-video signal, the range of
this adjustment depends on OVER SCAN in IMAGE menu (
40) setting. It is not
possible to adjust when OVER SCAN is set to 10.
● If POSITION button is pressed when a menu is indicated on screen, the displayed
picture does not move its position but the menu does.
● This function is unavailable for a signal from the LAN, USB TYPE A, USB TYPE B
or HDMI port.
1.
Press AUTO button on the remote control.
Pressing this button performs the following.
Using the automatic adjustment feature
For a computer signal
The vertical position, the horizontal position and the horizontal
phase will be automatically adjusted.
Make sure that the application window is set to its maximum size
prior to attempting to use this feature. A dark picture may still be
incorrectly adjusted. Use a bright picture when adjusting.
For a video signal and s-video signal
The video format best suited for the respective input signal will be selected
automatically. This function is available only when the AUTO is selected for
the VIDEO FORMAT item in the INPUT menu (
43).
The vertical position and
horizontal position will be automatically set to the default.
● The automatic adjustment operation requires approx. 10 seconds. Also please
note that it may not function correctly with some input.
● When this function is performed for a video signal, a certain extra such as a line
may appear outside a picture.
● When this function is performed for a computer signal, a black frame may be
displayed on the edge of the screen, depending on the computer model.
●
The items adjusted by this function may vary when the FINE or DISABLE is selected
for the AUTO ADJUST item of the SERVICE item in the OPTION menu (
60).
POSITION button
POSITION
ESC
MENU
RESET
ENTER
AUTO button
For a component video signal
The vertical position and horizontal position will be automatically set to the default.
The horizontal phase will be automatically adjusted.
VIDEO
DOC.CAMERA
KEYSTONE
ASPECT
SEARCH
BLANK
MUTE
MY BUTTON
COMPUTER
MY SOURCE/
AUTO
MAGNIFY
PAGE
DOWN
ON
OFF
FREEZE
UP
࡯
㧗
VOLUME
29
Operating
1.
Press KEYSTONE button on the remote
control. A dialog will appear on the screen
to aid you in correcting the distortion.
Correcting the keystone distortions
2.
Use the ▲/▼ cursor buttons to select AUTO or MANUAL
operation, and press the ► button to perform the following.
(1) AUTO executes automatic vertical keystone correction.
(2) MANUAL displays a dialog for keystone correction.
Use the ◄/► buttons for adjustment.
To close the dialog and complete this operation, press
KEYSTONE button again. Even if you do not do anything, the
dialog will automatically disappear after a few seconds.
● The menu or dialog will automatically disappear after several seconds of
inactivity. Pressing the KEYSTONE button again fi nishes the operation and
closes the menu or dialog.
● The adjustable range of this function will vary among inputs. For some input,
this function may not work well.
● When REAR / CEILING or FRONT / CEILING is selected for the
INSTALLATION item in the SETUP menu, the automatic vertical keystone
correction function may not work correctly if the projector screen is slanted or
tilted downwards.
● When the zoom adjustment is set to the TELE (telephoto focus), this function
may be excessive. This function should be used when the zoom adjustment
is set to the full WIDE (wide-angle focus) whenever possible.
● When the projector is placed on the level (about ±4°), the automatic keystone
distortion correction may not work.
● When the projector is inclined to near ±30 degree or over, this function may
not work well.
● This function will be unavailable when the TRANSITION DETECTOR is on
(
81).
● The display will be dark for a split second while switching the KEYSTONE,
but this is not a malfunction.
KEYSTONE button
VIDEO
DOC.CAMERA
KEYSTONE
ASPECT
SEARCH
BLANK
MUTE
MY BUTTON
COMPUTER
MY SOURCE/
AUTO
MAGNIFY
PAGE
DOWN
ON
OFF
FREEZE
UP
࡯
㧗
VOLUME
30
Operating
1.
Using the magnify feature
2.
MAGNIFY
ON/OFF button
VIDEO
DOC.CAMERA
KEYSTONE
ASPECT
SEARCH
BLANK
MUTE
MY BUTTON
COMPUTER
MY SOURCE/
AUTO
MAGNIFY
PAGE
DOWN
ON
OFF
FREEZE
UP
࡯
㧗
VOLUME
3.
4.
Press the MAGNIFY ON button on the remote control.
The picture will be magnifi ed, and the MAGNIFY dialog
will appear on the screen. When the MAGNIFY
ON button is pressed for the fi rst time after the
projector is turned on, the picture will be zoomed
by 1.5 times. On the dialog, triangle marks to show
each direction will be displayed.
The display magnifi cation of the projector switches in order with every press
of the MAGNIFY ON button.
For computer signals, HDMI
TM
(RGB) signals, input signals from the
LAN, USB TYPE A or USB TYPE B port
1.5 times 2 times 3 times 4 times 1 time
For video signals, s-video signals, component video signals or
HDMI
TM
(Component) signals
1.5 times 2 times 1 time
While the triangles are displayed on the dialog, use the ▲/▼/◄/► cursor
buttons to shift the magnifying area.
Press the MAGNIFY OFF button on the remote control to exit magnifi cation.
● The MAGNIFY dialog will automatically disappear in several seconds with no
operation. The dialog will appear again if the MAGNIFY ON button is pressed
when the dialog has automatically disappeared.
● The magnifi cation is automatically disabled when the displaying signal or its
display condition is changed.
● While the magnifi cation is active, the keystone distortion condition may vary.
It will be restored when the magnifi cation is disabled.
● Some horizontal stripes might be visible on the image while magnifi cation is
active.
● This function is not available in the following cases:
- A sync signal in the range not supported is input.
- There is no input signal.
31
1.
Press BLANK button on the remote control.
The BLANK screen will be displayed instead of the screen of
input signal. Please refer to BLANK item in SCREEN menu
(
50).
To exit from the BLANK screen and return to the input signal
screen, press BLANK button again.
Temporarily blanking the screen
● The projector automatically exits from the
BLANK
mode when
some control buttons are pressed.
•
The sound is not connected with the BLANK screen function. If
necessary, set the volume or mute first. To display the BLANK screen and mute
the sound at one time, use AV MUTE function
(59).
NOTE
1.
Press the FREEZE button on the remote control.
The “FREEZE” indication will appear on the screen (however,
the indication will not appear when the OFF is selected for
the MESSAGE item in the SCREEN menu (
52)), and the
projector will go into the FREEZE mode, which the picture is
frozen.
To exit the FREEZE mode and restore the screen to normal,
press the FREEZE button again.
Temporarily freezing the screen
● The projector automatically exits from the FREEZE mode when some control
buttons are pressed.
● If the projector continues projecting a still image for a long time, the LCD
panel might possibly be burned in. Do not leave the projector in the FREEZE
mode for too long.
● Images might appear degraded when this function is operated, but it is not a
malfunction.
FREEZE button
VIDEO
DOC.CAMERA
KEYSTONE
ASPECT
SEARCH
BLANK
MUTE
MY BUTTON
COMPUTER
MY SOURCE/
AUTO
MAGNIFY
PAGE
DOWN
ON
OFF
FREEZE
UP
࡯
㧗
VOLUME
BLANK button
VIDEO
DOC.CAMERA
KEYSTONE
ASPECT
SEARCH
BLANK
MUTE
MY BUTTON
COMPUTER
MY SOURCE/
AUTO
MAGNIFY
PAGE
DOWN
ON
OFF
FREEZE
UP
࡯
㧗
VOLUME
►If you wish to have a blank screen while the projector's lamp
is on, use the BLANK function above.
Taking any other action may cause the damage on the projector.
CAUTION
Operating
32
Operating
1.
To start the MENU, press the MENU button. The MENU you last used (EASY
or ADVANCED) will appear. EASY MENU has priority to appear just after
powered on.
Using the menu function
2.
(1) Use the ▲/▼ cursor buttons to select an item to
operate. If you want to change it to the ADVANCED
MENU, select the ADVANCED MENU.
(2) Use the ◄/► cursor buttons to operate the item.
This projector has the following menus:
PICTURE, IMAGE, INPUT, SETUP, AUDIO, SCREEN, OPTION, NETWORK,
SECURITY and EASY MENU.
EASY MENU consists of functions often used, and the other menus are classified
into each purpose and brought together as the ADVANCED MENU.
Each of these menus is operated using the same methods. While the projector
is displaying any menu, the MENU button on the projector works as the cursor
buttons. The basic operations of these menus are as follows.
In the EASY MENU
(continued on next page)
(1) Use the ▲/▼ cursor buttons to select a menu.
If you want to change it to the EASY MENU,
select the EASY MENU.
The items in the menu appear on the right side.
(2) Press the ► cursor button or ENTER button to
move the cursor to the right side. Then use the
▲/▼ cursor buttons to select an item to operate and press the ► cursor
button or ENTER button to progress. The operation menu or dialog of the
selected item will appear.
(3) Use the buttons as instructed in the OSD to operate the item.
In the ADVANCED MENU
VIDE
O
DOC.CA
MERA
KEYSTON
E
ASPECT
SEARCH
BLANK
MUT
E
MY BUTTO
N
POSITION
ES
C
MENU
RESE
T
COMPUTE
R
MY SO
URCE
/
AUTO
MAG
NIFY
PAG
E
DOWN
ON
OF
F
FREEZ
E
UP
࡯
㧗
VOL
UM
E
E
NTE
R
POSITION
ESC
MENU
RESET
ENTER
MENU button
(Cursor buttons)
RESET button
ENTER button
Cursor buttons
ESC button
POSITION button
33
Using the menu function (continued)
3.
To close the MENU, press the MENU button again or select EXIT and press
the ◄ cursor button or ENTER button. Even if you do not do anything, the
dialog will automatically disappear after about 30 seconds.
●
If you want to move the menu position, use the cursor buttons after pressing
the POSITION button.
● Some functions cannot be performed when a certain input port is selected,
or when a certain input signal is displayed.
● When you want to reset the operation, press RESET button on the remote
control during the operation. Note that some items (ex. LANGUAGE,
VOLUME) cannot be reset.
● In the ADVANCED MENU, when you want to return to the previous display,
press the ◄ cursor button or ESC button on the remote control.
Indication in OSD (On Screen Display)
The meanings of the general words on the OSD are as follows.
Indication Meaning
EXIT
Selecting this word finishes the OSD menu. It's the same as
pressing the MENU button.
RETURN Selecting this word returns the menu to the previous menu.
CANCEL or NO
Selecting this word cancels the operation in the present
menu and returns to the previous menu.
OK or YES
Selecting this word executes the prepared function or shifts
the menu to the next menu.
Operating
34
EASY MENU
EASY MENU
From the EASY MENU, items shown in the table
below can be performed.
Select an item using the ▲/▼ cursor buttons. Then
perform it according to the following table.
(continued on next page)
Item Description
ASPECT
Using the ◄/► buttons switches the mode for aspect ratio.
See the ASPECT item in IMAGE menu (
39).
AUTO KEYSTONE
Using the ► button executes the auto keystone function.
See the AUTO KEYSTONE item in SETUP menu (
46).
KEYSTONE
Using the ◄/► buttons corrects the vertical keystone distortion.
See the
KEYSTONE item in SETUP menu (
46).
PICTURE MODE
Using the ◄/► buttons switches the picture mode.
The picture modes are combinations of GAMMA and COLOR TEMP
settings. Choose a suitable mode according to the projected source.
NORMAL
CINEMA
DYNAMIC
BOARD(BLACK)
PHOTO
DAYTIME
WHITEBOARD
BOARD(GREEN)
GAMMA COLOR TEMP
NORMAL 1 DEFAULT 2 MID
CINEMA 2 DEFAULT 3 LOW
DYNAMIC 3 DEFAULT 1 HIGH
BOARD(BLACK) 4 DEFAULT 4 Hi-BRIGHT-1
BOARD(GREEN) 4 DEFAULT 5 Hi-BRIGHT-2
WHITEBOARD 5 DEFAULT 2 MID
DAYTIME 6 DEFAULT 6 Hi-BRIGHT-3
PHOTO 7 DEFAULT 7 Hi-BRIGHT-4
• When the combination of GAMMA and COLOR TEMP differs
from pre-assigned modes above, the display on the menu for the
PICTURE MODE is “CUSTOM”. Please refer to the GAMMA and
COLOR TEMP (
36, 37) items in PICTURE menu.
• Lines or other noise might appear on the screen when this function
is operated, but it is not a malfunction.
35
EASY MENU
Item Description
ECO MODE
Using the ◄/► buttons switches the ECO MODE.
See the ECO MODE item in SETUP menu (
47).
INSTALLATION
Pressing the ► button displays the INSTALLATION dialog.
See the
INSTALLATION
item in SETUP menu (
47).
RESET
Performing this item resets all of the EASY MENU items except the
FILTER TIME and LANGUAGE.
A dialog is displayed for confirmation. Selecting the OK using the ►
button performs resetting.
FILTER TIME
The usage time of the air filter is shown in the menu.
Performing this item resets the filter time which counts usage time
of the air filter.
A dialog is displayed for confirmation. Selecting the OK using the ►
button performs resetting.
See the FILTER TIME item in OPTION menu (
57).
LANGUAGE
Using the ◄/► buttons changes the display language.
See the LANGUAGE item in SCREEN menu (
50).
ADVANCED MENU
Press the ► or ENTER button to use the menu of PICTURE,
IMAGE, INPUT, SETUP, AUDIO, SCREEN, OPTION, NETWORK or
SECURITY.
EXIT Press the ◄ or ENTER button to finish the OSD menu.
36
PICTURE menu
PICTURE menu
From the PICTURE menu, items shown in the table
below can be performed.
Select an item using the ▲/▼ cursor buttons, and
press the ► cursor button or ENTER button to
execute the item. Then perform it according to the
following table.
(continued on next page)
Item Description
BRIGHTNESS
Using the
◄/►
buttons adjusts the brightness.
Dark
Light
CONTRAST
Using the
◄/►
buttons adjusts the contrast.
Weak
Strong
GAMMA
Using the ▲/▼ buttons switches the gamma mode.
To adjust CUSTOM
Selecting a mode whose name includes CUSTOM and then
pressing the ► button or the ENTER button displays
a dialog to aid you in adjusting the mode.
This function is useful when you want to
change the brightness of particular tones.
Choose an item using the ◄/► buttons,
and adjust the level using the ▲/▼ buttons.
You can display a test pattern for checking the effect of your
adjustment by pressing the ENTER button.
Each time you press the ENTER button, the
pattern changes as below.
No pattern
Gray scale of 9 steps
Ramp
Gray scale of 15 steps
The eight equalizing bars correspond to eight tone levels of the test
pattern (Gray scale of 9 steps) except the darkest in the left end. If you
want to adjust the 2nd tone from left end on the test pattern, use the
equalizing adjustment bar “1”. The darkest tone at the left end of the
test pattern cannot be controlled with any of equalizing adjustment bar.
• Lines or other noise might appear on the
screen when this function is operated, but it
is not a malfunction.
37
PICTURE menu
(continued on next page)
Item Description
COLOR TEMP
Using the ▲/▼ buttons switches the color temperature mode.
To adjust CUSTOM
Selecting a mode whose name includes
CUSTOM and then pressing the ► button
or the ENTER button displays a dialog
to aid you in adjusting the OFFSET and
GAIN of the selected mode.
OFFSET adjustments change the color intensity on the whole tones
of the test pattern.
GAIN adjustments mainly affect color intensity on the brighter tones
of the test pattern.
Choose an item using the ◄/► buttons, and adjust the level using
the ▲/▼ buttons.
You can display a test pattern for checking the effect of your
adjustment by pressing the ENTER button.
Each time you press the ENTER button, the pattern changes as below.
No pattern
Gray scale of 9 steps
Ramp
Gray scale of 15 steps
• Lines or other noise might appear on the screen
when this function is operated, but it is not a
malfunction.
COLOR
Using the ◄/► buttons adjusts the strength of whole color.
Weak
Strong
• This item can be selected only for a video, s-video and component
video signal.
•
For an HDMI
TM
signal, this item can also be selected if either (1) or (2) applies.
(1) HDMI FORMAT item in the INPUT menu is set to VIDEO.
(2) HDMI FORMAT item in the INPUT menu is set to AUTO, and the
projector recognizes that it receives video signals.
TINT
Using the ◄/► buttons adjusts the tint.
Reddish
Greenish
• This item can be selected only for a video, s-video and component
video signal.
•
For an HDMI
TM
signal, this item can also be selected if either (1) or (2) applies.
(1) HDMI FORMAT item in the INPUT menu is set to VIDEO.
(2) HDMI FORMAT item in the INPUT menu is set to AUTO, and the
projector recognizes that it receives video signals.
38
PICTURE menu
Item Description
SHARPNESS
Using the ◄/► buttons adjusts the sharpness.
Weak
Strong
• There may be some noise and/or the screen may flicker for a
moment when an adjustment is made. This is not a malfunction.
ACTIVE IRIS
Using the ▲/▼ cursor buttons changes the active iris control mode.
PRESENTATION
THEATER
OFF
PRESENTATION : The active iris displays the best presentation
image for both bright and dark scenes.
THEATER : The active iris displays the best theater image for
both bright and dark scenes.
OFF : The active iris is always open.
• The screen may flicker when the PRESENTATION or THEATER
modes are selected. If this occurs select OFF.
MY MEMORY
This projector has 4 memories for adjustment data (for all the items
of the PICTURE menu).
Selecting a function using the ▲/▼ buttons and pressing the ► or
ENTER button performs each function.
SAVE-1
SAVE-2
SAVE-3
SAVE-4
LOAD-4
LOAD-3
LOAD-2
LOAD-1
SAVE-1, SAVE-2, SAVE-3, SAVE-4
Performing a SAVE function saves the current adjustment data into
the memory linked in the number included in the function’s name.
• Remember that the current data being stored of a memory will be
lost by saving new data into the memory.
LOAD-1, LOAD-2, LOAD-3, LOAD-4
Performing a LOAD function loads the data from the memory linked
in the number included in the function’s name, and adjusts the
picture automatically depending on the data.
• The LOAD functions whose linked memory has no data are
skipped.
• Remember that the current adjusted condition will be lost by
loading data. If you want to keep the current adjustment, please
save it before performing a LOAD function.
• There may be some noise and the screen may flicker for a
moment when loading data. This is not malfunction.
• You can perform the LOAD function using MY BUTTON. Please
see MY BUTTON item in OPTION menu (
58, 59).
39
IMAGE menu
IMAGE menu
From the IMAGE menu, items shown in the table
below can be performed.
Select an item using the ▲/▼ cursor buttons, and
press the ► cursor button or ENTER button to
execute the item. Then perform it according to the
following table.
Item Description
ASPECT
Using the ▲/▼ buttons switches the mode for aspect ratio.
For a computer signal
CP-X2015WN/CP-X2515WN/CP-X3015WN/CP-X4015WN:
NORMAL
4:3
16:9
16:10
CP-WX2515WN/CP-WX3015WN:
NORMAL
4:3
16:9
16:10
NATIVE
For an HDMI
TM
signal
CP-X2015WN/CP-X2515WN/CP-X3015WN/CP-X4015WN:
NORMAL
4:3
16:9
16:10
14:9
CP-WX2515WN/CP-WX3015WN:
NORMAL
4:3
16:9
16:10
14:9
NATIVE
For a video signal, s-video signal or component video signal
CP-X2015WN/CP-X2515WN/CP-X3015WN/CP-X4015WN:
4:3
16:9
14:9
CP-WX2515WN/CP-WX3015WN:
4:3
16:9
16:10
14:9
NATIVE
For an input signal from the LAN, USB TYPE A or USB TYPE B
port, or if there is no signal
CP-X2015WN/CP-X2515WN/CP-X3015WN/CP-X4015WN: 4:3 (fixed)
CP-WX2515WN/CP-WX3015WN: 16:10 (fixed)
• The NORMAL mode keeps the original aspect ratio of the signal.
(continued on next page)
40
IMAGE menu
Item Description
OVER SCAN
Using the ◄/► buttons adjusts the over-scan ratio.
Small (It magnifies picture)
Large (It reduces picture)
• This item can be selected only for a video, s-video and component
video signal.
• For an HDMI
TM
signal, this item can also be selected if either (1) or
(2) applies.
(1) HDMI FORMAT item in the INPUT menu is set to VIDEO.
(2) HDMI FORMAT item in the INPUT menu is set to AUTO, and the
projector recognizes that it receives video signals.
V POSITION
Using the ◄/► buttons adjusts the vertical position.
Down
Up
• Over-adjusting the vertical position may cause noise to appear on
the screen. If this occurs, please reset the vertical position to the
default setting. Pressing the RESET button when the V POSITION
is selected will reset the V POSITION to the default setting.
• When this function is performed on a video signal or an s-video
signal, the range of this adjustment depends on OVER SCAN (
40)
setting. It is not possible to adjust when OVER SCAN is set to 10.
•
This function is unavailable for a signal from the LAN, USB TYPE A,
USB TYPE B or HDMI port.
H POSITION
Using the ◄/► buttons adjusts the horizontal position.
Right
Left
•
Over-adjusting the horizontal position may cause noise to appear on
the screen. If this occurs, please reset the horizontal position to the
default setting. Pressing the RESET button when the H POSITION is
selected will reset the H POSITION to the default setting.
• When this function is performed on a video signal or an s-video
signal, the range of this adjustment depends on OVER SCAN (
40)
setting. It is not possible to adjust when OVER SCAN is set to 10.
•
This function is unavailable for a signal from the LAN, USB TYPE A,
USB TYPE B or HDMI por
t.
(continued on next page)
41
IMAGE menu
Item Description
H PHASE
Using the
◄/►
buttons adjusts the horizontal phase to eliminate flicker.
Right
Left
• This item can be selected only for a computer signal or a
component video signal. This function is unavailable for a signal
from the LAN, USB TYPE A, USB TYPE B or HDMI port.
H SIZE
Using the ◄/► buttons adjusts the horizontal size.
Small
Large
• This item can be selected only for a computer signal. This function
is unavailable for a signal from the LAN, USB TYPE A, USB TYPE
B or HDMI port.
• When this adjustment is excessive, the picture may not be
displayed correctly. In such a case, please reset the adjustment
by pressing the RESET button on the remote control during this
operation.
• Images might appear degraded when this function is operated, but
it is not a malfunction.
AUTO ADJUST
EXECUTE
Selecting this item performs the automatic adjustment feature.
For a computer signal
The vertical position, the horizontal position and the horizontal
phase will be automatically adjusted.
Make sure that the application window is set to its maximum size
prior to attempting to use this feature. A dark picture may still be
incorrectly adjusted. Use a bright picture when adjusting.
For a video signal and s-video signal
The video format best suited for the respective input signal will
be selected automatically. This function is available only when
the AUTO is selected for the VIDEO FORMAT item in the INPUT
menu (
43).
The vertical position and horizontal position will be
automatically set to the default.
For a component video signal
The vertical position and horizontal position will be automatically
set to the default. The horizontal phase will be automatically
adjusted.
• The automatic adjustment operation requires approx. 10 seconds.
Also please note that it may not function correctly with some input.
• When this function is performed for a video signal, a certain extra
such as a line may appear outside a picture.
• When this function is performed for a computer signal, a black
frame may be displayed on the edge of the screen, depending on
the computer model.
• The items adjusted by this function may vary when the FINE or
DISABLE is selected for the AUTO ADJUST item of the SERVICE
item in the OPTION menu (
59).
42
INPUT menu
INPUT menu
From the INPUT menu, items shown in the table
below can be performed.
Select an item using the ▲/▼ cursor buttons, and
press the ► cursor button or ENTER button to
execute the item. Then perform it according to the
following table.
Item Description
PROGRESSIVE
Using the ▲/▼ buttons switches the progress mode.
TV
FILM
OFF
•
This function works only for a video signal, s-video signal, component
video signal (of 480i@60 or 576i@50 or 1080i@50/60) and an HDMI
TM
signal (of 480i@60 or 576i@50 or 1080i@50/60)
.
• When TV or FILM is selected, the screen image will be sharp.
FILM adapts to the 2-3 Pull-Down conversion system. But these
may cause a certain defect (for example, jagged line) of the picture
for a quick moving object. In such a case, please select OFF, even
though the screen image may lose sharpness.
VIDEO NR
Using the ▲/▼ buttons switches the noise reduction mode.
HIGH
MID
LOW
• This function works only for a video signal, s-video signal,
component video signal (of 480i@60 or 576i@50 or 1080i@50/60)
and an HDMI™ signal (of 480i@60 or 576i@50 or 1080i@50/60).
COLOR SPACE
Using the ▲/▼ buttons switches the mode for color space.
AUTO
RGB
SMPTE240
REC709
REC601
• This item can be selected only for a computer signal, component
video signal(except for signals from the LAN, USB TYPE A and
USB TYPE B ports) or an HDMI™ signal.
• The AUTO mode automatically selects the optimum mode.
• The AUTO operation may not work well at some signals. In such a
case, it might be good to select a suitable mode except AUTO.
(continued on next page)
43
INPUT menu
Item Description
VIDEO FORMAT
The video format for S-VIDEO port and VIDEO port can be set.
(1) Use the ▲/▼ buttons to
select the input port.
(2) Using the ◄/► buttons
switches the mode for video
format.
AUTO
NTSC
PAL
SECAM
N-PAL
M-PAL
NTSC4.43
• This item is performed only for a video signal from the VIDEO port
or the S-VIDEO port.
• The AUTO mode automatically selects the optimum mode.
• The AUTO operation may not work well for some signals. If the
picture becomes unstable (e.g. an irregular picture, lack of color),
please select the mode according to the input signal.
HDMI FORMAT
Using the ▲/▼ cursor buttons switches the video format for an
input from the HDMI port.
AUTO
VIDEO
COMPUTER
Feature
AUTO automatically sets the optimum mode.
VIDEO sets the suitable mode for DVD signals.
COMPUTER sets the suitable mode for computer signals.
• When the COMPUTER is selected, the functions COLOR
(PICTURE menu), TINT (PICTURE menu) and OVER SCAN
(IMAGE menu) are unavailable.
HDMI RANGE
Using the ▲/▼ cursor buttons changes the digital range for input
from the HDMI port.
AUTO
NORMAL
ENHANCED
Feature
AUTO automatically sets the optimum mode.
NORMAL s
ets the suitable mode for DVD signals. (16-
235)
ENHANCED
sets the suitable mode for computer signals. (0-255)
• If the contrast of the screen image is too strong or too weak, try
finding a more suitable mode.
(continued on next page)
44
INPUT menu
Item Description
COMPUTER IN
The computer input signal type for COMPUTER IN1 and IN2 ports
can be set.
(1)
Use the ▲/▼ buttons to select the COMPUTER IN port to be set.
(2) Use the ◄/► buttons to select
the computer input signal type.
AUTO
SYNC ON G OFF
• Selecting the AUTO mode allows
you to input a sync on G signal or component video signal from the
port (
12).
• In the AUTO mode, the picture may be distorted with certain
input signals. In such a case, remove the signal connector so that
no signal is received and select the SYNC ON G OFF, and then
reconnect the signal.
FRAME LOCK
Set the frame lock function on/off for each port.
(1) Use the ▲/▼ buttons to select
the input ports.
(2) Use the ◄/► buttons to turn the
frame lock function on/off .
ON
OFF
• This item can be performed only on a signal with a vertical
frequency of 49 to 51Hz, 59 to 61 Hz.
• When ON is selected, moving pictures are displayed more
smoothly.
(continued on next page)
45
INPUT menu
Item Description
RESOLUTION
The resolution for the COMPUTER IN1 and COMPUTER IN2 input
signals can be set on this projector.
(1) In the INPUT menu select the RESOLUTION using the ▲/▼
buttons and press the ► button.
The RESOLUTION menu will be
displayed.
(2) In the RESOLUTION menu select the
resolution you wish to display using
the ▲/▼ buttons.
Selecting AUTO will set a resolution
appropriate to the input signal.
(3) Pressing the ► or ENTER button when
selecting a STANDARD resolution will
automatically adjust the horizontal and
vertical positions, clock phase and
horizontal size.
The INPUT_INFORMATION dialog will be
displayed.
(4) To set a custom resolution use the ▲/▼ buttons to select
the CUSTOM and the RESOLUTION_CUSTOM box will be
displayed.
Set the horizontal (HORZ) and
vertical (VERT) resolutions using
the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons.
This function may not support all
resolutions.
(5) Move the cursor to OK on screen and press the ► or ENTER
button. The message "ARE YOU SURE YOU WISH TO
CHANGE RESOLUTION?" appears. To save the setting, press
the ► button.
The horizontal and vertical positions, clock phase and horizontal
size will be automatically adjusted.
The INPUT_INFORMATION dialog
will be displayed.
(6) To revert back to the previous resolution without saving changes,
move the cursor to CANCEL on screen and press the ◄ or
ENTER button.
The screen will then return to the RESOLUTION menu
displaying the previous resolution.
• For some pictures, this function may not work well.
STANDARD
↓
CUSTOM
↓
46
SETUP menu
SETUP menu
From the SETUP menu, items shown in the table
below can be performed.
Select an item using the ▲/▼ cursor buttons, and
press the ► cursor button or ENTER button to
execute the item. Then perform it according to the
following table.
Item Description
AUTO KEYSTONE
Selecting this item performs the Automatic keystone distortion
correction. Projector automatically corrects vertical keystone
distortion due to the (forward/backward) setup angle by itself.
This function will be executed only once when selected in the menu.
When the slant of the projector is changed, execute this function again.
• The adjustable range of this function will vary among inputs. For
some input, this function may not work well.
• When REAR / CEILING or FRONT / CEILING is selected for the
INSTALLATION item in the SETUP menu, this function may not
work correctly if the projector screen is slanted or tilted downwards.
• When the zoom adjustment is set to the TELE (telephoto focus),
this function may be excessive. This function should be used when
the zoom adjustment is set to the full WIDE (wide-angle focus)
whenever possible.
• When the projector is placed on the level (about ±4°), this function
may not work.
• When the projector is inclined to near ±30 degree or over, this
function may not work well.
•
This function will be unavailable when the TRANSITION DETECTOR
is on
(
81) .
KEYSTONE
Using the ◄/► buttons corrects the vertical keystone distortion.
Shrink the bottom of the image
Shrink the top of the image
• The adjustable range of this function will vary among inputs. For
some input, this function may not work well.
• When the zoom adjustment is set to the TELE (telephoto focus),
this function may be excessive. This function should be used when
the zoom adjustment is set to the full WIDE (wide-angle focus)
whenever possible.
•
This function will be unavailable when the TRANSITION DETECTOR
is on
(81).
(continued on next page)
47
SETUP menu
Item Description
AUTO ECO MODE
Using the ▲/▼ buttons turns on/off the AUTO ECO MODE.
ON
OFF
• When ON is selected, the projector will always be set to Eco mode
at start-up regardless of the ECO MODE (
below) setting. An OSD
message “AUTO ECO MODE” will be displayed for a while when
the projector starts with this function activated.
ECO MODE
Using the ◄/► buttons switches the ECO MODE.
NORMAL
ECO
INTELLIGENT ECO
SAVER
• When the ECO is selected, acoustic noise and screen brightness
are reduced.
• When INTELLIGENT ECO is selected, the brightness of the
lamp changes according to the level of the input signal. The lamp
becomes brighter when the input signal level is high and darker
when the level is low. If dark images are projected continuously, the
brightness of the lamp may increase to maintain its performance.
• When SAVER is selected, you can select the time within 1 to 30
min. for SAVER MODE using the ► button. If the image signal level
doesn’t change more than the period set, the lamp brightness is
reduced and electric power consumption decreased. If the image
signal level changes or any buttons are operated, the lamp will
brighten again. If dark images are projected continuously, the
brightness of the lamp may increase to maintain its performance.
• When AUTO ECO MODE (
above) is set to ON, the projector will
always be set to Eco mode at start-up regardless this setting.
INSTALLATION
Pressing the ►button displays the dialog for changing the
INSTALLATION setting.
Use the ▲/▼ buttons to select the desired setting on the
INSTALLATION dialog, and press the ENTER button of the remote
control or the INPUT button of the projector to execute.
If TRANSITION DETECTOR is ON and the INSTALLATION status
is changed, the TRANSITION DETECTOR ON alarm (
81) will be
displayed when the projector is restarted.
(continued on next page)
48
Item Description
STANDBY MODE
Using ▲/▼ buttons switches the standby mode setting between
NORMAL and SAVING.
NORMAL
SAVING
When SAVING is selected, the power consumption in the standby
mode is lowered with some functional restriction as below:
• When SAVING is selected, the RS-232C communication control
except to turn the projector on and the network function are disabled
while the projector is in the standby mode. If the COMMUNICATION
TYPE in the COMMUNICATION menu is set to NETWORK
BRIDGE, all of the RS-232C commands are disabled (
62).
• When SAVING is selected, STANDBY setting of AUDIO SOURCE
(
49) is invalid, and no signal is output from AUDIO OUT port in
the standby mode.
• When SAVING is selected, STANDBY setting of MONITOR OUT
is invalid, and no signal is output from MONITOR OUT port in the
standby mode.
• The USB connection is disabled while the projector is in standby
mode if the STANDBY MODE item in the SETUP menu of the
projector is set to SAVING.
• When SAVING is selected, CLONING load function is invalid while
in STANDBY MODE.
MONITOR OUT
While the image signal from the input port chosen in step (1) is
projected, the image signal from the input port selected in step (2) is
output to MONITOR OUT port.
(1) Choose a picture input port using ▲/▼ buttons.
Choose STANDBY to select the picture
output in the standby mode.
(2) Select one of the COMPUTER IN ports
using ◄/► buttons.
Select OFF to disable the MONITOR OUT
port for the input port or standby mode
chosen in the step (1).
• You cannot select COMPUTER IN2 for COMPUTER IN1, and vice
versa.
• If you have changed the setting of STANDBY, it applies only to
the current standby mode, NORMAL or SAVING, selected under
STANDBY MODE, without changing the setting of the other mode.
The factory settings are as follows:
- COMPUTER IN1 for the NORMAL mode of STANDBY MODE
- OFF for the SAVING mode of STANDBY MODE
SETUP menu
49
AUDIO menu
AUDIO menu
From the AUDIO menu, items shown in the table
below can be performed. Select an item using the
▲/▼ cursor buttons, and press the ► cursor button
or the ENTER button to execute the item. Then
perform it according to the following table.
Item Description
VOLUME Using the ◄/► buttons adjusts the volume. Low
High
SPEAKER
Using the ▲/▼ buttons turns on/off the built-in speaker.
ON
OFF
When OFF is selected, the built-in speaker does not work.
AUDIO SOURCE
While the image signal from the input port chosen in step (1) is
projected, the audio signal from the input port selected in step
(2) is output to both the AUDIO OUT port and built-in speaker of
this projector. However, the built-in speaker does not work when
SPEAKER is set to OFF.
(1) Choose a picture input port using the
▲/▼ buttons.
Choose STANDBY to select the sound
output in the standby mode.
(2) Select an audio input port or the mute
icon using the ◄/► buttons.
The icons indicate the following;
No.1: AUDIO IN1 port No.2: AUDIO IN2 port
No.3: AUDIO IN3 port No.4: LAN port
No.5: USB TYPE A port No.6: USB TYPE B port
No.7: HDMI port
: mutes the sound
• Audio input from port nos
4 to 7 can only be selected by each of
the picture input ports.
• Even if the projector is in the standby mode, cooling fans may
work and make noises when the built-in speaker is in operation.
•
C.C. (Closed Caption) is automatically activated when is selected
and an input signal containing C.C. is received. This function is available
only when the signal is NTSC for VIDEO or S-VIDEO, or 480i@60 for
COMPUTER IN1 or COMPUTER IN2, and when AUTO is selected for
DISPLAY in the C.C. menu under the SCREEN menu (
55).
MIC LEVEL
Using the ▲/▼ buttons switches the input level to match that of the
microphone connected to the MIC port.
HIGH: for a microphone with an amplifier.
LOW: for a microphone without an amplifier.
MIC VOLUME
Using the ◄/► buttons adjusts the volume of the microphone
connected to the MIC port.
Low
High
HIGH
LOW
50
SCREEN menu
SCREEN menu
From the SCREEN menu, items shown in the table
below can be performed.
Select an item using the ▲/▼ cursor buttons, and
press the ► cursor button or ENTER button to
execute the item. Then perform it according to the
following table.
Item Description
LANGUAGE
Using the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons switches the OSD (On Screen
Display) language.
ENGLISH
FRANÇAIS
DEUTSCH
ESPAÑOL
(shown in the LANGUAGE dialog)
Press the ENTER or INPUT button to save the language setting.
MENU POSITION
Using the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons adjusts the menu position.
To quit the operation, press the MENU button on the remote control
or keep no operation for about 10 seconds.
BLANK
Using the ▲/▼ buttons switches the mode for the blank screen.
The blank screen is a screen for the temporarily blanking feature
(
31). It is displayed by pressing the BLANK button on the remote
control.
MyScreen
ORIGINAL
BLUE
WHITE
BLACK
MyScreen :
Screen can be registered by the MyScreen item (
51).
ORIGINAL : Screen preset as the standard screen.
BLUE, WHITE, BLACK : Plain screens in each color.
• To avoid remaining as an afterimage, the MyScreen or ORIGINAL
screen will change to the plain black screen after several minutes.
START UP
Using the ▲/▼ buttons switches the mode for the start-up screen.
The start-up screen is a screen displayed when no signal or an
unsuitable signal is detected.
MyScreen
ORIGINAL
OFF
MyScreen :
Screen can be registered by the MyScreen item (
51).
ORIGINAL : Screen preset as the standard screen.
OFF : Plain black screen.
• To avoid remaining as an afterimage, the MyScreen or ORIGINAL
screen will change to the BLANK screen (
above) after several
minutes. If also the BLANK screen is the MyScreen or ORIGINAL,
the plain black screen is instead used.
• When the ON is selected to the MyScreen PASSWORD item in
the SECURITY menu (
79), the START UP is fixed to MyScreen.
(continued on next page)
51
SCREEN menu
Item Description
MyScreen
This item allows you to capture an image for use as a MyScreen
image which can be used as the BLANK screen and START UP
screen. Display the image you want to capture before executing the
following procedure.
Selecting this item displays a dialog
titled “MyScreen”. It will ask you if
you start capturing an image from the
current screen. Please wait for the
target image to be displayed, and press
the ENTER or INPUT button to start
registration.
To restore the screen and return to
the previous dialog, press the RESET
button on the remote control.
Registration may take several minutes.
When the registration is completed,
the registered screen and the following
message is displayed for several
seconds:
“MyScreen registration is finished.”
If the registration failed, the following message is displayed:
“A capturing error has occurred. Please try again.”
• This function cannot be selected when the ON is selected to the
MyScreen Lock item (
52).
• This function cannot be selected when the ON is selected to the
MyScreen PASSWORD item in SECURITY menu (
79).
•
This function is unavailable for a signal from the LAN, USB TYPE A,
USB TYPE B or HDMI port.
(continued on next page)
52
SCREEN menu
Item Description
MyScreen Lock
Using the ▲/▼ buttons turns on/off the MyScreen lock function.
ON
OFF
When the ON is selected, the item MyScreen is locked. Use this
function for protecting the current MyScreen.
• This function cannot be selected when the ON is selected to the
MyScreen PASSWORD item in SECURITY menu (
79).
MESSAGE
Using the ▲/▼ buttons turns on/off the message function.
ON
OFF
When the ON is selected, the following message function works.
“AUTO IN PROGRESS” while automatically adjusting
“NO INPUT IS DETECTED”
“SYNC IS OUT OF RANGE”
“INVALID SCAN FREQ.”
“NOT AVAILABLE.”
“Searching….” while searching for the input
“Detecting….” while an input signal is detected
“AUTO ECO MODE” while starting up with AUTO ECO MODE
The indication of the input signal displayed by changing
The indication of the aspect ratio displayed by changing
The indication of the PICTURE MODE displayed by changing
The indication of the MY MEMORY displayed by changing
The indication of “FREEZE” and “II” while freezing the screen by
pressing the FREEZE button.
The indication of the TEMPLATE displayed by changing.
The indication of the ECO MODE displayed by changing.
• When the OFF is selected, please remember if the picture is
frozen. Do not mistake freezing for a malfunction (
31).
(continued on next page)
53
SCREEN menu
Item Description
SOURCE NAME
Each input port for this projector can have a name applied to it.
(1) Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the SCREEN menu to select SOURCE
NAME and press the ► or ENTER button.
The SOURCE NAME menu will be displayed.
(2) Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the SOURCE
NAME menu to select the port to be
named and press the ► button. The
SOURCE NAME dialog will be displayed.
Right side of the menu is blank until a
name is specified.
(3) Select an icon you would like to assign to
the port in the SOURCE NAME dialog.
The name assigned to the port will also
be automatically switched according to
your icon selection. Press the ENTER or
INPUT button to determine your icon selection.
(4) Select a number you would like to assign
to the port along with the icon. You can
select the number either from blank
(no number assigned), 1, 2, 3, or 4.
Then press the ENTER or INPUT button.
(5) If you would like to modify the name assigned
to the port, select CUSTOM NAME and
press the ENTER or INPUT button.
(continued on next page)
(continued on next page)
54
SCREEN menu
Item Description
SOURCE NAME
(continued)
(6) The current name will be displayed on
the first line. Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons
and the ENTER or INPUT button to
select and enter characters. To erase 1
character at one time, press the RESET
button or press the ◄ and INPUT button
at the same time. Also if you move the
cursor to DELETE or ALL CLEAR on
screen and press the ENTER or INPUT
button, 1 character or all characters will
be erased. The name can be a maximum
of 16 characters.
(7) To change an already inserted character,
press the ▲ button to move the cursor to
the first line, and use the ◄/► buttons to
move the cursor on the character to be
changed.
After pressing the ENTER or INPUT button, the character is
selected. Then, follow the same procedure as described at the
item (6) above.
(8) To finish entering text, move the cursor to the OK on screen and
press the ►, ENTER or INPUT button. To revert to the previous
name without saving changes, move the cursor to the CANCEL
on screen and press the ◄, ENTER or INPUT button.
TEMPLATE
Using the ▲/▼ cursor buttons switches the mode for the template
screen.
Press the ► cursor (or the ENTER) button to display the selected
template, and press the ◄ cursor button to close the displayed
screen.
The last selected template is displayed when the MY BUTTON
allocated to the TEMPLATE function is pressed (
59).
TEST PATTERN
DOT-LINE1
DOT-LINE2
DOT-LINE3
MAP2
MAP1
CIRCLE2
CIRCLE1
DOT-LINE4
You can turn a map upside down and scroll it horizontally when
MAP1 or MAP2 is selected. To invert or scroll the map, display
the guidance by pressing the RESET button on the remote three
seconds or more when MAP1 or MAP2 appears.
(continued on next page)
55
SCREEN menu
Item Description
C.C.
(Closed Caption)
The C.C. is the function that displays a
transcript or dialog of the audio portion of
a video, files or other presentation or other
relevant sounds. It is required to have NTSC
format video or 480i@60 format component
video source supporting C.C. feature to
utilize this function.
It may not work properly, depending on equipment or signal source.
In this case, please turn off the Closed Caption.
DISPLAY
Select Closed Caption DISPLAY setting from following options using
▲/▼ buttons.
AUTO
ON
OFF
AUTO : Closed Caption automatically displays when the volume
is muted.
ON : Closed Caption is on.
OFF : Closed Caption is off.
• The caption is not displayed when the OSD menu is active.
• The Closed Caption is the function to display the dialogue,
narration, and / or sound effects of a television program or other
video sources. The Closed Caption availability is depending upon
broadcaster and/or content.
MODE
Select Closed Caption MODE setting from following options using
▲/▼ buttons.
CAPTIONS
TEXT
CAPTIONS : Display Closed Caption.
TEXT : Display Text data, which is for additional information such
as news reports or a TV program guide. The information
covers the entire screen. Not all of the C.C. program has
Text information.
CHANNEL
Select Closed Caption CHANNEL from following options using ▲/▼
buttons.
1
2
3
4
1: Channel 1, primary channel / language
2: Channel 2
3: Channel 3
4: Channel 4
The channel data may vary, depending on the content. Some
channel might be used for secondary language or empty.
56
OPTION menu
OPTION menu
From the OPTION menu, items shown in the table
below can be performed.
Select an item using the ▲/▼ cursor buttons, and
press the ► cursor button or ENTER button to execute
the item, except for the items LAMP TIME and FILTER
TIME. Then perform it according to the following table.
Item Description
AUTO SEARCH
Using the ▲/▼ buttons turns on/off the automatic signal search
function.
ON
OFF
When the ON is selected, detecting no signal automatically cycles
through input ports in the following order. The search is started from
the current port. Then when an input is found, the projector will stop
searching and display the image.
COMPUTER IN1
COMPUTER IN2
LAN
USB TYPE A
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
HDMI
USB TYPE B
• It may take several seconds to project the images from the
USB TYPE B port.
AUTO
KEYSTONE
Using the ▲/▼ buttons turns on/off the automatic keystone function.
ON
OFF
ON : Automatic keystone distortion correction will be executed
whenever changing the slant of the projector.
OFF : This function is disabled. Please execute the AUTO
KEYSTONE (EXECUTE) in the SETUP menu for automatic
keystone distortion correction.
• When the projector is suspended from the ceiling this feature will
not function properly so select the OFF.
•
This function will be unavailable when the TRANSITION DETECTOR
is on
(
81)
.
DIRECT POWER
ON
Using the ▲/▼ buttons turns on/off the DIRECT POWER ON
function.
ON
OFF
When set to the ON, the lamp in projector will be automatically turned
on without the usual procedure (
21), only when the projector is
supplied with the power after the power was cut while the lamp was on.
• This function does not work as long as the power has been
supplied to the projector while the lamp is off.
•
After turning the lamp on by the DIRECT
POWER
ON function,
if neither input nor operation is detected for about 30 minutes, the
projector is turned off, even though the AUTO
POWER
OFF function
(
57) is disabled.
(continued on next page)
57
OPTION menu
Item Description
AUTO POWER
OFF
Using the ▲/▼ buttons adjusts the time to count down to
automatically turn the projector off.
Long (max. 99 minutes)
Short (min. 0 minute = DISABLE)
When the time is set to 0, the projector is not turned off automatically.
When the time is set to 1 to 99, and when the passed time with
no-signal or an unsuitable signal reaches at the set time, the
projector lamp will be turned off.
If one of the projector's buttons or the remote control buttons
is pressed or one of the commands (except get commands) is
transmitted to the CONTROL port during the corresponding time,
projector will not be turned off.
Please refer to the section Turning off the power
(
22).
LAMP TIME
The lamp time is the usage time of the lamp, counted after the last
resetting. It is shown in the OPTION menu.
Pressing the RESET button on the remote control or the ► button
of the projector displays a dialog.
To reset the lamp time, select the OK using the ► button.
CANCEL
OK
• Please reset the lamp time only when you have replaced the lamp,
for a suitable indication about the lamp.
•
For the lamp replacement, see the section Replacing the lamp
(
108).
FILTER TIME
The filter time is the usage time of the air filter, counted after the last
resetting. It is shown in the OPTION menu.
Pressing the RESET button on the remote control or the ► button
of the projector displays a dialog.
To reset the filter time, select the OK using the ► button.
CANCEL
OK
•
Please reset the filter time only when you have cleaned or replaced
the air filter, for a suitable indication about the air filter.
• For the air filter cleaning, see the section Cleaning and replacing
the air filter (
110).
(continued on next page)
58
OPTION menu
Item Description
MY BUTTON
This item is to assign one of the following functions to MY BUTTON
1/2 on the remote control (
6).
(1) Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the MY BUTTON menu to select a MY
BUTTON - (1/2) and press the ► or ENTER button to display the
MY BUTTON setup dialog.
(2) Then using the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons sets one of the following
functions to the chosen button. Press the ENTER or INPUT
button to save the setting.
• COMPUTER IN1: Selects the input from COMPUTER IN1 port.
• COMPUTER IN2: Selects the input from COMPUTER IN2 port.
• LAN: Selects input from LAN port.
• USB TYPE A: Selects input from USB TYPE A port.
• USB TYPE B: Selects input from USB TYPE B port.
• HDMI: Selects input from HDMI port.
• S-VIDEO: Selects the input from S-VIDEO port.
• VIDEO: Selects the input from VIDEO port.
•
SLIDESHOW: Selects the input from USB TYPE A, and starts a Slideshow.
• MY IMAGE: Displays the MY IMAGE menu (
75).
• MESSENGER:
Turns the messenger text displayed on the screen on/off
(Messenger Function in the Network Guide).
When there is no transferred text data to display, the message
”NO MESSENGER DATA" appears.
• INFORMATION: Displays SYSTEM_INFORMATION,
INPUT_INFORMATION (
66), WIRELESS INFORMATION
(
71), WIRED INFORMATION (
73) or nothing.
• AUTO KEYSTONE : Performs automatic keystone distortion
correction (
46).
• MY MEMORY: Loads one of adjustment data stored (
38).
When more than one data are saved, the adjustment
changes every time the MY BUTTON is pressed.
When no data is saved in memory, the
dialog "No saved data" appears.
When the current adjustment is not
saved to memory, the dialog as shown in
the right appears.
If you want to keep the current adjustment, please press
the ► button to exit. Otherwise loading a data will overwrite the
current adjusted condition.
(continued on next page)
(continued on next page)
59
OPTION menu
Item Description
MY BUTTON
(continued)
• ACTIVE IRIS: Changes the active iris mode.
• PICTURE MODE: Changes the PICTURE MODE (
34).
•
FILTER RESET: Displays the filter time reset confirmation dialogue
(
57).
• TEMPLATE: Makes the template pattern selected to the
TEMPLATE item (
54) appear or disappear.
• AV MUTE: Turns the picture and audio on/off.
• RESOLUTION: Turns on/off the RESOLUTION dialog (
45).
• MIC VOLUME: Turns on/off the MIC VOLUME dialog (
49).
• ECO MODE: Changes the ECO MODE (
47).
•
SAVER MODE:
Turns on/off the SAVER MODE
(
47 ECO MODE).
MY SOURCE
Using ▲/▼ buttons selects the picture input port to be selected with
pressing the MY SOURCE/DOC.CAMERA button on the remote
control.
You can use this function not only for document cameras but also
computers and other equipment.
VIDEO
COMPUTER IN1
COMPUTER IN2
LAN
S-VIDEO
HDMI
USB TYPE B
USB TYPE A
SERVICE
Selecting this item displays the SERVICE
menu.
Select an item using the ▲/▼ buttons,
and press the ► button or the ENTER
button on the remote control to execute
the item.
ALTITUDE
Using the ▲/▼ buttons switches the rotation speed of the cooling fans.
The HIGH is the mode for use at highlands etc. If the projector is used
at an altitude of about 1600 m (5250 feet) or higher, select HIGH.
Otherwise, select NORMAL.
Note that the projector is noisier when the
HIGH is selected.
HIGH
NORMAL
(continued on next page)
60
OPTION menu
Item Description
SERVICE
(continued)
AUTO ADJUST
Using the ▲/▼ buttons to select one of the mode. When the
DISABLE is selected, the automatic adjustment feature is disabled.
FINE
FAST
DISABLE
FINE: Finer tuning including H.SIZE adjustment.
FAST: Faster tuning, setting H.SIZE to prearranged data for the
input signal.
•
Depending on conditions, such as input image, signal cable to the
projector, environment around the projector, etc., the automatic adjustment
may not work correctly. In such a case, please choose DISABLE to
disable the automatic adjustment, and make adjustment manually.
GHOST
Adjust the settings using the ▲/▼ buttons to eliminate ghosting.
FILTER MESSAGE
Use the ▲/▼ button to set the timer for notifying by the message
when to replace the filter unit
100h
·········
5000h
OFF
After choosing an item except OFF, the message “REMINDER ***
HRS PASSED ....” will appear after the timer reaches the interval
time set by this feature (
114).
When the OFF is chosen, the message will not appear. Utilize this
feature to keep the air filter clean, setting the suitable time according
to your environment of this projector.
• Please take care of the filter unit periodically, even if there is
no message. If the air filter becomes to be blocked by dust or
other matter, the internal temperature will rise, which could cause
malfunction, or reduce the lifetime of the projector.
• Please be careful with the operating environment of the projector
and the condition of the filter unit.
KEY LOCK
(1) Use the ▲/▼ buttons to choose the operations control.
CONTROL PANEL
REMOTE CONTROL
(2)
Use the ◄/► buttons to select ON or OFF.
ON
OFF
Selecting ON in Step 2 locks the buttons except STANDBY/ON on
the operations control selected in Step 1. Selecting OFF releases
the locked buttons on the operations control selected in Step 1.
• Please use this function to prevent tampering or accidental
operation.
(continued on next page)
61
OPTION menu
Item Description
SERVICE
(continued)
REMOTE FREQ.
(1) Use the ▲/▼ button to change the projector's remote sensor
frequency setting (
19).
1:NORMAL
2:HIGH
(2) Use the ◄/► button to change the
projector's remote sensor on or off.
ON
OFF
The factory default setting is for both 1:NORMAL and 2:HIGH to be on.
If the remote control does not function correctly, disable either of them.
It's not possible to disable both options at the same time.
COMMUNICATION
Selecting this item displays COMMUNICATION
menu.
In this menu, you can configure the serial
communication settings of the projector using the
CONTROL port.
• Select an item using the cursor buttons ▲/▼.
Then pressing the ► button opens the submenu
for the setting item you selected. Or, pressing
the ◄ button instead of the ► button makes the
menu back to the previous one without changing
the setup. Each submenu can be operated as
described above.
• When COMMUNICATION TYPE
(
62)
is set to
OFF, the other items in COMMUNICATION menu
are invalid.
• For the function of serial communication, refer to
the Network Guide.
(continued on next page)
62
OPTION menu
Item Description
SERVICE
(continued)
COMMUNICATION
(continued)
COMMUNICATION TYPE
Select the communication type for transmission via
the CONTROL port.
NETWORK BRIDGE: Select this type, if it is
required to control an external device as a
network terminal, via this projector from the
computer.
The CONTROL port doesn't accept RS-232C
commands (Network Bridge Function in the
Network Guide)
OFF: Select this mode to receive RS-232C
commands using the CONTROL port.
• OFF is selected as the default setting.
• When you select the NETWORK BRIDGE, check
the item, TRANSMISSION METHOD
(
below)
SERIAL SETTINGS
Select the serial communication condition for the
CONTROL port.
BAUD RATE
4800bps
9600bps
19200bps
38400bps
PARITY
NONE
ODD
EVEN
• The BAUD RATE is fixed to 19200bps
and PARITY is fixed NONE when the
COMMUNICATION TYPE is set to OFF
(
above)
.
TRANSMISSION METHOD
Select the transmission method for communication
by the NETWORK BRIDGE from the CONTROL
port.
HALF-DUPLEX
FULL-DUPLEX
HALF-DUPLEX: This method lets the projector
make two way communication, but only one
direction, either transmitting or receiving data, is
allowed at a time.
FULL-DUPLEX: This method lets the projector
make two way communication, transmitting and
receiving data at the same time.
• HALF-DUPLEX is selected as the default setting.
• If you select HALF-DUPLEX, check the setting of
the item RESPONSE LIMIT TIME
(
63)
.
(continued on next page)
63
OPTION menu
Item Description
SERVICE
(continued)
COMMUNICATION
(continued)
RESPONSE LIMIT TIME
Select the time period to wait for receiving
response data from other device communicating by
the NETWORK BRIDGE and the HALF-DUPLEX
through the CONTROL port.
OFF
1s
2s
3s
OFF: Select this mode if it is not required to check
the responses from the device that the projector
sends data to. In this mode, the projector can
send out data from the computer continuously.
1s /2s /3s: Select the time period to keep the
projector waiting for response from the device
that the projector sends data to. While waiting the
response, the projector does not send out any
data from the CONTROL port.
• This menu is available only when the NETWORK
BRIDGE is selected for the COMMUNICATION
TYPE and the HALF-DUPLEX is selected for the
TRANSMISSION METHOD (
62).
• OFF is selected as the default setting.
CLONING
The setttings of the projector can be coppied via USB
memory.
SAVE:
Saves each settings of the projector to USB
memory.
LOAD:
Loads each settings of the projector from
USB memory. Message will be displayed
after loading, and power will turn off after five
min. or by pressing ► button. (A message is
displayed for a few seconds if loading fails.)
(continued on next page)
64
OPTION menu
Item Description
SERVICE
(continued)
CLONING
(continued)
The following items are exempted.
OPTION: LAMP TIME, FILTER TIME,
SERVICE(GHOST)
NETWORK: WIRELESS AND WIRED SETUP
(IP ADDRESS, SUBNET MASK,
DEFAULT GATEWAY, DATE AND
TIME), MY IMAGE, PRESENTATION
SECURITY: MY TEXT DISPLAY
• Operation is not available if SECURITY_
CLONNING LOCK is turned ON.
• The Screen_MyScreen can only be loaded.
CLONING load function on STANDBY MODE
• While the projector is in STANDBY MODE, push
the INPUT button of control panel together with ►
button, and then press ▲ button to start operating
the CLONING load function.
• During loading process, the three indicators of
control panel (POWER (orange), TEMP, LAMP)
will remain on.
• After the loading process, the three indicators
(POWER (orange), TEMP, LAMP) will turn off.
• If the loading fails, the three indicators (POWER
(orange), TEMP, LAMP) will blink at the same
time.
• CLONING is invalid with the following conditions.
- CLONING LOCK is turned ON.
With this condition, the three indicators (POWER
(orange), TEMP, LAMP) will blink at approximately
three seconds intervals.
- If the STANDBY MODE is set to SAVING.
- If there is no USB memory inserted into USB
TYPE A port.
• Please operate one of the following after loading.
- Press INPUT button and
◄
button of the control
panel at the same time.
- Wait at least five min. after loading.
- Restart the projector after re-plugging the AC
cable.
(continued on next page)
65
OPTION menu
Item Description
SERVICE
(continued)
CLONING
(continued)
Load MyScreen data
• Please save the image data as "pj_logo.bmp" or
"pj_logo.gif" into USB memory.
• Please note that the only compatible formats are
as follows.
-File format
Windows BMP bit/pixel: 2/4/8/15/16/24/32bit
Compression format :
Without compression/RLE
GIF
-Image size: more than 36x36, less than 1280x800
• If two kinds of file format are saved, "pj_logo.
bmp" will be registered into MyScreen data.
• If MyScreen LOCK is turned ON, the data of
MyScreen cannot be loaded.
Setting the data
• Operating the SAVE function under CLONING
will name the file as "pj_data.bin" into the USB
memory. Please do not attempt to change the file
name or the folder structure.
• If a file with the same name already exists, it will
be overwritten by operating the SAVE function.
Loading function
• Please note that saved data from other model
cannot be loaded.
• Please note that, you cannot load the saved data
if the settings of MyScreen PASSWORD, PIN
LOCK, TRANSITION DETECTOR and MY TEXT
PASSWORD under SECURITY menu is turned
ON.
(continued on next page)
66
OPTION menu
Item Description
SERVICE
(continued)
INFORMATION
Selecting this item displays a dialog titled “INPUT_INFORMATION”.
It shows the information about the current input.
• The “FRAME LOCK” message on the dialog means the frame lock
function is working.
• This item can't be selected for no signal and sync out.
• When the MY TEXT DISPLAY is set to ON, the MY TEXT is
displayed together with the input information in the
INPUT_INFORMATION box (
83).
FACTORY RESET
Selecting OK using the ► button performs this function. By this
function, all the items in all of menus will collectively return to the
initial setting. Note that the items LAMP TIME, FILTER TIME,
LANGUAGE, FILTER MESSAGE, NETWORK and SECURITY
settings are not reset.
CANCEL
OK
Be sure to set ALTITUDE after resetting all the settings (
59).
67
NETWORK menu
Remember that incorrect network settings on this
projector may cause trouble on the network. Be sure
to consult with your network administrator before
connecting to an existing access point on your network.
Select “NETWORK” from the main menu to access the
following functions.
Select an item using the ▲/▼ cursor buttons on the
projector or remote control, and press the ► cursor button on the projector or
remote control, or ENTER button on the remote control to execute the item. Then
perform it according to the following table. See the Network Guide for details of
NETWORK operation.
NETWORK menu
• To use the wireless network function of this projector, the designated
USB wireless adapter that is sold as an option is required. Do not use
any extension cable or device when connecting the adapter to the projector.
•
The projector does not allow both wireless and wired LAN to be connected to
the same network.
• Do not set the same network address for both wireless and wired LAN.
• If you are not utilizing SNTP (Date/Time Settings in the Network Guide),
then you must set the DATE AND TIME during the initial installation.
• The network communication control is disabled while the projector is in
standby mode if the STANDBY MODE item of SETUP menu is set to SAVING.
Please connect the network communication to the projector after setting the
STANDBY MODE to NORMAL (
48
).
NOTE
Item Description
WIRELESS
SETUP
Selecting this item displays the WIRELESS
SETUP menu for the wireless LAN.
Use the ▲/▼ buttons to select an item,
and the ► or ENTER button on the remote
control to perform the item.
MODE
Use the ▲/▼ buttons to select the mode of the
network communication system. Select according
to the settings of your computer.
AD HOC
INFRASTRUCTURE
To save the setting, press the ► button.
• When ADHOC is selected, IEEE802.11 n cannot
be used.
• If ADHOC is set to MODE while one of WPA-
PSK or WPA2-PSK is selected in ENCRYPTION,
the ENCRYPTION (
69) setting switches to OFF
automatically.
(continued on next page)
68
NETWORK menu
Item Description
WIRELESS
SETUP
(continued)
DHCP
(Dynamic Host
Configuration
Protocol)
Use the ▲/▼ buttons to turn DHCP on/off.
ON
OFF
Select OFF when the network does not have DHCP
enabled. To save the setting, press the ► button.
• When the “DHCP” setting changes to “ON”, it
takes a little time to obtain IP address from DHCP
server.
• Auto IP function will be assigned an IP address if
the projector could not obtain an IP address from
server even if DHCP is “ON”
IP ADDRESS
Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to enter the IP
ADDRESS.
This function can only be used when DHCP is set
to OFF.
• The IP ADDRESS is the number that identifies
this projector on the network. You cannot have two
devices with the same IP ADDRESS on the same
network.
• The IP ADDRESS “0.0.0.0” is prohibited.
SUBNET
MASK
Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to enter the same
SUBNET MASK used by your computer.
This function can only be used when DHCP is set
to OFF.
• The SUBNET MASK “0.0.0.0” is prohibited.
DEFAULT
GATEWAY
Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to enter the DEFAULT
GATEWAY (a node on a computer network that
serves as an access point to another network)
address.
This function can only be used when DHCP is set
to OFF.
DNS SERVER
Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to input the DNS
server address.
The DNS server is a system to control domain
names and IP addresses on the Network.
TIME
DIFFERENCE
Use the ▲/▼ buttons to enter the TIME
DIFFERENCE.
Set the same TIME DIFFERENCE as the one
set on your computer. If unsure, consult your IT
manager.
Use the ► button to return to the menu after
setting the TIME DIFFERENCE.
• When this item is set, the same item in the
WIRED SETUP menu is overwritten with the same
setting (
73).
(continued on next page)
69
NETWORK menu
Item Description
WIRELESS
SETUP
(continued)
DATE AND
TIME
Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to enter the Year (last
two digits), Month, Date, Hour and Minute.
• When this item is set, the same item in the
WIRED SETUP menu is overwritten with the same
setting (
73).
• The projector will override this setting and retrieve
DATE AND TIME information from the Time server
when SNTP is enabled. (Date/Time Settings in
the Network Guide)
• This setting will be reset if the projector is turned
off while STANDBY MODE in the SETUP menu
is set to SAVING (
48), or when the AC power is
turned off.
CH
Use the ▲/▼ buttons to select the channel of the
wireless LAN to be used while MODE (
67) is set
to ADHOC. Select according to the settings of your
computer.
The channels 1 to 11 are available. To save the
setting, press the ► button.
• The available channels would be various
depending on a country. In addition, wireless
network card might be required due to the
standard.
• This item can only be selected when MODE
is set to ADHOC. When MODE is set to
INFRASTRUCTURE, the channel is automatically
selected.
ENCRYPTION
Use the ▲/▼ buttons to select the encryption
method to be used.
WPA2-PSK(AES)
WPA2-PSK(TKIP)
OFF WPA-PSK(AES)
WEP 64bit
WEP 128bit
WPA-PSK(TKIP)
To save the setting, press the ► button.
• When MODE (
67) is set to ADHOC, either
WPA-PSK and WPA2-PSK cannot be selected.
• If IEEE802.11 n is used while MODE is set to
INFRASTRUCTURE, TKIP and WEP are disabled.
• If OFF or AES is not selected, communication will
switch automatically to IEEE802.11 b/g.
(continued on next page)
70
NETWORK menu
Item Description
WIRELESS
SETUP
(continued)
SSID
Use the ▲/▼
buttons to select the
SSID to display the
SSID menu.
#1 DEFAULT
#2 DEFAULT
#3 DEFAULT
#5 CUSTOM
#4 DEFAULT
Select one of the DEFAULT (#1~#4) and press ►
or ENTER button.
To adjust CUSTOM
Press the ► or ENTER button when the # 5
CUSTOM is selected. The SSID #5 CUSTOM
menu will be appeared.
(1)
The current SSID will be displayed on the
first line. If not yet written, the line will be blank. Use
the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons and the ENTER or INPUT
button to select and enter characters. To erase 1
character at one time, press the RESET button or
press the ◄ and INPUT button at the same time.
Also if you move the cursor to DELETE or ALL
CLEAR on screen and press the ENTER or INPUT
button, 1 character or all characters will be erased.
The SSID can be input up to 32 characters.
(2)
To change an
already inserted
character, press
the ▲/▼ button to
move the cursor
to one of the first
2 lines, and use
the ◄/► buttons
to move the cursor
on the character to
be changed. After
pressing the ENTER
or INPUT button,
the character is
selected. Then,
follow the same
procedure as
described at the
item (1) above.
(3)
To finish entering text, move the cursor to the OK on
screen and press the ►, ENTER or INPUT button.
To revert to the previous name without saving
changes, move the cursor to the CANCEL on screen
and press the ◄, ENTER or INPUT button.
(continued on next page)
71
NETWORK menu
Item Description
WIRELESS
INFORMATION
"Selecting this item displays the WIRELESS_INFORMATION dialog
for viewing the wireless LAN settings." Use the ▲/▼ buttons to
switch the page.
The first page shows the wireless LAN settings. The second and
subsequent pages display the signal information of wireless LAN
connection devices.
• For details of PASSCODE, refer to the manual for “LiveViewer”.
• Nothing (blank) is shown in the PROJECTOR NAME
(
74)
and
SSID
(
70)
field until you setup those items. Only the first 16
characters of the PROJECTOR NAME.
• IP ADDRESS, SUBNET MASK and DEFAULT GATEWAY indicate
“0.0.0.0” in the following condition.
(1) The USB wireless adapter is not inserted into the projector.
(2) DHCP is ON and the projector does not get address from DHCP
server.
• Nothing (blank) is shown in the CH and SPEED fields if the USB
wireless adapter is not inserted.
• The actual performance and setting will be shown in the CH field,
instead of the setting value in the WIRELESS SETUP menu.
• An icon is displayed to the left of the SSID of the device connected
to the projector.
(continued on next page)
72
NETWORK menu
Item Description
WIRED SETUP
Selecting this item displays the WIRED
SETUP menu for the wired LAN.
Use the ▲/▼ buttons to select an item,
and the ► or ENTER button on the remote
control to perform the item.
DHCP
(Dynamic Host
Configuration
Protocol)
Use the ▲/▼ buttons to turn DHCP on/off.
ON
OFF
Select OFF when the network does not have
DHCP enabled. To save the setting, press the ►
button.
• When the “DHCP” setting changes to “ON”, it
takes a little time to obtain IP address from DHCP
server.
• Auto IP function will be assigned an IP address if
the projector could not obtain an IP address from
server even if DHCP is “ON”.
IP ADDRESS
Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to enter the IP
ADDRESS.
This function can only be used when DHCP is set
to OFF.
• The IP ADDRESS is the number that identifies
this projector on the network. You cannot have two
devices with the same IP ADDRESS on the same
network.
• The IP ADDRESS “0.0.0.0” is prohibited.
SUBNET
MASK
Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to enter the same
SUBNET MASK used by your computer.
This function can only be used when DHCP is set
to OFF.
• The SUBNET MASK “0.0.0.0” is prohibited.
DEFAULT
GATEWAY
Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to enter the DEFAULT
GATEWAY (a node on a computer network that
serves as an access point to another network)
address.
This function can only be used when DHCP is set
to OFF.
DNS SERVER
Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to input the DNS
server address.
The DNS server is a system to control domain
names and IP addresses on the Network.
(continued on next page)
73
NETWORK menu
Item Description
WIRED SETUP
(continued)
TIME
DIFFERENCE
Use the ▲/▼ buttons to enter the TIME
DIFFERENCE.
Set the same TIME DIFFERENCE as the one
set on your computer. If unsure, consult your IT
manager.
Use the ► button to return to the menu after
setting the TIME DIFFERENCE.
• When this item is set, the same item in the
WIRELESS SETUP menu is overwritten with the
same setting (
68).
DATE AND
TIME
Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to enter the Year (last
two digits), Month, Date, Hour and Minute.
• When this item is set, the same item in the
WIRELESS SETUP menu is overwritten with the
same setting (
69).
• The projector will override this setting and retrieve
DATE AND TIME information from the Time server
when SNTP is enabled. (Date/Time Settings in
the Network Guide)
• This setting will be reset if the projector is turned
off while STANDBY MODE in the SETUP menu
is set to SAVING (
48), or when the AC power is
turned off.
WIRED
INFORMATION
Selecting this item displays the WIRED INFORMATION dialog for
viewing the wired LAN settings.
• For details of PASSCODE, refer to the manual for “LiveViewer”.
• Only the first 16 characters of the PROJECTOR NAME are dis-
played.
• IP ADDRESS, SUBNET MASK and DEFAULT GATEWAY indicate
“0.0.0.0” when DHCP is ON and the projector has not gotten address
from DHCP server.
(continued on next page)
74
NETWORK menu
Item Description
PROJECTOR
NAME
(1) Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the
NETWORK menu to select the
PROJECTOR NAME and press
the ► button. The PROJECTOR
NAME dialog will be displayed.
(2) The current PROJECTOR NAME will be displayed on the first 3
lines. Particular projector name is pre-assigned by default.
Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons and the ENTER or INPUT button to
select and enter characters.
To erase 1 character at one time, press the RESET button or
press the ◄ and INPUT button at the same time. Also if you
move the cursor to DELETE or ALL CLEAR on screen and
push the ENTER or INPUT button, 1 character or all characters
will be erased.The PROJECTOR NAME can be input up to 64
characters.
(3) To change an already inserted
character, press the ▲/▼ button
to move the cursor to one of the
first 3 lines, and use the ◄/►
buttons to move the cursor on the
character to be changed. After
pressing the ENTER or INPUT
button, the character is selected.
Then, follow the same procedure
as described at the item (2) above.
(4) To finish entering text, move the cursor to the OK on screen and
press the ►, ENTER or INPUT button. To revert to the previous
PROJECTOR NAME without saving changes, move the cursor
to the CANCEL on screen and press the ◄, ENTER or INPUT
button.
(continued on next page)
75
NETWORK menu
Item Description
MY IMAGE
Selecting this item displays the MY
IMAGE menu.
Use the application to transfer the im-
age data. It can be downloaded from
the Hitachi web site.
Use the ▲/▼ buttons to select an item which is a still image by the
MY IMAGE (My Image Function in the Network Guide) and the ►
or ENTER button to display the image.
• The item without image stored cannot be selected.
• The image names are each displayed in 16 characters or less.
To switch the image displayed
Use the ▲/▼ buttons.
To return to the menu
Press the ◄ button on the remote control.
To erase the image displayed and its source file in the projector.
(1) Press the RESET button on the remote
control while displaying an image to display
the MY IMAGE DELETE menu.
(2) Press the ► button to perform to erase.
To stop erasing, press the ◄ button.
AMX D.D.
(AMX Device
Discovery)
Use the ▲/▼ buttons to turn the AMX Device Discovery on/off.
ON
OFF
When ON is selected, the projector can be detected by controllers
of AMX connected to the same network. For the details of AMX
Device Discovery, visit the AMX web site.
URL: http://www.amx.com/
(as of Dec. 2011)
(continued on next page)
76
NETWORK menu
Item Description
PRESENTATION
Selecting this item displays the PRESENTATION menu.
Use ▲/▼ buttons to select one of the following items, then press ►
or ENTER button to use the function.
• To use Network Presentation, an exclusive application, "LiveViewer"
is required. It can be installed from the bundled application CD.
You can also download the latest version and relevant information
from the Hitachi website (http://www.hitachi-america.us/digitalmedia
or http://www.hitachidigitalmedia.com).For details of Network
Presentation and instructions to install the "LiveViewer", refer to the
manual for "LiveViewer".
QUIT
PRESENTER
MODE
If you set a computer to the Presenter mode while
its image is projected, the projector is occupied by
the computer and access from any other computer is
blocked.
Use this function to quit the Presenter mode and
allow other computers to access the projector.
Select this item to display a dialog.
Press ► button to choose OK in the dialog.
The Presenter mode is cancelled and a message is
displayed indicating the result.
• To make Presenter mode setting, use “LiveViewer”.
For details,
refer to the manual for "LiveViewer".
MULTI PC
MODE
If you set one or more computers to the Multi PC
mode on “LiveViewer” and send their images to the
projector, you can select the display mode on the
projector from two options below.
- Single PC mode: displays the image of the selected
computer on full screen.
- Multi PC mode: displays the images sent from up to
four computers on screen that is divided into quarter
sections.
Select this item to display a dialog.
Use the dialog to change the display mode as
explained below.
• To change from Multi PC mode to Single PC mode,
select one of computers in the dialog using the
▲/▼/◄/► buttons and press the ENTER or INPUT
button.
Press the ► button to choose OK, and then press
ENTER or INPUT again. The image for the selected
computer is displayed on full screen.
(continued on next page)
(continued on next page)
77
NETWORK menu
Item Description
PRESENTATION
(continued)
MULTI PC
MODE
(continued)
• To change from Single PC mode to Multi PC mode,
press ► button to choose OK in the dialog and press
the ENTER or INPUT button.
The display mode is changed.
•
For details on how to switch the
display mode to Multi PC mode
on your computer, refer to the
manual for
“LiveViewer”
.
• The Presenter mode setting of the selected
computer becomes valid when the display mode is
changed to Single PC mode.
Also, the Presenter mode setting
becomes invalid when the
display mode is changed to Multi
PC mode, regardless the setting
on the computers.
For details,
refer to the manual for “LiveViewer”.
DISPLAY
USER NAME
Selecting this item displays the user name. This
function helps you identify from which computer the
current image is sent.
• You can set user names for each computer on
“LiveViewer”. For details,
refer to the manual for
“LiveViewer”.
SERVICE
Executing this item restarts and initializes the network functions.
Choose the NETWORK RESTART EXECUTE using the button ►.
Then use the button ► to execute.
Network will be once cut off when choose restart.
If DHCP is selected on, IP address may be changed.
After selecting NETWORK RESTART EXECUTE, NETWORK menu
may not be controlled approx. 30 seconds.
78
SECURITY menu
(continued on next page)
This projector is equipped with security functions.
From the SECURITY menu, items shown in the table
below can be performed.
To use SECURITY menu: User registration is required
before using the security functions.
Enter to the SECURITY menu
1. Press the ► button. The ENTER PASSWORD box will be displayed.
2. Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to enter the registered password.
The factory default password is as follows.
This password can be changed
(
below)
. Move the cursor to
the right side of the ENTER PASSWORD box and press
the ► button to display the SECURITY menu.
• It is strongly recommended the factory default password to be
changed as soon as possible.
• If an incorrect password is input, the ENTER PASSWORD box
will be displayed again. If incorrect password is input 3 times, the
projector will turn off. Afterwards the projector will turn off every time
an incorrect password is input.
3. Items shown in the table below can be performed.
If you have forgotten your password
(1) While the ENTER PASSWORD box is displayed, press and hold the
RESET button on the remote control for about 3 seconds or press
and hold the INPUT button for 3 seconds while pressing the ►
button on the projector.
(2) The 10 digit Inquiring Code will be displayed. Contact your dealer
with the 10 digit Inquiring Code. Your password will be sent after your user registration information
is confirmed.
• If there is no key input for about 55 seconds while the Inquiring Code is displayed, the menu will
close. If necessary, repeat the process from (1).
Item Description
SECURITY
PASSWORD
CHANGE
(1) Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the SECURITY menu
to select SECURITY PASSWORD CHANGE
and press the ► button to display the ENTER
NEW PASSWORD box.
(2) Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to enter the new password.
(3) Move the cursor to the right side of the
ENTER NEW PASSWORD box and press the
► button to display the NEW PASSWORD
AGAIN box, enter the same password again.
(4)
Move the cursor to the right side of the NEW
PASSWORD AGAIN box and press the ►
button and the NOTE NEW PASSWORD box
will be displayed for about 30 seconds, please
make note of the password during this time.
Pressing the ENTER button on the remote control or
►
button on the
projector will close the NOTE NEW PASSWORD box.
• Please do not forget your password.
SECURITY menu
CP-X2015WN, CP-X2515WN, CP-X3015WN, CP-X4015WN: 3892
CP-WX2515WN, CP-WX3015WN: 2292
79
SECURITY menu
Item Description
MyScreen
PASSWORD
The MyScreen PASSWORD function can be used to prohibit access to the
MyScreen function and prevent the currently registered MyScreen image
from being overwritten.
1 Turning on the MyScreen PASSWORD
1-1 Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the SECURITY menu to
select MyScreen PASSWORD and press the ►
button to display the MyScreen PASSWORD on/
off menu.
1-2 Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the MyScreen
PASSWORD on/off menu to select ON.
The ENTER NEW PASSWORD box (small)
will be displayed.
1-3 Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to enter the
password. Move the cursor to the right side
of the ENTER NEW PASSWORD box (small)
and press the ► button to display the NEW
PASSWORD AGAIN box, enter the same
PASSWORD again.
1-4 Move the cursor to the right side of the
NEW PASSWORD AGAIN box and press
the ► button to display the NOTE NEW
PASSWORD box for about 30 seconds,
please make note of the password during
this time.
Pressing the ENTER button on the remote control or ► button on the
projector will return to MyScreen PASSWORD on/off menu.
When a password is set for MyScreen:
•
The MyScreen registration function (and menu) will be unavailable.
•
The MyScreen Lock menu will be unavailable.
•
The START UP setting will be locked on MyScreen (and the menu will be
unavailable).
Turning the MyScreen PASSWORD off will allow normal operation of these
functions.
•
Please do not forget your MyScreen PASSWORD.
2 Turning off the MyScreen PASSWORD
2-1 Follow the procedure in 1-1 to display the MyScreen PASSWORD on/off
menu.
2-2
Select OFF to display the ENTER
PASSWORD box (large). Enter the registered
password and the screen will return to the
MyScreen PASSWORD on/off menu.
If an incorrect PASSWORD is input, the menu will
close. If necessary, repeat the process from 2-1.
3 If you have forgotten your password
3-1 Follow the procedure in 1-1 to display the MyScreen PASSWORD on/off
menu.
3-2 Select OFF to display the ENTER PASSWORD box (large). The 10 digit
Inquiring Code will be displayed inside the box.
3-3 Contact your dealer with the 10 digit Inquiring Code. Your password will
be sent after your user registration information is confirmed.
(continued on next page)
ENTER NEW PASSWORD
box (small)
ENTER PASSWORD box
(large)
80
SECURITY menu
Item Description
PIN LOCK
PIN LOCK is a function which prevents the projector from being used unless
a registered Code is input.
1 Turning on the PIN LOCK
1-1 Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the SECURITY menu to
select PIN LOCK and press the ► button or the
ENTER button to display the PIN LOCK on/off
menu.
1-2 Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the PIN LOCK on/
off menu to select ON and the Enter PIN
Code box will be displayed.
1-3 Input a 4 part PIN code using the ▲/▼/◄/►,
COMPUTER or INPUT button.
The PIN Code again box will appear. Reenter
the same PIN code. This will complete the PIN
code registration.
•
If there is no key input for about 55 seconds
while the Enter PIN Code box or the PIN Code again box is displayed,
the menu will close. If necessary, repeat the process from 1-1.
Afterwards, anytime the projector is restarted after AC power is turned off
the Enter PIN Code box will be displayed. Enter the registered PIN code.
The projector can be used after entering the registered PIN code. If an
incorrect PIN code is input, the Enter PIN code box will be displayed again.
If an incorrect PIN code is input 3 times, the projector will turn off. Afterwards
the projector will turn off every time an incorrect PIN code is input. The
projector will also turn off if there is no key input for about 5 minutes while
the Enter PIN code box is displayed.
This function will activate only when the projector is started after AC power
is turned off.
•
Please do not forget your PIN code.
2 Turning off the PIN LOCK
2-1 Follow the procedure in 1-1 to display the PIN LOCK on/off menu.
2-2 Use the ▲/▼ buttons to select OFF and the Enter PIN Code box will be
displayed.
Enter the registered PIN code to turn the PIN LOCK function off.
If an incorrect PIN code is input 3 times, the projector will turn off.
3 If you have forgotten your PIN code
3-1 While the Enter PIN code box is displayed, press and hold the RESET
button for three seconds or press and hold the INPUT button for 3
seconds while pressing the ► button on the projector.
The 10 digit Inquiring Code will be displayed.
•
If there is no key input for about 5 minutes
while the Inquiring Code is displayed, the
projector will turn off.
3-2 Contact your dealer with the 10 digit Inquiring Code. Your PIN code will
be sent after your user registration information is confirmed.
(continued on next page)
81
SECURITY menu
Item Description
TRANSITION
DETECTOR
If this function is set to ON and the vertical angle of
the projector or the INSTALLATION setting is different
from the previous recorded setting, the TRANSITION
DETECTOR ON alarm will be displayed and the input
signal will not be displayed.
• To display the signal again, set this function OFF.
• After about 5 minutes of displaying the TRANSITION DETECTOR ON
alarm, the lamp will turn off.
• Keystone adjustment feature has been prohibited as long as the
TRANSITION DETECTOR function is on.
1 Turning on the TRANSITION DETECTOR
1-1 Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the SECURITY menu
to select TRANSITION DETECTOR and press
the ► or the ENTER button to display the
TRANSITION DETECTOR on/off menu.
1-2
Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the TRANSITION
DETECTOR on/off menu to select ON.
Selecting ON will save the setting of the
current angle and the INSTALLATION setting.
The ENTER NEW PASSWORD box (small)
will be displayed.
1-3
Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to enter a
password. Move the cursor to the right side
of the ENTER NEW PASSWORD box (small)
and press the ► button to display the NEW
PASSWORD AGAIN box, enter the same
password again.
1-4 Move the cursor to the right side of the
NEW PASSWORD AGAIN box and press
the ► button to display the NOTE NEW
PASSWORD box for about 30 seconds,
please make note of the password during this time.
Pressing the ENTER button on the remote control or the
►
button on the
projector will return to the TRANSITION DETECTOR on/off menu.
• Please do not forget your TRANSITION DETECTOR password.
• This function will activate only when the projector is started after turning off
the AC power.
• This feature may not function properly if the projector is not in a stable
position when ON is selected.
2 Turning off the TRANSITION DETECTOR
2-1
Follow the procedure in 1-1 to display the TRANSITION DETECTOR on/off menu.
2-2
Select OFF to display the ENTER
PASSWORD box (large). Enter the registered
password and the screen will return to the
TRANSITION DETECTOR on/off menu.
If an incorrect password is input, the menu will
close. If necessary, repeat the process from 2-1.
3 If you have forgotten your password
3-1
Follow the procedure in 1-1 to display the TRANSITION DETECTOR on/off menu.
3-2 Select OFF to display the ENTER PASSWORD box (large). The 10 digit
Inquiring Code will be displayed inside the box.
3-3 Contact your dealer with the 10 digit Inquiring Code. Your password will
be sent after your user registration information is confirmed.
(continued on next page)
ENTER NEW PASSWORD
box (small)
ENTER PASSWORD box
(large)
82
SECURITY menu
Item Description
MY TEXT
PASSWORD
The MY TEXT PASSWORD function can prevent the MY TEXT from being
overwritten. When the password is set for the MY TEXT;
• The MY TEXT DISPLAY menu will be unavailable, which can prohibit
changing the DISPLAY setting.
• The MY TEXT WRITING menu will be unavailable, which can prevent the
MY TEXT from being overwritten.
1 Turning on the MY TEXT PASSWORD
1-1 Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the SECURITY menu to
select the MY TEXT PASSWORD and press the
► button to display the MY TEXT PASSWORD
on/off menu.
1-2 Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the MY TEXT
PASSWORD on/off menu to select ON. The
ENTER NEW PASSWORD box (small) will
be displayed.
1-3 Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to enter the
password. Move the cursor to the right side
of the ENTER NEW PASSWORD box (small)
and press the ► button to display the NEW
PASSWORD AGAIN box, and then enter the
same password again.
1-4 Move the cursor to the right side of the
NEW PASSWORD AGAIN box and press
► button to display the NOTE NEW
PASSWORD box for about 30 seconds, then
please make note of the password during
this time.
Pressing the ENTER button on the remote control or ► button on the
projector will return to the MY TEXT PASSWORD on/off menu.
2 Turning off the MY TEXT PASSWORD
2-1 Follow the procedure in 1-1 to display the MY TEXT PASSWORD on/off
menu.
2-2 Select OFF to display the ENTER
PASSWORD box (large). Enter the
registered password and the screen will
return to the MY TEXT PASSWORD on/off
menu.
If an incorrect password is input, the menu will close.
If necessary, repeat the process from 2-1
3 If you have forgotten your password
3-1 Follow the procedure in 1-1 to display the MY TEXT PASSWORD on/off
menu.
3-2 Select OFF to display the ENTER PASSWORD box (large). The 10 digit
inquiring code will be displayed inside the box.
3-3 Contact your dealer with the 10 digit inquiring code. Your password will
be sent after your user registration information is confirmed.
(continued on next page)
ENTER NEW PASSWORD
box (small)
ENTER PASSWORD box
(large)
83
SECURITY menu
Item Description
MY TEXT
DISPLAY
(1) Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the SECURITY menu to
select the MY TEXT DISPLAY and press the ► or
ENTER button to display the MY TEXT DISPLAY
on/off menu.
(2) Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the MY TEXT DISPLAY on/off menu to select
on or off.
ON
OFF
When it is set ON, the MY TEXT will be displayed
on the START UP screen and the INPUT_
INFORMATION when the INFORMATION on the
SERVICE menu is chosen.
• This function is available only when the MY TEXT
PASSWORD function is set to the OFF.
MY TEXT
WRITING
(1) Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the
SECURITY menu to select the MY
TEXT WRITING and press the ►
button. The MY TEXT WRITING dialog
will be displayed.
(2) The current MY TEXT will be displayed
on the first 3 lines. If not yet written, the
lines will be blank.
Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons and the
ENTER or INPUT button to select and
enter characters. To erase 1 character
at one time, press the RESET button or
press the ◄ and INPUT button at the
same time. Also if you move the cursor
to DELETE or ALL CLEAR on screen
and press the ENTER or INPUT button,
1 character or all characters will be
erased. The MY TEXT can be input up
to 24 characters on each line.
(3)
To change an already inserted character,
press the ▲/▼ button to move the
cursor to one of the first 3 lines, and use
the ◄/► buttons to move the cursor on
the character to be changed.
After pressing the ENTER or INPUT button, the character is selected.
Then, follow the same procedure as described at the item (2) above.
(4) To finish entering text, move the cursor to the OK on screen and press
the ►, ENTER or INPUT button. To revert to the previous MY TEXT
without saving changes, move the cursor to the CANCEL on screen and
press the ◄, ENTER or INPUT button.
•
The MY TEXT WRITING function is available only when the MY TEXT
PASSWORD function is set to OFF.
CLONING LOCK
The CLONING operation under OPTION _SERVICE menu is not available if
ON is selected.
84
Presentation tools
Presentation tools
The PC-LESS Presentation reads image and audio data from the storage media
inserted into the USB TYPE A port and displays the image in the following modes.
The PC-LESS Presentation can be started by selecting the USB TYPE A port as
the input source.
This feature allows you to make your presentations without using your computer.
PC-LESS Presentation
- Thumbnail mode (85)
- Full Screen mode (
89)
- Slideshow mode (
91)
[Supported storage media]
• USB memory (USB memory type, USB hard disk and USB card reader type)
• USB readers (adapters) that have more than one USB slot may not
work (if the adapter is acknowledged as multiple devices connected).
• USB devices with security software may not work.
• Be careful when inserting or removing a USB device. (
13, 87)
NOTE
• NTFS is not supported.NOTE
[Supported format]
• FAT12, FAT16 and FAT32
The projector has the following two convenient tools that enable on-screen
presentations easily and quickly:
- PC-LESS Presentation (
below)
-
Drawing function
Drawing function enables you to draw on the projector’s screen with
USBmouse or tablets connected to the USB TYPE A ports. For details of
Drawing function, refer to the Operating Guide - Drawing function.
- USB Display (
100)
85
Presentation tools
• Files with a resolution larger than the following are not supported.
CP-X2015WN, CP-X2515WN, CP-X3015WN, CP-X4015WN:
1024 x 768 (Still)， 768 x 576 (Movie)
CP-WX2515WN, CP-WX3015WN: 1280 x 800 (Still)， 768 x 576 (Movie)
(* Some computers may not support 1280 x 800.)
• Files with a resolution smaller than 36 x 36 are not supported.
• Files with a resolution smaller than 100 x 100 may not be displayed.
• Movie images with a frame rate higher than 15 fps cannot be displayed.
• Movie images with a bit rate higher than 20 Mbps cannot be displayed.
• Some supported files may not be displayed.
• Only a frame appears when the content of image data cannot be displayed in
the Thumbnail mode.
• Even with the file format and audio format combinations described above,
playback of some files may fail.
NOTE
[Supported file format and its extension]
• JPEG (.jpeg, .jpg) * Progressive is not supported.
• Bitmap (.bmp) *
16bit mode and compressed bitmap is not supported.
• PNG (.png) * Interlace PNG is not supported.
• GIF (.gif)
• Movie (.avi, .mov) *
Supported video format: Motion-JPEG
Supported audio format:
WAV (Linear PCM, Stereo
16bit),
IMA-ADPCM
Thumbnail mode
PC-LESS Presentation (continued)
The Thumbnail mode displays the images stored in a USB storage device on the
Thumbnail screen. Maximum 20 images are displayed in a screen.
If you wish, you can jump into the Full Screen mode or Slideshow mode, after you
select some images in the Thumbnail mode.
The Thumbnail mode will be started as the primary function of the PC-LESS
Presentation after selecting the USB TYPE A port as the input source.
Thumbnail menu
Selected image
Thumbnail images
86
Presentation tools
PC-LESS Presentation (continued)
The SETUP menu for the selected image
Item Functions
SETUP
Use the ◄/► cursor buttons to switch each setting or use the ► cursor
button to execute the functions as follows.
RETURN Press the ► cursor button or ENTER to return to the Thumbnail screen.
START
Switch to ON to set the selected image as the first image in the
Slideshow. This setting information will be saved in the “playlist.txt” file
(
93).
STOP
Switch to ON to set the selected image as the last image in the
Slideshow. This setting information will be saved in the “playlist.txt” file
(
93).
SKIP
Switch to ON to skip the selected image in the Slideshow. This setting
information will be saved in the “playlist.txt” file (
93).
ROTATE
Press the ► cursor or ENTER button to rotate the selected still image
90 degrees clockwise. This setting information will be saved in the
“playlist.txt” file (
93).
You can control the images on the Thumbnail screen with the remote control,
control panel or Web Remote Control. The following functions can be supported
while the Thumbnail is displayed.
Operating by buttons or keys
Button operation
Functions
The remote
control
Control panel
Web Remote
Control
▲/▼/◄/► ▲/▼/◄/► [▲]/[▼]/[◄]/[►] Move cursor
PAGE UP
PAGE DOWN
-
[PAGE UP]
[PAGE DOWN]
Switches pages
ENTER INPUT [ENTER]
• Displays the selected image
on the Full Screen mode when a
cursor is on a thumbnail image.
• Displays the SETUP menu
(
below) for the selected image
when a cursor is on a thumbnail
image number.
87
Presentation tools
You can also control the images by using the menu on the Thumbnail screen.
PC-LESS Presentation (continued)
Operating by the menu on the Thumbnail screen
Item Functions
Moves to an upper folder.
SORT Allows you to sort files and folders as following.
RETURN
Press the ► cursor button or ENTER to return to the Thumbnail
screen.
NAME UP Sorts in ascending order by file name.
NAME DOWN Sorts in descending order by file name.
DATE UP Sorts in ascending order by file date.
DATE DOWN Sorts in descending order.by file date.
▲/▼ Go to previous / next page.
SLIDESHOW Configures and starts the Slideshow (
91).
RETURN
Press the ► cursor button or ENTER to return to the Thumbnail
screen.
PLAY Press the ► cursor button or ENTER to start the Slideshow.
START Sets the beginning number of the Slideshow.
STOP Sets the end number of the Slideshow.
INTERVAL
Sets the interval time for displaying still images during the
Slideshow.
PLAY MODE Selects the Slideshow mode.
INPUT Switches the input port.
MENU Displays the menu.
REMOVE USB
Be sure to use this function before removing USB storage device
from the projector. After that, the projector will not recognize a
USB storage device until you insert it again into the USB TYPE A
input port.
/
Turns the sound on/off for files that contain audio data.
88
Presentation tools
PC-LESS Presentation (continued)
•
These operations are not accessible while the projector OSD is displayed.
• The Thumbnail mode is able to display up to 20 files in one page.
• It is not possible to change the input port by using the INPUT button when the
Thumbnail screen, Slideshow, or Full Screen is displayed.
• The image quality may deteriorate when playing back audio data included in
a movie. If you want to give priority to the image quality, turn off the sound by
setting ♪ to off.
• If one of the AUDIO IN ports is selected or
is selected for USB TYPE A in
AUDIO SOURCE of the AUDIO menu
(49), ♪ cannot be operated.
• Some error icons will be displayed in the Thumbnail.
NOTE
This file seems to be broken or not supported format.
A file that cannot be displayed on the
thumbnail screen is indicated by a file
format icon.
89
Presentation tools
PC-LESS Presentation (continued)
The Full Screen mode shows a full display image. To display in Full Screen mode,
select an image in the Thumbnail screen. Then press the ENTER button on the
remote control, the INPUT button on the
control panel or click [ENTER] on the
Web Remote Control.
Full Screen Mode
Button operation
Functions
The remote
control
Control panel
Web Remote
Control
▼
►
or
PAGE DOWN
▼
or
►
[▼]
[►]
or
[PAGE DOWN]
Shows the next file.
▲
◄
or
PAGE UP
▲
or
◄
[▲]
[◄]
or
[PAGE UP]
Shows the previous file.
ENTER INPUT [ENTER] Displays Thumbnail.
The following operations are enabled in the Full Screen mode while a still image
is displayed.
Full screen display
Operations for still images
90
Presentation tools
PC-LESS Presentation (continued)
Button operation
Functions
The remote
control
Control panel
Web Remote
Control
▲ ▲ [▲]
(Play) /
(Pause) toggle
► ► [►]
(FF) Fast-forward
◄ ◄ [◄]
(REW) Fast-rewind
ENTER INPUT [ENTER] (Stop), Displays Thumbnail.
PAGE DOWN –[PAGE DOWN]
Shows the next file.
PAGE UP –[PAGE UP]
Shows the previous file.
•
These operations are not accessible while the projector OSD is displayed.
• It is not possible to change the input port by using the INPUT button when the
Thumbnail screen, Slideshow, or Full Screen is displayed.
NOTE
A remote control icon and a progress bar are
displayed when one of the cursor buttons, ENTER
button or INPUT button on the remote control, control
panel or Web Remote Control is pressed or clicked while a movie is playing in the
Full Screen mode. The following operations are enabled while the remote control
icon and progress bar are displayed.
Operations for movie
91
Presentation tools
PC-LESS Presentation (continued)
Slideshow mode
While the Slideshow is displayed, the following button operations are enabled
when still images are displayed, and the same button operations in the Full
Screen mode are enabled when movies are displayed.
• These operations are not accessible while the projector OSD is
displayed.
• It is not possible to change the input port by using the INPUT button when the
Thumbnail screen, Slideshow, or Full Screen is displayed.
•
When the Slideshow mode is set to ONE TIME and the last file is a still image,
the last slide of the presentation will remain displayed until the ENTER button
on the remote control or Web Remote Control, or the INPUT button on the
control panel is pressed.
NOTE
You can start this function from the Slideshow menu. To display the Slideshow
menu, select the SLIDESHOW button in the Thumbnail mode and press the
ENTER button on the remote control, INPUT button on the control panel, or click
[ENTER] on the Web Remote Control.
Button operation
Functions
The remote
control
Control panel
Web Remote
Control
ENTER INPUT [ENTER] Displays thumbnail
The Slideshow mode displays images in full screen and switches the images at
intervals set in INTERVAL on the Thumbnail screen menu (
87).
92
Presentation tools
PC-LESS Presentation (continued)
You can play the Slideshow at your desired configuration.
Configure the Slideshow items in the Thumbnail.
1) RETURN :
Returns to the thumbnail mode.
2) PLAY : Play the Slideshow.
3) START :
Set the beginning number of the
Slideshow.
4) STOP : Set the end number of the Slideshow.
5) INTERVAL : Sets the interval time for displaying still
images during the Slideshow.
It is not recommend to set the interval
time very short something like several
seconds, because it may take more than
several seconds to read and display an
image file if it is stored in very deep layer
directory or if so many files are stored in
the same directory.
6) PLAY MODE : Select the Slideshow mode.
ONE TIME : Play the Slideshow one
time.
ENDLESS : Play the Slideshow endless.
• The settings of the Slideshow are saved to the “playlist.txt” file
that is stored in the storage media. If the file is not existed, it is generated
automatically.
• The settings for the START, STOP, INTERVAL, and PLAY MODE are saved to
the Playlist.
• If the storage media is under the write protection or the “playlist.txt” is the
read only type file, it is impossible to change the settings of the Slideshow.
NOTE
93
Presentation tools
PC-LESS Presentation (continued)
Playlist
The Playlist is a DOS format text file, which decides the order of displayed still
image files in the Thumbnail or Slideshow.
The playlist file name is “playlist.txt” and it can be edited on a computer.
It is created in the folder that contains the selected image files when the PC-LESS
Presentation is started or the Slideshow is configured.
[Example of “playlist.txt” files]
START setting : STOP setting : INTERVAL setting : PLAY MODE setting :
img001.jpg: : : :
img002.jpg:600: : :
img003.jpg:700:rot1: :
img004.jpg: : :SKIP:
img005.jpg:1000:rot2:SKIP:
The “playlist.txt” file contains the following information.
Each piece of information requires to be separated by “:”, and “:” at the end of each line.
1st line: START, STOP, INTERVAL and PLAY MODE settings (92).
2nd line and after: file name, interval time, rotation setting and skip setting.
interval time:
It can be set from 0 to 999900 (ms) with an increment of 100 (ms).
rotation setting
: “rot1” means a rotation at 90 degrees clockwise; “rot2” and
“rot3” increase another 90 degrees in order.
skip setting: “SKIP” means that the image will not be displayed in the
Slideshow.
•
The maximum length in a line on the "playlist.txt" file is 255 characters
including linefeed. If any line exceeds the limit, the "playlist.txt" file becomes invalid.
•
Up to 999 files can be registered to the Playlist. However, if some folders exist in
the same directory the limit number is decreased by the number of folders.
Any files over the limit will not be shown in the Slideshow.
•
If the storage device is protected or does not have sufficient space, the “playlist.txt”
file cannot be created.
• For the Slideshow settings, refer to the section Slideshow mode (91).
NOTE
94
Presentation tools
This function is an interactive tool for use with Hitachi projectors; it offers effective
features for making classroom and business presentations more fun and easier to
understand.
Main Functions
Drawing on projected images
You can draw pictures or text on images projected by our projectors.
• Authorization by the copyright owner(s) is required pursuant to
applicable laws for the use of works including visual images, if such works are
copyrighted works.
• This drawing function may not work depending on the image signal.
NOTE
Saving and displaying drawn images
You can save images with pictures or text drawn on them to a USB memory
device and then retrieve the saved images and display them again later.
• A USB memory device is necessary to use this function. In addition,
if your projector only has one available USB TYPE A port, you will also need a
USB hub.
• Copyright protected images cannot be saved.
NOTE
Use as a simple mouse
The Hitachi Pen tablet (ex. TB-1)/ USB mouse with the drawing function can be
used as a simple mouse of a computer connected to a projector.
• To use this function, a USB cable is required to connect the computer
and the projector.
•Some Hitachi Pen tablets (ex. TB-1) and USB mouse devices may not operate
properly.
NOTE
Drawing Function
95
Presentation tools
Connect into the USB TYPE A port on your projector.
To save an image that has been drawn, a USB memory device must also be
connected to a USB TYPE A port of the projector.
If the projector only has one USB TYPE A port, use a USB hub to connect both
devices.
Connecting the Hitachi Pen tablet (ex. TB-1)/USB mouse and
USB memory device.
In order to use the Hitachi Pen tablet (ex. TB-1)/USB mouse in place of the
computer’s mouse, connect a USB TYPE B port of the projector with a USB port
(Type A) of the computer with a USB cable.
• Some USB memory devices and/or USB hubs may not operate properly.
NOTE
Drawing Function (continued)
Connecting the Computer and Projector with a USB Cable
USB TYPE B
USB TYPE A
USB TYPE A
Wireless
adapter
USB memory
device
Fig.1 Example of connections
Tablet
Projector
96
Presentation tools
Drawing Function (continued)
USB
(A)
USB TYPE B
USB TYPE A
USB TYPE A
Wireless
adapter
USB memory
device
Tablet
Projector
USB hub
Computer
Mouse
Fig.3 Example of connections
Wireless
adapter
USB memory
device
USB TYPE B
USB TYPE A
USB TYPE A
USB
(A)
Tablet
Projector
Computer
Fig.2 Example of connections
97
Presentation tools
Using the Drawing Function
Touching/clicking Hitachi Pen tablet (ex. TB-1)/USB mouse function key starts up
the drawing mode. A tool bar like the fi gure below is displayed on the projector
screen while in the drawing mode. Touching/clicking an icon on the tool bar
enables the following functions. Touching anywhere on the tool bar except an icon
and dragging moves the toolbar.
• Images may be copyrighted, in which case, permission from the
copyright holder is necessary for use, in accordance with the copyright act and
other applicable laws.
•
The drawing function does not support drawing on images from the LAN port
or the USB TYPE B port of the projector. If you operate the Hitachi Pen tablet
(ex. TB-1)/USB mouse while these images are displayed, the input source may
automatically switch to USB TYPE A port.
NOTE
Pen1. Selects the pen function.
The cursor turns into a Pencil ; dragging it draws a line of
the specifi ed pen color and size.
The cursor turns into a Laser Pointer . Dragging it does not
draw a line.
Pen color2.
Selects the Color of the line drawn by the Pencil.
Specifi es Black.
Specifi es Red.
Specifi es Blue.
Pen size3.
Selects the Thickness of the line drawn by the Pencil.
Specifi es 1-dot.
Specifi es 3-dot.
Specifi es 5-dot.
Eraser4.
Switches the pen function to that of an eraser and specifi es its size.
The cursor turns into an Eraser
; dragging it erases previously
drawn lines.
Specifi es a 12-dot Eraser.
Specifi es a 20-dot Eraser.
Specifi es a 28-dot Eraser.
98
(continued on next page)
5. Erase
Erases all the lines drawn with the pen.
Projector 6.
Operation
Operates the projector.
Calls up and display the previous fi le in the USB memory
device from that currently selected. This function is available
when the projector is displaying a fi le from a USB memory
device.
Calls up and display the next fi le in the USB memory device
from that currently displayed. This function is available when
the projector is displaying a fi le from a USB memory device.
Displays thumbnails of fi les recorded on a USB memory
device.You can display an image onto the projector screen by
touching its thumbnail.
Saves the image on the projector screen, along with any text
or pictures drawn, onto a USB memory device connected to
the projector.
Files are saved with the fi le name “Pxxx.bmp” (where xxx is •
a consecutive number) into a folder named “PJ_Capture”.
If it does not already exist, a “PJ_Capture” folder is created
automatically.
Before removing a USB memory device with fi les saved to it •
from the projector, be sure to run the projector’s “REMOVE
USB” function
( 87 ). The time stamp of saved fi les are
as per the date and time settings of the projector. If you
do not run the “REMOVE USB” function and remove the
USB memory device, the time stamp may not be recorded
correctly.
The tool bar is not saved.•
Copyright protected images cannot be saved.•
Drawing with this function is not saved to the projector’s •
“MyScreen”.
Temporarily blanks out the display.
Touching anywhere in the tablet’s operation area recovers the
display.
It can be used in the same way as the • BLANK button on the
projector’s remote control.
Using the Drawing Function (continued)
Presentation tools
99
Projector 6.
Operation
(Continued)
Turns off the projector.
Touch/click the icon for three seconds or so.
If you turn the projector off while using the drawing function, •
any unsaved drawings will be lost.
Toggles between display/hide the Pattern (grid lines).
Cycles through the display source signals.
It can be used in the same way as the • INPUT button on
the projector’s control panel. However, images cannot be
selected from a LAN port or a USB TYPE B port.
Mouse 7.
Operation
When the computer screen is displayed, this function operates the
computer like a simple mouse or keyboard.
In order to use this function, connect a • USB TYPE B port of the
projector with a USB port (Type A) of the computer via a USB cable.
Works like the Page Down button on a keyboard.
Works like the Page Up button on a keyboard.
Works like the left-click button on a mouse.
Works like the right-click button on a mouse.
Moves the mouse’s cursor in the direction of the arrow.
Exit8.
Closes the tool bar and exits the drawing function.
When exiting the drawing mode, all unsaved drawings are lost.•
Minimize9.
Minimizes the tool bar.
Touching the minimized tool bar icon displays the tool bar again.
Using the Drawing Function (continued)
Presentation tools
100
USB Display(Windows computer)
The projector can display images transferred from a computer via an USB cable (12).
When you connect your computer to the USB TYPE B port on the projector
using a USB cable, the projector will be recognized as a CD-ROM drive on your
computer. Then, the software in the projector, “LiveViewerLiteUSB.exe”, will run
automatically and the application, “LiveViewer Lite for USB”, will be ready on your
computer for the USB Display. The application, “LiveViewer Lite for USB”, will
close automatically when the USB cable is unplugged. However, it may remain
displayed at times.
• If the software does not start automatically (this is typically because
CD-ROM autorun is disabled on your OS), follow the instructions below.
(1) Click on the [Start] button on the toolbar and select the “Run”
(2) Enter F:\LiveViewerLiteUSB.exe and then press the [OK]
• CD-ROM autorun is disabled while the screen saver is running.
• The image transmission from the computer is suspended while the password-
protected screen saver is running. To resume the transmission, exit the screen
saver.
•
If "Waiting for connection." remains displayed while the USB cable is connected,
remove the USB cable and reconnect after a while.
• Check our web site for the latest version of the software and its manual.
(
User's Manual (concise))
Follow the instructions that can be obtained at the site for updating.
NOTE
If your CD-ROM drive is not drive F on your computer, you will
need to replace F with the correct drive letter assigned to your
CD-ROM drive.
Hardware and software requirement for computer
• OS: One of the following. (32 bit version only)
Windows
®
XP Home Edition /Professional Edition
Windows Vista
®
Home Basic /Home Premium /Business /Ultimate /Enterprise
Windows
®
7 Starter /Home Basic /Home Premium /Professional / Ultimate /
Enterprise
• CPU: Pentium 4 (2.8 GHz or higher)
• Graphic card: 16 bit, XGA or higher
• Memory: 512 MB or higher
• Hard disk space: 30 MB or higher
• USB Port
• USB cable : 1 piece
Starting USB Display
(continued on next page)
Presentation tools
101
Presentation tools
This application will appear in the Windows
notification area once it starts. You can quit the
application from your computer by selecting “Quit” on
the menu.
• The “LiveViewer” (refer to the
Network Guide) and this application cannot
be used at the same time. If you connect your
computer to the projector by using a USB cable
while the “LiveViewer” is running, the following message will be displayed.
• Depending on the software installed on your computer, images on your
computer cannot be transferred using “LiveViewer Lite for USB”.
• If any application software having the firewall function is installed into your
computer, make the firwall function invalid with following the user's manual.
• Some security software may block image transmission. Please change the
security software setting to allow the use of "LiveViewer Lite for USB".
• When the audio input from USB TYPE B is selected, if the sound level is still
low even after raising the volume level in the projector to the maximum, check
whether your computer outputs audio and raise the volume level accordingly.
• If the computer in use is equipped with HDMI port, the audio setting will be
changed and sound interruption or noise may occur when the HDMI cable is
connected or disconnected during USB Display. Restart USB Display for this
case.
• Image distortion or sound interruption may occur when
“LiveViewer” is
connected to LAN (wireless or wired) during USB Display. The above decline in
performance is noticeable especially when multiple computers are connected to
“LiveViewer”.
NOTE
USB Display(Windows computer) (continued)
102
Presentation tools
Display : The Floating menu is displayed, and the icon disappears from the
Windows notification area.
Quit : The application is closed, and the icon disappears from the Windows
notification area.
The menu shown in the right will be displayed
when you right-click the application icon in the
Windows notification area.
USB Display(Windows computer) (continued)
Right-Click menu
• If you wish to restart the application, you need to unplug the USB
cable and plug it again.
NOTE
If you select “Display” on the Right-Click
menu, the Floating menu shown in the right
will appear on your computer screen.
q Start capture button
The transmission to the projector is started
and the images will be displayed.
w Stop button
The image transmission is stopped.
e Hold button
The image on the projector’s screen is temporally frozen. The last image before
the button is clicked is remained on the screen. You can revise the image data
on your computer without showing it on the projector's screen.
r Option button
The Options window is displayed.
t Minimize button
The Floating menu is c
losed, and the icon reappears in the Windows notification
area.
Floating menu
• If you click the Start capture button and/or Stop button repeatedly,
images may not be displayed on the screen.
NOTE
q
w
e rt
103
Presentation tools
If you select the Option button on the Floating
menu, the Options window is displayed.
Optimize Performance
The “LiveViewer Lite for USB” captures
screenshots in JPEG data and sends them to
the projector. The “LiveViewer Lite for USB” has
two options that have different compression rate
of JPEG data.
Transmission speed
Speed takes priority over Image quality.
It makes JPEG compression rate higher.
The screen on the projector is rewritten quicker because the transferred
data is smaller, but the image quality is worse.
Image quality
Image quality takes priority over Speed.
It makes JPEG compression rate lower.
The screen on the projector is rewritten slower because the transferred
data is larger, but the image quality is better.
Keep PC resolution
If you remove the check mark from the [Keep PC resolution] box, the screen
resolution of
your computer will be switched as follows, and the display speed
may be faster.
CP-X2015WN, CP-X2515WN, CP-X3015WN, CP-X4015WN: 1024 x 768 (XGA)
CP-WX2515WN, CP-WX3015WN: 1280 x 800 (WXGA)
If your computer does not support the display resolution specified above, a
smaller resolution that is the largest among the resolutions that are supported by
the computer will be selected.
Sound
Turns the sound on/off. The image quality may deteriorate when you play back
audio data transferred together with the image data. To give priority to the image
quality, turn off the sound by selecting the checkbox.
Display LiveViewer Lite for USB
If you want to display the "LiveViewer Lite for USB" application window on the
screen, please check the box.
About
The version information of the “LiveViewer Lite for USB”.
USB Display(Windows computer) (continued)
Options window
• When the resolution is changed, the arrangement of icons on
computer desktop screen may be changed.
• If one of the AUDIO IN ports is selected or is selected for USB TYPE B
in AUDIO SOURCE of the AUDIO menu
(49)
, audio sound operation in the
Options window will be disabled.
NOTE
104
USB Display(Mac computer)
The projector can display images transferred from a computer via an USB cable (12).
• The image transmission from the computer is suspended while the
password-protected screen saver is running. To resume the transmission, exit
the screen saver.
•
If "Waiting for connection." remains displayed while the USB cable is connected,
remove the USB cable and reconnect after a while.
• Check our web site for the latest version of the software and its manual.
(
User's Manual (concise))
Follow the instructions that can be obtained at the site for updating.
NOTE
Hardware and software requirement for computer
• OS: Mac OSX 10.5(Intel)
Mac OSX 10.6(Intel)
Mac OSX 10.7(Intel)
This application is not compatible with Power PC.
• Graphic card: 16 bit, XGA or higher
• Memory: 512 MB or higher
• Hard disk space: 30 MB or higher
Starting USB Display
(continued on next page)
Presentation tools
When you connect your computer to the USB TYPE B port on the projector
using a USB cable, the projector will be recognized as a CD-ROM drive on your
computer. Double click the CD-ROM, then
double click
"LiveViewerLiteForUSB_MacOS.app.".
The application, “LiveViewer Lite for USB”,
will close automatically when the USB
cable is unplugged. However, it may remain
displayed at times.
105
Presentation tools
• The “LiveViewer” (refer to the
Network Guide) and this application cannot be
used at the same time. If you connect your computer
to the projector by using a USB cable while the
“LiveViewer” is running, the following message will
be displayed.
• Depending on the software installed on your computer, images on your
computer cannot be transferred using “LiveViewer Lite for USB”.
• If any application software having the firewall function is installed into your
computer, make the firwall function invalid with following the user's manual.
• Some security software may block image transmission. Please change the
security software setting to allow the use of "LiveViewer Lite for USB".
• When the audio input from USB TYPE B is selected, if the sound level is still
low even after raising the volume level in the projector to the maximum, check
whether your computer outputs audio and raise the volume level accordingly.
• If the computer in use is equipped with HDMI port, the audio setting will be
changed and sound interruption or noise may occur when the HDMI cable is
connected or disconnected during USB Display. Restart USB Display for this
case.
• Image distortion or sound interruption may occur when
“LiveViewer” is
connected to LAN (wireless or wired) during USB Display. The above decline in
performance is noticeable especially when multiple computers are connected to
“LiveViewer”.
NOTE
USB Display(Mac computer) (continued)
106
Presentation tools
USB Display(Mac computer) (continued)
Menu
If you select “Display” on the Right-Click menu, the Floating menu shown in the
right will appear on your computer screen.
q Start capture button
The transmission to the projector is started
and the images will be displayed.
w Stop button
The image transmission is stopped.
e Hold button
The image on the projector’s screen is temporally frozen. The last image before
the button is clicked is remained on the screen. You can revise the image data
on your computer without showing it on the projector's screen.
r Option button
The Options window is displayed.
t Minimize button
The Floating menu is c
losed, and the icon reappears in the Windows notification
area.
y Exit button
The Floating menu is closed.
• If you click the Start capture button and/or Stop button repeatedly,
images may not be displayed on the screen.
NOTE
q
w
e
r
ty
107
Presentation tools
If you select the Option button on the Floating
menu, the Options window is displayed.
Optimize Performance
The “LiveViewer Lite for USB” captures
screenshots in JPEG data and sends them to
the projector. The “LiveViewer Lite for USB” has
two options that have different compression rate
of JPEG data.
Transmission speed
Speed takes priority over Image quality.
It makes JPEG compression rate higher.
The screen on the projector is rewritten quicker because the transferred
data is smaller, but the image quality is worse.
Image quality
Image quality takes priority over Speed.
It makes JPEG compression rate lower.
The screen on the projector is rewritten slower because the transferred
data is larger, but the image quality is better.
Keep PC resolution
If you remove the check mark from the [Keep PC resolution] box, the screen
resolution of
your computer will be switched as follows, and the display speed
may be faster.
CP-X2015WN, CP-X2515WN, CP-X3015WN, CP-X4015WN: 1024 x 768 (XGA)
CP-WX2515WN, CP-WX3015WN: 1280 x 800 (WXGA)
If your computer does not support the display resolution specified above, a
smaller resolution that is the largest among the resolutions that are supported by
the computer will be selected.
Sound
Turns the sound on/off. The image quality may deteriorate when you play back
audio data transferred together with the image data. To give priority to the image
quality, turn off the sound by selecting the checkbox.
About
The version information of the “LiveViewer Lite for USB”.
USB Display(Mac computer) (continued)
Options window
• When the resolution is changed, the arrangement of icons on
computer desktop screen may be changed.
• If one of the AUDIO IN ports is selected or is selected for USB TYPE B
in AUDIO SOURCE of the AUDIO menu
(
49)
, audio sound operation in the
Options window will be disabled.
NOTE
108
Maintenance
Maintenance
A lamp has finite product life. Using the lamp for long periods of time could cause
the pictures darker or the color tone poor. Note that each lamp has a different
lifetime, and some may burst or burn out soon after you start using them.
Preparation of a new lamp and early replacement are recommended. To prepare
a new lamp, make contact with your dealer and tell the lamp type number.
Replacing the lamp
Type number : DT01371
1.
Turn the projector off, and unplug the power cord.
Allow the projector to cool for at least 45 minutes.
2.
Prepare a new lamp. If the projector is mounted on
a ceiling, or if the lamp has broken, also ask the
dealer to replace the lamp.
3.
Loosen the screw (marked by arrow) of the lamp
cover and then slide and lift the lamp cover to the
side to remove it.
4.
Loosen the 3 screws (marked by arrow) of the lamp, and slowly pick up the
lamp by the handles. Never loosen any other screws.
5.
Insert the new lamp, and retighten firmly the 3
screws of the lamp that are loosened in the previous
process to lock it in place.
6.
While putting the interlocking parts of the lamp cover
and the projector together, slide the lamp cover back in
place. Then firmly fasten the screw of the lamp cover.
7.
Turn the projector on and reset the lamp time using
the LAMP TIME item in the OPTION menu.
In case of replacement by yourself, follow the
following procedure.
Replacing the lamp
Handles
(4)
Point at the LAMP TIME using the ▼/▲ button, then press the ► button. A dialog will appear.
(5)
Press the ► button to select “OK” on the dialog. It performs resetting the lamp time.
• Please reset the lamp time only when you have replaced the lamp,
for a suitable indication about the lamp.
NOTE
lamp cover
►Do not touch any inner space of the projector, while the lamp
is taken out.
CAUTION
4
3
6
(1) Press the MENU button to display a menu.
(2)
Point at the ADVANCED MENU in the menu using
the ▼/▲ button, then press the ► button.
(3)
Point at the OPTION in the left column of the menu
using the ▼/▲button, then press the ► button.
109
Maintenance
Lamp warning
Replacing the lamp (continued)
HIGH VOLTAGE
HIGH TEMPERATURE
HIGH PRESSURE
►
The projector uses a high-pressure mercury glass lamp. The lamp
can break with a loud bang, or burn out, if jolted or scratched, handled while hot, or
worn over time. Note that each lamp has a different lifetime, and some may burst or
burn out soon after you start using them. In addition, if the bulb bursts, it is possible
for shards of glass to fly into the lamp housing, and for gas containing mercury and
dust containing fine particles of glass to escape from the projector’s vent holes.
►About disposal of a lamp: This product contains a mercury lamp; do not put
it in a trash. Dispose of it in accordance with environmental laws.
• For lamp recycling, go to www.lamprecycle.org (in the US).
• For product disposal, consult your local government agency
or www.eiae.org (in the US) or www.epsc.ca (in Canada).
For more information, call your dealer.
WARNING
• If the lamp should break (it will make a loud bang when it does),
unplug the power cord from the outlet, and make sure to request a
replacement lamp from your local dealer. Note that shards of glass
could damage the projector’s internals, or cause injury during handling,
so please do not try to clean the projector or replace the lamp yourself.
•
If the lamp should break (it will make a loud bang when it does), ventilate the
room well, and make sure not to inhale the gas or fine particles that come out
from the projector's vent holes, and not to get them into your eyes or mouth.
• Before replacing the lamp, turn the projector off and unplug the power
cord, then wait at least 45 minutes for the lamp to cool sufficiently.
Handling the lamp while hot can cause burns, as well as damaging the lamp.
• Never unscrew except the appointed (marked by an arrow) screws.
• Do not open the lamp cover while the projector is suspended from
a ceiling. This is dangerous, since if the lamp’s bulb has broken, the
shards will fall out when the cover is opened. In addition, working in
high places is dangerous, so ask your local dealer to have the lamp
replaced even if the bulb is not broken.
• Do not use the projector with the lamp cover removed. At the lamp
replacing, make sure that the screws are screwed in firmly. Loose
screws could result in damage or injury.
• Use only the lamp of the specified type. Use of a lamp that does not
meet the lamp specifications for this model could cause a fire, damage or
shorten the life of this product.
• If the lamp breaks soon after the first time it is used, it is possible
that there are electrical problems elsewhere besides the lamp. If this
happens, consult your local dealer or a service representative.
•
Handle with care: jolting or scratching could cause the lamp bulb to burst during use.
•
Using the lamp for long periods of time, could cause it dark, not to light up or to burst.
When the pictures appear dark, or when the color tone is poor, please replace the
lamp as soon as possible. Do not use old (used) lamps; this is a cause of breakage.
Disconnect
the plug
from the
power
outlet
110
Maintenance
The air filter unit of this projector consists of a filter cover, two kinds of filters, and
a filter frame. The new double large filters system is expected to function longer.
However, please check and clean it periodically to keep ventilation needed for
normal operation of the projector.
When the indicators or a message prompts you to clean the air filter, comply with
it as soon as possible. Replace the filters when they are damaged or too soiled.
To prepare new filters, make contact with your dealer and tell the following type
number.
Cleaning and replacing the air filter
Type number : MU06481 (Filter set)
1.
Turn the projector off, and unplug the power cord.
Allow the projector to sufficiently cool down.
2.
Use a vacuum cleaner on and around the filter cover.
3.
While supporting the projector with one hand, use
your other hand to pull the filter cover forward in the
direction of the arrow.
4.
Use a vacuum cleaner for the filter vent of the
projector and the outer side of the filter unit.
5.
Take the filters out while holding the filter cover.
7.
Put the filters back into the filter cover.
Put the coarse meshed filter into a filter cover
first. Then put the fine meshed filter on the coarse
meshed one, turning its stitched side up.
8.
Put the filter unit back into the projector.
When you replace the lamp, please replace the air filter. An air filter of specified
type will come together with a replacement lamp for this projector.
(continued on next page)
Filter cover
Filter unit
Filter cover
Filter (fine meshed)
Filter (coarse meshed)
2
4
3
7
Stitched
side
6.
Use a vacuum cleaner on both sides of the filters.
When vacuuming up the fine meshed filter, hold it
so it will not be sucked in. If the filters are damaged
or heavily soiled, replace them with the new ones.
111
Maintenance
Cleaning and replacing the air filter (continued)
9.
Turn the projector on and reset the filter time using the FILTER TIME item in
the EASY MENU.
►Before taking care of the air filter, make sure the power cable
is not plugged in, then allow the projector to cool sufficiently. Taking care of the
air filter in a high temperature state of the projector could cause an electric shock,
a burn or malfunction to the projector.
►Use only the air filter of the specified type. Do not use the projector without the
air filter or the filter cover. It could result in a fire or malfunction to the projector.
►Clean the air filter periodically. If the air filter becomes clogged by dust or the
like, internal temperatures rise and could cause a fire, a burn or malfunction to
the projector.
WARNING
• Please replace the air filter when it is damaged or heavily soiled.
• When you replace the projection lamp, please replace the air filter. An air filter
of specified type will come together with a replacement lamp for this projector.
• Please reset the filter time only when you have cleaned or replaced the air
filter, for a suitable indication about the air filter.
• The projector may display the message such as “CHECK THE AIR FLOW” or
turn off the projector, to prevent the internal heat level rising.
NOTE
(1) Press the MENU button to display a menu.
(2) Point at the FILTER TIME using the ▼/▲ button, then press the ► button.
A dialog will appear.
(3) Press the ► button to select “OK” on the dialog. It performs resetting the
filter time.
112
Maintenance
Other care
In order to ensure the safe use of your projector, please have it cleaned and
inspected by your dealer about once every year.
1.
Turn the projector off, and unplug the power cord. Allow the projector to cool
sufficiently.
2.
After making sure that the projector is cool adequately, lightly wipe the lens
with a commercially available lens-cleaning wipe. Do not touch the lens
directly with your hand.
If the lens is flawed, soiled or fogged, it could cause deterioration of display
quality. Please take care of the lens, being cautious of handling.
►Before caring, make sure the power cord is not plugged in,
and then allow the projector to cool sufficiently. The care in a high temperature
state of the projector could cause a burn and/or malfunction to the projector.
►Never try to care for the inside of the projector personally. Doing is so
dangerous.
►Avoid wetting the projector or inserting liquids in the projector. It could result in
a fire, an electric shock, and/or malfunction to the projector.
• Do not put anything containing water, cleaners or chemicals near the projector.
• Do not use aerosols or sprays.
WARNING
►Please take right care of the projector according to the
following. Incorrect care could cause not only an injury but adverse influence
such as discoloration, peeling paint, etc.
►Do not use cleaners or chemicals other than those specified in this manual.
►Do not polish or wipe with hard objects.
NOTICE ►Do not directly touch the lens surface with hands.
CAUTION
Inside of the projector
Caring for the lens
1.
Turn the projector off, and unplug the power cord. Allow the projector to cool
sufficiently.
2.
After making sure that the projector is cool adequately, lightly wipe with gauze
or a soft cloth.
If the projector is extremely dirty, dip soft cloth in water or a neutral cleaner
diluted in water, and wipe lightly after wringing well. Then, wipe lightly with a
soft, dry cloth.
Incorrect care could have adverse influence such as discoloration, peeling paint,
etc.
Caring for the cabinet and remote control
113
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
If an abnormal operation should occur, stop using the projector immediately.
Otherwise if a problem occurs with the projector, the following checks and measures are
recommended before requesting repair.
If this does not resolve the problem, please contact your dealer or service company. They
will tell you what warranty condition is applied.
►
Never use the projector if abnormal operations such as smoke,
strange odor, excessive sound, damaged casing or elements or cables, penetration
of liquids or foreign matter, etc. should occur. In such cases, immediately disconnect
the power plug from the power outlet. After making sure that the smoke or odor has
stopped, contact to your dealer or service company.
WARNING
Related messages
When some message appears, check and cope with it according to the following table.
Although these messages will be automatically disappeared around several minutes, it will
be reappeared every time the power is turned on.
Message Description
There is no input signal.
Please confirm the signal input connection, and the status
of the signal source.
Projector is waiting for an image file.
Check the hardware connection, settings on the projector
and network-related settings.
The computer-Projector network connection might be
disconnected. Please re-connect them.
The horizontal or vertical frequency of the input signal is
not within the specified range.
Please confirm the specs for your projector or the signal
source specs.
An improper signal is input.
Please confirm the specs for your projector or the signal
source specs.
(continued on next page)
Troubleshooting
114
Message Description
The internal temperature is rising.
Please turn the power off, and allow the projector to cool
down at least 20 minutes. After having confirmed the
following items, please turn the power ON again.
• Is there blockage of the air passage aperture?
• Is the air filter dirty?
• Does the peripheral temperature exceed 35°C?
• If the projector is used at an altitude of about 1600 m (5250
feet) or higher, set ALTITUDE of the SERVICE item in the
OPTION menu to HIGH
(
59)
.
If the projector is used with a wrong setting, it may cause
damage to the projector itself or the parts inside.
A note of precaution when cleaning the air filter.
Please immediately turn the power off, and clean or change
the air filter referring to the Cleaning and replacing the
air filter section of this manual. After you have cleaned or
changed the air filter, please be sure to reset the filter timer
(
57, 110).
The button operation is not available.
Troubleshooting
Related messages (continued)
115
Troubleshooting
Regarding the indicator lamps
When operation of the LAMP, TEMP and POWER indicators differs from usual,
check and cope with it according to the following table.
POWER
indicator
LAMP
indicator
TEMP
indicator
Description
Lighting
In
Orange
Turned
off
Turned
off
The projector is in a standby state.
Please refer to the section “Power on/off”.
Blinking
In
Green
Turned
off
Turned
off
The projector is warming up.
Please wait.
Lighting
In
Green
Turned
off
Turned
off
The projector is in an on state.
Ordinary operations may be performed.
Blinking
In
Orange
Turned
off
Turned
off
The projector is cooling down.
Please wait.
Blinking
In
Red
(discre-
tionary)
(discre-
tionary)
The projector is cooling down. A certain error
has been detected.
Please wait until POWER indicator finishes blinking,
and then perform the proper measure using the item
descriptions below.
Blinking
In
Red
or
Lighting
In
Red
Lighting
In
Red
Turned
off
The lamp does not light, and there is a possibility
that interior portion has become heated.
Please turn the power off, and allow the projector to
cool down at least 20 minutes. After the projector has
sufficiently cooled down, please make confirmation of
the following items, and then turn the power on again.
• Is there blockage of the air passage aperture?
• Is the air filter dirty?
• Does the peripheral temperature exceed 35°C?
If the same indication is displayed after the remedy,
please change the lamp referring to the section
Replacing the lamp.
Blinking
In
Red
or
Lighting
In
Red
Blinking
In
Red
Turned
off
The lamp cover has not been properly fixed.
Please turn the power off, and allow the projector to
cool down at least 45 minutes. After the projector has
sufficiently cooled down, please make confirmation of
the attachment state of the lamp cover. After performing
any needed maintenance, turn the power on again.
If the same indication is displayed after the remedy,
please contact your dealer or service company.
(continued on next page)
116
Troubleshooting
Regarding the indicator lamps (continued)
POWER
indicator
LAMP
indicator
TEMP
indicator
Description
Blinking
In
Red
or
Lighting
In
Red
Turned
off
Blinking
In
Red
The cooling fan is not operating.
Please turn the power off, and allow the projector to
cool down at least 20 minutes. After the projector has
sufficiently cooled down, please make confirmation
that no foreign matter has become caught in the fan,
etc., and then turn the power on again.
If the same indication is displayed after the remedy,
please contact your dealer or service company.
Blinking
In
Red
or
Lighting
In
Red
Turned
off
Lighting
In
Red
There is a possibility that the interior portion
has become heated.
Please turn the power off, and allow the projector to
cool down at least 20 minutes. After the projector has
sufficiently cooled down, please make confirmation of
the following items, and then turn the power on again.
• Is there blockage of the air passage aperture?
• Is the air filter dirty?
• Does the peripheral temperature exceed 35°C?
• If the projector is used at an altitude of about 1600 m
(5250 feet) or higher, set ALTITUDE of the SERVICE
item in the OPTION menu to HIGH (
59). If the
projector is used with a wrong setting, it may cause
damage to the projector itself or the parts inside.
Lighting
In
Green
Simultaneous
blinking in
Red
It is time to clean the air filter.
Please immediately turn the power off, and clean or
change the air filter referring to the section Cleaning
and replacing the air filter. After cleaning or changing
the air filter, please be sure to reset the filter timer.
After the remedy, reset the power to ON.
Lighting
In
Green
Alternative
blinking in
Red
There is a possibility that the interior portion
has become overcooled.
Please use the unit within the usage temperature
parameters (5°C to 35°C).
After the treatment, reset the power to ON.
(continued on next page)
117
• When the interior portion has become overheated, for safety
purposes, the projector is automatically shut down, and the indicator lamps
may also be turned off. In such a case, disconnect the power cord, and wait at
least 45 minutes. After the projector has sufficiently cooled down, please make
confirmation of the attachment state of the lamp and lamp cover, and then turn
the power on again.
If the projector is used at an altitude of about 1600 m (5250 feet)
or higher, set ALTITUDE of the SERVICE item in the OPTION menu to HIGH
(
59).
Otherwise, set it to NORMAL.
NOTE
Troubleshooting
POWER
indicator
LAMP
indicator
TEMP
indicator
Description
Blinking In
Green for
approx. 3
seconds.
Turned
off
Turned
off
At least 1 Power ON schedule is saved to the
projector.
Please refer to Schedule Settings in the Network
Guide.
Lighting
In
Orange
Lighting
In
Red
Lighting
In
Red
Loading the saved data of CLONING on STANDBY
MODE.
Blinking
In
Orange
Blinking
In
Red
Blinking
In
Red
Loading the saved data of CLONING has failed on
STANDBY MODE.
Please refer to CLONING (
63 ~ 65).
Turned
off
Turned
off
Turned
off
Loading the saved data of CLONING has succeeded
on STANDBY MODE.
Regarding the indicator lamps (continued)
118
Troubleshooting
Resetting all settings
When it is hard to correct some wrong settings, the FACTORY RESET function of
SERVICE item in OPTION menu (
66) can reset all settings (except settings such
as LANGUAGE, LAMP TIME, FILTER TIME, FILTER MESSAGE, SECURITY and
NETWORK) to the factory default.
Be sure to set ALTITUDE after resetting all the
settings
(
59)
.
Phenomena that may be easy to be mistaken for machine defects
About the phenomenon confused with a machine defect, check and cope with it
according to the following table.
Phenomenon Cases not involving a machine defect
Reference
page
Power does
not come on.
The electrical power cord is not plugged in.
Correctly connect the power cord.
16
The main power source has been interrupted during
operation such as by a power outage (blackout), etc.
Please disconnect the power plug from the power outlet,
and allow the projector to cool down at least 10 minutes,
then turn the power on again.
16
Either there is no lamp and/or lamp cover, or either
of these has not been properly fixed.
Please turn the power off and disconnect the power
plug from the power outlet, and allow the projector to
cool down at least 45 minutes. After the projector has
sufficiently cooled down, please make confirmation of
the attachment state of the lamp and lamp cover, and
then turn the power on again.
108
Neither sounds
nor pictures are
outputted.
The signal cables are not correctly connected.
Correctly connect the connection cables.
12 ~ 15
Signal source does not correctly work.
Correctly set up the signal source device by referring to
the manual of the source device.
–
The input changeover settings are mismatched.
Select the input signal, and correct the settings.
24, 25
The BLANK function for pictures and the MUTE
function for sounds are working.
AV MUTE may be active.
Refer to the item “Sound does not come out” and “No
pictures are displayed” on the next page to turn off the
MUTE and BLANK functions.
23, 31
(continued on next page)
119
Troubleshooting
Phenomena that may be easy to be mistaken for machine defects (continued)
Phenomenon Cases not involving a machine defect
Reference
page
Sound does
not come out.
The signal cables are not correctly connected.
Correctly connect the audio cables.
12 ~ 15
The MUTE function is working.
Restore the sound pressing MUTE or VOLUME +/-
button on the remote control.
23
The volume is adjusted to an extremely low level.
Adjust the volume to a higher level using the menu
function or the remote control.
23, 49
The AUDIO SOURCE/SPEAKER setting is not correct.
Correctly set the AUDIO SOURCE/SPEAKER in AUDIO menu.
49
The Sound button (♪) or checkbox is disabled.
If you have selected USB TYPE A, turn the sound on
from the Thumbnail menu.
If you have selected USB TYPE B, remove the check
mark from the Sound checkbox in the Options window of
“LiveViewer Lite for USB”.
If you have selected LAN, remove the check mark from
the Sound checkbox in the Option menu of “LiveViewer”.
87, 103,
107
No pictures are
displayed.
The lens cover is attached.
Remove the lens cover.
4
The signal cables are not correctly connected.
Correctly connect the connection cables.
12 ~ 15
The brightness is adjusted to an extremely low level.
Adjust BRIGHTNESS to a higher level using the menu function.
36
The computer cannot detect the projector as a Plug-
and-Play monitor.
Make sure that the computer can detect a Plug-and-Play
monitor using another Plug-and-Play monitor.
11
The BLANK screen is displayed.
Press BLANK button on the remote control.
31
"Waiting for connection." remains displayed even
though the USB TYPE B port is selected.
Remove the USB cable and reconnect after a while.
12, 13
(continued on next page)
120
Phenomenon Cases not involving a machine defect
Reference
page
No pictures are
displayed.
(continued)
The projector does not recognize the USB storage
device inserted into USB TYPE A port.
Before removing the USB storage device, be sure to use
the REMOVE USB function on the thumbnail screen, which
appears when the USB TYPE A port is selected as the input
source.
13, 87
Video screen
display
freezes.
The FREEZE function is working.
Press FREEZE button to restore the screen to normal.
31
Colors have a
faded- out
appearance, or
Color tone is
poor.
Color settings are not correctly adjusted.
Perform picture adjustments by changing the COLOR
TEMP, COLOR, TINT and/or COLOR SPACE settings,
using the menu functions.
37, 42
COLOR SPACE setting is not suitable.
Change the COLOR SPACE setting to AUTO, RGB,
SMPTE240, REC709 or REC601.
42
Pictures
appear dark.
The brightness and/or contrast are adjusted to an
extremely low level.
Adjust BRIGHTNESS and/or CONTRAST settings to a
higher level using the menu function.
36
The projector is operating in Eco mode.
Set ECO MODE to NORMAL, and set AUTO ECO
MODE to OFF, in the SETUP menu.
47
The lamp is approaching the end of its product
lifetime.
Replace the lamp.
108, 109
Pictures
appear blurry.
Either the focus and/or horizontal phase settings are
not properly adjusted.
Adjust the focus using the focus ring, and/or H PHASE
using the menu function.
27, 41
The lens is dirty or misty.
Clean the lens referring to the section Caring for the
lens.
112
(continued on next page)
Troubleshooting
Phenomena that may be easy to be mistaken for machine defects (continued)
121
Phenomenon Cases not involving a machine defect
Reference
page
Some kind
of image
degradation
such as
flickering or
stripes appear
on screen.
When the projector is operating in Eco mode,
flickering may appear on screen.
Set ECO MODE to NORMAL, and set AUTO ECO
MODE to OFF, in the SETUP menu.
47
The OVER SCAN ratio is too big.
Adjust OVER SCAN in the IMAGE menu smaller.
40
Excessive VIDEO NR.
Change the setting of VIDEO NR in the INPUT menu.
42
The FRAME LOCK function cannot work on the
current input signal.
Set FRAME LOCK in the INPUT menu to OFF.
44
The sound
or image
is unstable
or is output
intermittently.
When LAN, USB TYPE A or USB TYPE B port is
selected, some ports of the output may be missing
due to signal processing delay.
Change the signal or use another port.
24, 49
The computer
connected to
the USB TYPE
B port of the
projector does
not start up.
The computer cannot start up in the current
hardware configuration.
Disconnect the USB cable from the computer, then
reconnect it after starting up the computer.
13
RS-232C does
not work.
The SAVING function is working.
Select NORMAL for STANDBY MODE item in the SETUP
menu.
48
The COMMUNICATION TYPE for the CONTROL port
is set to NETWORK BRIDGE.
Select OFF for COMMUNICATION TYPE item in the
OPTION - SERVICE - COMMUNICATION menu.
62
NETWORK
BRIDGE
function does
not work
The NETWORK BRIDGE function is turned off.
Select NETWORK BRIDGE for COMMUNICATION TYPE
item in the OPTION - SERVICE - COMMUNICATION menu.
62
Network does
not work
The SAVING function is working.
Select NORMAL for STANDBY MODE item in the SETUP
menu.
48
The same network address is set for both wireless
and wired LAN.
Change the network address setting for wireless or wired LAN.
67, 72
(continued on next page)
Troubleshooting
Phenomena that may be easy to be mistaken for machine defects (continued)
122
• Although bright spots or dark spots may appear on the screen, this
is a unique characteristic of liquid crystal displays, and it does not constitute or
imply a machine defect.
NOTE
Troubleshooting
Phenomena that may be easy to be mistaken for machine defects (continued)
Phenomenon Cases not involving a machine defect
Reference
page
Schedule
function does
not work
The SAVING function is working.
Select NORMAL for STANDBY MODE item in the SETUP
menu.
48
The internal clock has been reset.
Once you turn off the projector in the SAVING mode or the
AC power, the current date and time setting is reset.
Check the DATE AND TIME setting for WIRELESS
SETUP or WIRED SETUP in the NETWORK menu.
69, 73
When the
projector is
connected to
wired LAN, it
powers off and
on as described
below.
Powers off
POWER indicator
blinks in orange a
few times
Goes into
standby mode
Disconnect the LAN cable and check that the projector
is working properly.
If this phenomenon occurs after connecting to the network,
there may be a loop between two Ethernet switching hubs
within the network, as explained below.
-
There are two or more Ethernet switching hubs in a network.
- Two of the hubs are doubly connected by LAN cables.
-
This double connection forms a loop between the two hubs.
Such a loop may have an adverse effect on the projector
as well as the other network devices.
Check the network connection and remove the loop by
disconnecting the LAN cables such that there is only one
connecting cable between two hubs.
–
Unable to save
the CLONING
data
.
USB memory is out of memory.
Please delete unnecessary files to free up memory.
At least
1MB of memory is needed.
USB memory is write-protected.
Unlock the USB memory.
63 ~ 65
Unable to load
the CLONING
saved data
.
Unable to find the saved data from USB memory.
Execute SAVE then LOAD by going through the procedure.
File name of USB memory doesn't match.
Please assign "pj_data.bin" for setting data, and for
MyScreen "pj_logo.bmp" or "pj_logo.gif".
STANDBY mode is set to SAVING.
Switch the SAVING to NORMAL in STANDBY MODE
under SET UP menu beforehand to load the CLONING
data using control panel on the projector while the lamp
is in standby state.
123
Specifications
Specifications
Please see the Specifications in the User’s Manual (concise) which is a book.
End User License Agreement for the Projector Software
• Software in the projector consists of the plural number of independent software
modules and there exist our copyright or/and third party copyrights for each of
such software modules.
• Be sure to read “End User License Agreement for the Projector Software” which
is separated document.
1
Projector
User's Manual (detailed)
Network Guide
Thank you for purchasing this product.
This manual is intended to explain only the network function. For proper use of this
product, please refer to this manual and the other manuals for this product.
Features
This projector has the network function that brings you the following main features.
►Before using this product, be sure to read all manuals for this
product. After reading them, store them in a safe place for future reference.
WARNING
• The information in this manual is subject to change without notice.
• The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in
this manual.
• The reproduction, transfer or copy of all or any part of this document is not
permitted without express written consent.
NOTE
Trademark acknowledgment
Network Presentation : allows the projector to project computer images transmitted
through a network. (
15)
Web Control : allows you to monitor and control the projector through a network from a
computer. (
16)
My Image : allows the projector to store up to four still images and project them. (
50)
Messenger : allows the projector to display text sent from a computer through a network.
(
51)
Network Bridge : allows you to control an external device through the projector from a
computer. (
52)
• Microsoft
®
, Internet Explorer
®
, Windows
®
, Windows Vista
®
and Aero
®
are registered
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries.
• Adobe
®
and Flash
®
are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
• Pentium
®
is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation.
• JavaScript
®
is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc.
• HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or
registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries.
• Crestron
®
, Crestron e-Control
®
, e-Control
®
, Crestron RoomView
®
and RoomView
TM
are
trademarks or registered trademarks of Crestron Electronics, Inc. in
the United States and other countries.
• Trademark PJLink is a trademark applied for trademark rights in
Japan, the United States of America and other countries and areas.
All other trademarks are the properties of their respective owners.
CP-X2015WN/CP-X2515WN/CP-X3015WN/
CP-X4015WN/CP-WX2515WN/CP-WX3015WN
2
Contents
Contents
Caution .......................................................................................... 4
1. Connection to the network ...................................................... 5
1.1 System requirements ................................................................................. 5
1.1.1 Required equipment preparation ..................................................................................... 5
1.1.2 Hardware and software requirement for computer .......................................................... 5
1.2 Manual network connection setting - Wired LAN -. ..................................... 7
1.2.1 Equipments connection .................................................................................................... 7
1.2.2 Network settings .............................................................................................................. 7
1.2.3 “Internet Option” setting ................................................................................................. 10
1.3 Manual network connection setting - Wireless LAN - ............................... 11
1.3.1 Preparation for wireless LAN connection ....................................................................... 11
1.3.2 Wireless LAN connection set up .................................................................................... 12
2. Network Presentation ............................................................. 15
3. Web Control ............................................................................ 16
3.1 Projector Web Control ............................................................................... 17
3.1.1 Logon ............................................................................................................................. 17
3.1.2 Network Information ....................................................................................................... 18
3.1.3 Network Settings ............................................................................................................ 19
3.1.4 Port Settings .................................................................................................................. 22
3.1.5 Mail Settings .................................................................................................................. 24
3.1.6 Alert Settings .................................................................................................................. 25
3.1.7 Schedule Settings .......................................................................................................... 27
3.1.8 Date/Time Settings ......................................................................................................... 30
3.1.9 Security Settings ............................................................................................................ 32
3.1.10 Projector Control .......................................................................................................... 33
3.1.11 Remote Control ............................................................................................................ 39
3.1.12 Projector Status ........................................................................................................... 40
3.1.13 Network Restart ........................................................................................................... 41
3.2 Crestron e-Control
®
.................................................................................. 42
3.2.1 Main window .................................................................................................................... 43
3.2.2 Tools window ................................................................................................................... 45
3.2.3 Info window ..................................................................................................................... 47
3.2.4 Help Desk window ........................................................................................................... 48
3.2.5 Emergency Alert .............................................................................................................. 49
4. My Image Function ................................................................. 50
5. Messenger Function ............................................................... 51
3
Contents
6. Network Bridge Function ....................................................... 52
6.1 Connecting devices .................................................................................. 52
6.2 Communication setup ............................................................................... 53
6.3 Communication port ................................................................................. 53
6.4 Transmission method ............................................................................... 54
6.4.1 HALF-DUPLEX .............................................................................................................. 54
6.4.2 FULL-DUPLEX ............................................................................................................... 55
7. Other Functions ...................................................................... 56
7.1 E-mail Alerts ............................................................................................. 56
7.2 Projector Management using SNMP ........................................................ 58
7.3 Event Scheduling ..................................................................................... 59
7.4 Command Control via the Network .......................................................... 62
7.5 Crestron RoomView
®
................................................................................. 67
8. Troubleshooting ..................................................................... 68
9. Specifications ......................................................................... 69
10. Warranty and after-sales service ........................................ 70
4
Caution
Caution
To use the wireless network function of this projector, the designated USB wire-
less adapter that is sold as an option is required. For precautions according to the
standards and laws, refer to the documents that come with the adapter.
[Restriction on plugging and unplugging the USB wireless adapter]
Before you insert or pull out the USB wireless adapter from the projector, turn off
the power of the projector and pull out the power cord’s plug from the outlet. Do
not touch the USB wireless adapter that is connected to the projector while the
projector is receiving AC power.
Do not use any extension cable or device when connecting the adapter to the projector.
[Security precautions when using wireless LAN]
It is recommended that security settings, such as SSID and ENCRYPTION, are
specified when using wireless LAN communication. If the security settings are not
specified, the contents may be intercepted or it may cause unauthorized access
to the system. For details on wireless LAN security settings, refer to 3.1 Projector
Web Control or
NETWORK menu in the Operating Guide.
►The optional IEEE802.11b/g/n USB wireless adapter uses
the 2.4GHz radio frequency band. You do not need a radio license to use the
adapter, but you should be aware of the following:
•
DO NOT USE NEAR THE FOLLOWING!
• Microwave ovens
• Industrial, scientific or medical devices
• Designated low power radio stations
• Premises radio stations
Using the USB wireless adapter near the above may cause radio interference,
which would result in a decrease in transmission speed or interruption, and
even lead to malfunctioning of devices such as pacemakers.
•
Depending on the location where the USB wireless adapter is used, radio wave
interference may occur, which may result in a decrease in transmission speed
or interruption in communication.In particular, please be aware that using the
USB wireless adapter at locations where there is reinforced steel, other types
of metals or concrete is likely to cause radio wave interference.
• Available Channels
The USB wireless adapter uses the 2.4GHz radio frequency band, but
depending on the country or region you are in, the channels that you can use
might be limited. Please consult your dealer for information on the usable
channels.
• Bringing the optional USB wireless adapter out of the country or region you
reside in and using it there could lead to a violation of the radio laws of that
country or region.
CAUTION
5
1. Connection to the network
1.1 System requirements
1. Connection to the network
The following equipments are required to connect the projector to your computer
through the network.
■ Common The projector: 1 unit, Computer : minimum 1 set
■ Depending on how you want to connect
1) For the wired connection *1
LAN cable (CAT-5 or greater): 1 piece
2) For the wireless connection *2
- Projector side
IEEE802.11b/g/n USB wireless adapter (option : USB-WL-11N) : 1 unit
- Computer side
IEEE802.11 b/g/n wireless LAN equipment: 1 unit for each *3
To connect your computer to the projector and use the network function of the
projector, your computer needs to meet the following requirements.
1.1.1 Required equipment preparation
1.1.2 Hardware and software requirement for computer
OS: One of the following.
Windows
®
XP Home Edition /Professional Edition
Windows Vista
®
Home Basic /Home Premium /Business /Ultimate /Enterprise
(
Service Pack 1 or later)
Windows
®
7 Starter /Home Basic /Home Premium /Professional /Ultimate /
Enterprise
CPU: Pentium 4 (2.8 GHz or higher)
Graphic card: 16 bit, XGA or higher
* When using the “LiveViewer” it is recommended that the display resolution of
your computer is set to 1024 x 768.
Memory: 512 MB or higher
Hard disk space: 100 MB or higher
Web browser: Internet Explorer
®
6.0 or higher
CD-ROM drive
*1: The system for using the network function of the projector requires
communication environment conforming 100Base-TX or 10Base-T.
*2: An access point is required when the wireless LAN connection is used as
Infrastructure mode.
*3: Depending on the type of wireless network device and computer you are using,
the projector may not be able to communicate properly with your computer,
even if the computer is equipped with a built-in wireless LAN function.
To eliminate communication problems, please use a Wi-Fi certified wireless
network device.
6
1. Connection to the network
1.1 System requirements (continued)
• The network communication control is disabled while the projector is
in standby mode if the STANDBY MODE item is set to SAVING. Please connect
the network communication to the projector after setting the STANDBY MODE
to NORMAL. (
SETUP menu in the Operating Guide)
• You can get the latest version of the applications for the network functions of
the projector and the latest information for this product from the Hitachi website.
(http://www.hitachi-america.us/digitalmedia or http://www.hitachidigitalmedia.
com).
NOTE
7
1. Connection to the network
1.2 Manual network connection setting - Wired LAN -
This section explains how to set it up manually.
1.2.1 Equipments connection
Connect the projector and a computer with a LAN cable.
* Before connecting with an existing network, contact the network administrator.
Next, check the following computer settings.
1.2.2 Network settings
This is an explanation of network connection settings for Windows
®
7.
1) Log on to Windows
®
7 as administrator authority. Administrator authority is the
account, which can access to all functions.
2) Open “Control Panel” from “Start” menu.
3) Open “View network status and tasks” in “Network and Internet”.
With the icons in the "Control Panel" window displayed, click "Network and
Sharing Center".
4) Click "Change adapter settings" in the menu
on the left side of the "Network and Sharing
Center" window.
(continued on next page)
8
1. Connection to the network
1.2 Manual network connection setting - Wired LAN - (continued)
7) Select "Use the following IP address" and configure the IP
address, Subnet mask and Default gateway for the computer
accordingly. If a DHCP server exists in the network, you
can select "Obtain an IP address automatically" and the IP
address will be assigned automatically.
After setting is complete, click [OK] to close the window.
5) Right-click "Local Area Connection" to open the menu,
and select "Properties".
6) Select "Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)" and click
[Properties].
(continued on next page)
9
1. Connection to the network
1.2 Manual network connection setting - Wired LAN - (continued)
[About IP address]
■ Setting manually
The Network address portion of the IP address setting on your computer must
be the same as the setting on the projector. Also, the entire IP address on the
computer must not overlap with that of the other devices on the same network,
including the projector.
The projector’s settings are as follows.
IP address: 192.168.1.254
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
(Network address: 192.168.1 in this case)
Therefore, specify the computer’s IP address as follows.
IP address: 192.168.1.xxx (xxx shows decimal number.)
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
(Network address: 192.168.1 in this case)
For example
Select from 1 to 254 for “xxx” not duplicating with any other equipments.
In this case, since the IP address of the projector is “192.168.1.254”, specify a
setting between 1 to 253 for the computer.
• “0.0.0.0” cannot be set to the IP address.
• The projector’s IP address can be changed by using the configuration utility
via a web browser. (
21)
• If the projector and the computer exist in the same network (i.e., same
network address), you can leave the default gateway field blank.
• When the projector and the computer exist in different networks, the default
gateway must be set. Consult to the network administrator in detail.
NOTE
■ Setting automatically
When a DHCP server exists in the connected network, it is possible to assign an
IP address to the projector and computer automatically.
* DHCP is abbreviation for “Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol” and has the
function to provide necessary setting for network like IP address from server to
client. A server that has DHCP function is called DHCP server.
(continued on next page)
10
1. Connection to the network
1.2 Manual network connection setting - Wired LAN - (continued)
2) Click “Connections” tab and then click [LAN settings] button
to open “Local Area Network (LAN) Settings”.
1.2.3 “Internet Option” setting
1) Click “Internet Options” in “Network and
Sharing Center” window to open “Internet
Properties” window.
3) Uncheck all boxes in “Local Area Network (LAN) Settings”
window.
After setting is complete, click [OK] to close the window.
11
1. Connection to the network
1.3
Manual network connection setting
-
Wireless LAN -
Using the designated USB wireless adapter (option) on the projector enables the
projector and computer to communicate in both the Ad-Hoc and Infrastructure
modes.
This section is intended to explain how to set up wireless LAN connection
manually.
1.3.1 Preparation for wireless LAN connection
* Ad-Hoc is one of the wireless LAN communication methods without having
access point to communicate.
* Infrastructure is one of the wireless LAN communication methods with having
access point to communicate. If certain quantities of equipments are used, this
mode is efficient.
If communicating with existing network, consult to your network administrator.
Fig. 1.3.1.a Without an access point communication (Ad-Hoc)
Fig. 1.3.1.b With an access point communication (Infrastructure)
First, insert the USB wireless adapter into the USB TYPE A port.
(
Connecting with your devices in the Operating Guide)
Then, set up the computer for wireless communication.
When the computer comes with a built-in IEEE802.11b/g/n wireless LAN device,
enable it and disable other network connections. If a wireless LAN device is not
built into the computer, connect an IEEE802.11b/g/n wireless LAN device and
install the device driver. For details, refer to the user's guide for the computer and
wireless LAN device.
12
1. Connection to the network
1.3.2 Wireless LAN connection set up
Using wireless LAN utility for Windows
®
7 standard.
Wireless LAN initial settings for the projector is as follows.
1.3 Manual network connection setting - Wireless LAN - (continued)
Connection Control : Ad-Hoc
SSID : wireless
Channel : 1
Encryption rating : None
IP address : 192.168.10.254
* You can change these settings via a web browser on your computer or from the
menu of the projector. Refer to the item 3.1.3 Network Settings (
20) or
NETWORK menu in the Operating Guide.
1) Select "Change adapter settings" from the
menu on the left side of the "Network and
Sharing Center" window.
2) Right-click "Wireless Network Connection" to open the
menu, and select "Properties".
(continued on next page)
3) Select "Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)" and click
[Properties].
13
1. Connection to the network
1.3 Manual network connection setting - Wireless LAN - (continued)
4) Select "Use the following IP address" and configure the IP
address, Subnet mask and Default gateway for the computer
accordingly.
After setting is complete, click [OK] to close the window.
(continued on next page)
[About IP address]
The Network address portion of the IP address setting on your computer must
be the same as the setting on the projector. Also, the entire IP address on the
computer must not overlap with that of the other devices on the same network,
including the projector.
The projector’s settings are as follows.
IP address: 192.168.10.254
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
(Network address: 192.168.10 in this case)
Therefore, specify the computer’s IP address as follows.
IP address: 192.168.10.xxx (xxx shows decimal number.)
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
(Network address: 192.168.10 in this case)
For example
Select from 1 to 254 for “xxx” not duplicating with any other equipments.
In this case, since the IP address of the projector is “192.168.10.254”, specify
a setting between 1 to 253 for the computer.
• “0.0.0.0” cannot be set to the IP address.
• The projector’s IP address can be changed by using the configuration utility
via a web browser. (
20)
• If the projector and the computer exist in the same network (i.e., same
network address), you can leave the default gateway field blank.
• When the projector and the computer exist in different networks, the default
gateway must be set.
NOTE
14
1. Connection to the network
1.3 Manual network connection setting - Wireless LAN - (continued)
6) From the connectable wireless networks, select the SSID of the
projector (set to "wireless" by default), and click [Connect]. If
you have enabled encryption, a window asking for input of the
encryption key will be displayed. Input the preset key.
5) Right-click "Wireless Network Connection" to open
the menu, and select "Connect / Disconnect".
7) After connection is established, "Connected" will appear to the
right of SSID.
15
2. Network Presentation
The projector can display or play back the computer screen images and audio
data that are transmitted through the network. This Network Presentation feature
helps you to smoothly make your presentations and conduct conferences.
2. Network Presentation
To use Network Presentation, an exclusive application, "LiveViewer" is required.
It can be installed from the bundled application CD. You can also download the
latest version and relevant information from the Hitachi website (http://www.
hitachi-america.us/digitalmedia or http://www.hitachidigitalmedia.com). For details
of Network Presentation and instructions to install the "LiveViewer", refer to the
manual for "LiveViewer".
Wired LAN
Wireless LAN
"LiveViewer" function use depends on the model you are using. If you want to use
the latest downloaded "LiveViewer", please refer for the appropriate group item in
the "LiveViewer" User's Manual.
This model will be in the Group of F
.
16
You can adjust or control the projector via a network from a web browser on a
computer that is connected to the same network.
• Internet Explorer
®
6.0 or later is required.
• If JavaScript
®
is disabled in your web browser configuration, you must enable
JavaScript
®
in order to use the projector web pages properly. See the Help files
for your web browser for details on how to enable JavaScript
®
.
• It is recommended that all web browser updates are installed.
• If data is transferred via wireless and wired LAN at the same time, the
projector may not be able to process the data correctly.
NOTE
3. Web Control
3. Web Control
Refer to the following for configuring or controlling the projector via a web browser.
Make sure that your computer and the projector is connected via network, and
then start Web browser.
Enter the projector's IP address into URL input box of the Web browser as the
example below, and then press the Enter key or
button.
Example: If the IP address of the projector is set to 192.168.1.10:
Enter “http://192.168.1.10/” into the address bar of the web browser
and press the Enter key or click
button.
If a correct URL is input, and the
projector and your computer are
connected to the same network
correctly, the selection window as
shown on the right will be displayed.
You can choose to use Projector Web
Control or Crestron e-Control
®
as a tool
for controlling the projector. Click one of
them.
For more details, refer to 3.1 Projector
Web Control (
17) or 3.2 Crestron
e-Control
®
(42).
• If Crestron e-Control in the Network Settings (21) is set to
Disable, the selection window above does not appear, but the Logon window of
the Projector Web Control is displayed.
• Crestron e-Control
®
is created using Flash
®
. You need to install Adobe
®
Flash
®
Player on your computer to use Crestron e-Control
®
.
NOTE
17
3. Web Control
3.1.1 Logon
To use the Projector Web Control function, you need
to logon with your user name and password.
• The language used on the Projector Web Control screen is the
same as that of the OSD on the projector. If you want to change it, you need
to change the OSD language on the projector. (
SCREEN menu in the
Operating Guide)
NOTE
Below are the factory default settings for user
name and password.
User name Password
Administrator <blank>
Enter your user name and password, and then click the [OK].
If you logon successfully, the screen below will be displayed.
Main menu
Click the desired operation or configuration item on the main menu.
3.1 Projector Web Control
Logon window
18
3.1.2 Network Information
Displays the projector’s current network
configuration settings.
Item Description
Common Information
Displays information common to both wireless and wired
LAN.
Projector Name Displays the projector name settings.
Wireless Information Displays the current settings of wireless LAN.
Mode Displays the mode of wireless LAN communication.
DHCP Displays the DHCP setting.
IP Address Displays the IP address.
Subnet Mask Displays the subnet mask.
Default Gateway Displays the default gateway.
DNS Server Address Displays the DNS server address.
MAC Address Displays the MAC address.
Ch Displays the channel used for wireless LAN.
Encryption Displays the data encryption setting.
SSID Displays the SSID used by the projector.
Speed Displays the current wireless LAN transmission speed.
Wired Information Displays the current wired LAN settings.
DHCP Displays the DHCP setting.
IP Address Displays the IP address.
Subnet Mask Displays the subnet mask.
Default Gateway Displays the default gateway.
DNS Server Address Displays the DNS server address.
MAC Address Displays the MAC address.
3. Web Control
3.1 Projector Web Control (continued)
19
3.1.3 Network Settings
Displays and configures network settings.
Item Description
Common Setup
Displays information common to both wireless and wired LAN.
Projector Name
Configures the name of the projector.
The length of the Projector Name can be up to 64
alphanumeric characters. Only alphabets, numbers and
following symbols can be used.
!"#$%&'()*+,-./:;<=>?@[\]^_`{|}~ and space.
Particular projector name is pre-assigned by default.
sysLocation (SNMP)
Configures the location to be referred to when using SNMP.
The length of the sysLocation can be up to 255 alphanumeric
characters. Only numbers ‘0-9’ and alphabet ‘a-z’, ‘A-Z’ can
be used.
sysContact (SNMP)
Configures the contact information to be referred to when
using SNMP.
The length of the sysContact can be up to 255 alphanumeric
characters. Only numbers ‘0-9’ and alphabet ‘a-z’, ‘A-Z’ can
be used.
AMX D.D.
(AMX Device
Discovery)
Configures the AMX Device Discovery setting to detect the
projector from the controllers of AMX connected to the same
network. For the details of AMX Device Discovery, visit the
AMX web site.
URL: http://www.amx.com (as of Dec. 2011)
(continued on next page)
3. Web Control
3.1 Projector Web Control (continued)
20
3.1 Projector Web Control - Network Settings (continued)
3. Web Control
Item Description
Wireless Setup Configures the wireless LAN settings.
Mode Select
"
AD-HOC" or
"
Infrastructure".
IP Configuration Configures network settings.
DHCP ON Enables DHCP.
DHCP OFF Disables DHCP.
IP Address Configures the IP address when DHCP is disabled.
Subnet Mask Configures the subnet mask when DHCP is disabled.
Default
Gateway
Configures the default gateway when DHCP is disabled.
DNS Server Address Configures the DNS server address.
Ch
Select a channel from “1” to “11” to use in the AD-HOC mode.
Encryption Select data encryption method.
WEP Key
Input the WEP key.
Either ASCII characters or hexadecimal numbers can be
used during WEP key input. However, you cannot use a
combination of both.The length of the key is defined as
follows according to the WEP and character formats.
Encryption ASCII characters HEX numbers
WEP 64bit 5 characters 10 characters
WEP 128bit 13 characters 26 characters
WPA Passphrase
Input WPA Passphrase.
Available number of input characters is 8 to 63. Only
alphabets, numbers and following symbols can be used.
!"#$%&'()*+,-./:;<=>?@ [\]^_`{|}~ and space
SSID
Select an SSID from the list.
If you require to set your unique SSID, select [Custom], then
set your own SSID following the rules below.
Maximum number of input characters is 32.
Only alphabets, numbers and following symbols can be used.
!"#$%&'()*+,-./:;<=>?@[\]^_`{|}~ and space.
(continued on next page)
• Depending on the country where you are the
channels may vary. In addition, depending on the country
or region where you are, you may be required to use a
wireless network card that confirm to the standards in the
respective country or region.
NOTE
21
Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.
3.1 Projector Web Control - Network Settings (continued)
Item Description
Wired Setup Configures the wired LAN settings.
IP Configuration Configures network settings.
DHCP ON Enables DHCP.
DHCP OFF Disables DHCP.
IP Address Configures the IP address when DHCP is disabled.
Subnet Mask Configures the subnet mask when DHCP is disabled.
Default
Gateway
Configures the default gateway when DHCP is disabled.
DNS Server Address Configures the DNS server address.
Other Setup Configures other network settings.
Crestron e-Control
Set whether to or not to use Crestron e-Control
®
.
If you choose Disable, the Logon window of Projector Web
Control will be displayed at first, but the selection window
will not appear.
3. Web Control
• The new configuration settings are activated after restarting the
network connection. When the configuration settings are changed, you must
restart the network connection. You can restart the network connection by
clicking [Network Restart] on the main menu (
41).
• If you connect the projector to an existing network, consult a network
administrator before setting server addresses.
• The WEP Key, WPA passphrase and SSID settings will not be set if the invalid
characters are used.
• The projector does not allow both wireless and wired LAN to be connected to
the same network. Do not set the same network address for both wireless and
wired LAN.
NOTE
22
3.1.4 Port Settings
Displays and configures communication port
settings.
Item Description
Network Control Port1
(Port:23)
Configures command control port 1 (Port:23).
Port open Click the [Enable] check box to use port 23.
Authentication
Click the [Enable] check box when authentication is required
for this port.
Network Control Port2
(Port:9715)
Configures command control port 2 (Port:9715).
Port open Click the [Enable] check box to use port 9715.
Authentication
Click the [Enable] check box when authentication is required
for this port.
PJLink
TM
Port
(Port:4352)
Configures the PJLink
TM
port (Port:4352).
Port open Click the [Enable] check box to use port 4352.
Authentication
Click the [Enable] check box when authentication is required
for this port.
My Image Port
(Port:9716)
Configures the My Image Port (Port:9716).
Port open Click the [Enable] check box to use port 9716.
Authentication
Click the [Enable] check box when authentication is required
for this port.
Messenger Port
(Port:9719)
Configures the Messenger Port (Port:9719).
Port open Click the [Enable] check box to use port 9719.
Authentication
Click the [Enable] check box when authentication is required
for this port.
(continued on next page)
3. Web Control
3.1 Projector Web Control (continued)
23
Item Description
SNMP Port Configures the SNMP port.
Port open Click the [Enable] check box to use SNMP.
Trap address
Configures the destination of the SNMP Trap in IP format.
• The address allows not only IP address but also domain
name if the valid DNS server is setup in the Network
Settings. The maximum length of host or domain name is up
to 255 characters.
Download MIB file Downloads a MIB file from the projector.
Network Bridge Port Configures the Bridge port number.
Port Number
Input the port number.
Except for 41794, 9715, 9716, 9719, 9720, 5900, 5500, 4352
between 1024 and 65535 can be set up. It is set to 9717 as
the default setting.
Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.
3.1 Projector Web Control - Port Settings (continued)
• The new configuration settings are activated after restarting the
network connection. When the configuration settings are changed, you must
restart the network connection. You can restart the network connection by
clicking the [Network Restart] on the main menu(
41).
NOTE
3. Web Control
24
3.1.5 Mail Settings
Displays and configures e-mail addressing
settings.
Item Description
Send Mail
Click the [Enable] check box to use the e-mail function.
Configure the conditions for sending e-mail under the Alert
Settings.
SMTP Server Address
Configures the address of the mail server in IP format.
• The address allows not only IP address but also domain
name if the valid DNS server is setup in the Network
Settings. The maximum length of host or domain name is up
to 255 characters.
Sender E-mail address
Configures the sender e-mail address.
The length of the sender e-mail address can be up to 255
alphanumeric characters.
Recipient E-mail address
Configures the e-mail address of up to five recipients. You
can also specify the [TO] or [CC] for each address. The
length of the recipient e-mail address can be up to 255
alphanumeric characters.
Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.
• You can confirm whether the mail settings work correctly using the
[Send Test Mail] button. Please enable Send mail setting before clicking the
[Send Test Mail].
• If you connect the projector to an existing network, consult a network
administrator before setting server addresses.
NOTE
3. Web Control
3.1 Projector Web Control (continued)
25
3.1.6 Alert Settings
Displays and configures failure & alert settings.
Item Description
Cover Error The lamp cover has not been properly fixed.
Fan Error The cooling fan is not operating.
Lamp Error
The lamp does not light, and there is a possibility that interior
portion has become heated.
Temp Error
There is a possibility that the interior portion has become
heated.
Air Flow Error The internal temperature is rising.
Cold Error
There is a possibility that the interior portion has become
overcooled.
Filter Error Filter time over.
Other Error
Other error.
If displaying this error, please contact your dealer.
Schedule Execution
Error
Schedule Execution error. (
27
)
Lamp Time Alarm Lamp time over Alarm Time setting.
Filter Time Alarm Filter time over Alarm Time setting.
Transition Detector
Alarm
Transition Detector Alarm. (
SECURITY menu in the
Operating Guide)
Cold Start
When the projector is supplied with the power, it works as
below.
•
If the STANDBY MODE is set to the NORMAL:the projector's
power status changes from “OFF” to “Standby state”.
•
If the STANDBY MODE is set to the SAVING:the projector's power
status changes from “Standby state” to “ON (lamp is turned on)”.
(
SETUP menu in the Operating Guide)
Authentication Failure
The SNMP access is detected from the invalid SNMP community.
Refer to
Troubleshooting in the Operating Guide for further detailed
explanation of Error except Other Error and Schedule Execution Error.
3. Web Control
3.1 Projector Web Control (continued)
26
The Alert Items are shown below.
Item Description
Alarm Time
Configures the time to alert.
(Only Lamp Time Alarm and Filter Time Alarm.)
SNMP Trap Click the [Enable] check box to enable SNMP Trap alerts.
Send Mail
Click the [Enable] check box to enable e-mail alerts.
(Except Cold Start and Authentication Failure.)
Mail Subject
Configures the subject line of the e-mail to be sent.
The length of the subject line can be up to 100 alphanumeric
characters.
(Except Cold Start and Authentication Failure.)
Mail Text
Configures the text of the e-mail to be sent.
The length of the text can be up to 1024 alphanumeric
characters, but if you are using some of special characters
below the length may be shorter.
Special characters " ' : & , % \
and space
(Except Cold Start and Authentication Failure.)
Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.
• The trigger of Filter Error e-mail is depending on the FILTER
MESSAGE setting in the SERVICE item of the OPTION menu which defines
the period until the filter message is displayed on the projector screen. An
e-mail will be sent when the usage time of the filter exceeds the time limit that is
set. No notification e-mail will be sent if the FILTER MESSAGE is set to TURN
OFF. (
OPTION menu in the Operating Guide)
• Lamp Time Alarm is defined as a threshold for e-mail notification (reminder)
of the lamp time. When the lamp hour exceeds this threshold that is configured
in the Web page, the e-mail will be sent out.
• Filter Time Alarm is defined as a threshold for e-mail notification (reminder)
of the filter time. When the filter hour exceeds this threshold that is configured
in the Web page, the e-mail will be sent out.
NOTE
3.1 Projector Web Control - Alert Settings (continued)
3. Web Control
27
3.1.7 Schedule Settings
Displays and configures schedule settings.
Item Description
Daily Configures the daily schedule.
Sunday Configures the Sunday schedule.
Monday Configures the Monday schedule.
Tuesday Configures the Tuesday schedule.
Wednesday Configures the Wednesday schedule.
Thursday Configures the Thursday schedule.
Friday Configures the Friday schedule.
Saturday Configures the Saturday schedule.
Specific date No.1 Configures the specific date (No.1) schedule.
Specific date No.2 Configures the specific date (No.2) schedule.
Specific date No.3 Configures the specific date (No.3) schedule.
Specific date No.4 Configures the specific date (No.4) schedule.
Specific date No.5 Configures the specific date (No.5) schedule.
3. Web Control
3.1 Projector Web Control (continued)
28
3.1 Projector Web Control - Schedule Settings (continued)
The schedule settings are shown below.
Item Description
Schedule Click the [Enable] check box to enable the schedule.
Date (Month/Day)
Configures the month and date.
This item appears only when Specific date (No. 1-5) is
selected.
Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.
The current event settings are displayed on the schedule list. To add additional
functions and events, set the following items.
Item Description
Time Configures the time to execute commands.
Command
[Parameter]
Configures the commands to be executed.
Power Configures the parameters for power control.
Input Source Configures the parameters for input switching.
My Image
Configures the parameters for My Image data display. (
50)
Messenger
Configures the parameters for Messenger data display.
(
51
)
Slideshow Configures the Start/Stop parameters for the Slideshow.
Click the [Register] button to add new commands to the schedule list.
Click the [Delete] button to delete commands from the schedule list.
Click the [Reset] button to delete all commands and reset the schedule settings
from the schedule list.
3. Web Control
29
• After the projector is moved, check the date and time set for the
projector before configuring the schedules.
• The internal clock’s time may not remain accurate. Using SNTP is
recommended to maintain accurate time.
• Events “My Image” and “Messenger” will not be executed appropriately but
result in “schedule execution error” status in case lamp does not light or/and
display data are not stored in the projector at the scheduled event execution
time.
• Events “Input Source” and “My Image” will not be executed if security feature
is enabled and the projector is locked due to the feature.
• Certain error state in the projector (such as temperature error, lamp error) will
prevent the projector from appropriate execution of scheduled functions/events.
• If no USB memory device is inserted to the projector or no image data for
display exists at the scheduled event time, a schedule execution error occurs
against the scheduled Slideshow event.
• When you start the Slideshow, input source will be automatically switched to
the USB TYPE A port.
• Image files stored in the root directory of the USB memory device will be
displayed for the scheduled Slideshow.
• Please refer to
Troubleshooting in the Operating Guide in case
scheduled functions/events are not executed appropriately as you've set.
NOTE
3.1 Projector Web Control - Schedule Settings (continued)
3. Web Control
30
3.1.8 Date/Time Settings
Displays and configures the date and time
settings.
Item Description
Current Date Configures the current date in year/month/day format.
Current Time Configures the current time in hour:minute:second format.
Daylight Savings Time
Click the [ON] check box to enable daylight savings time and
set the following items.
Start Configures the date and time daylight savings time begins.
Month Configures the month daylight savings time begins (1~12).
Week
Configures the week of the month daylight savings time
begins (First, 2, 3, 4, Last).
Day
Configures the day of the week daylight savings time begins
(Sun, Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri, Sat).
Time
hour Configures the hour daylight savings time begins (0 ~ 23).
minute Configures the minute daylight savings time begins (0 ~ 59).
End Configures the date and time daylight savings time ends.
Month Configures the month daylight savings time ends (1 ~ 12).
Week
Configures the week of the month daylight savings time ends
(First, 2, 3, 4, Last).
Day
Configures the day of the week daylight savings time ends
(Sun, Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri, Sat).
Time
hour Configures the hour daylight savings time ends (0 ~ 23).
minute Configures the minute daylight savings time ends (0 ~ 59).
(continued on next page)
3. Web Control
3.1 Projector Web Control (continued)
31
Item Description
Time difference
Configures the time difference. Set the same time difference
as the one set on your computer. If unsure, consult your IT
manager.
SNTP
Click the [ON] check box to retrieve Date and Time
information from the SNTP server and set the following items.
SNTP Server Address
Configures the SNTP server address in IP format.
• The address allows not only IP address but also domain
name if the valid DNS server is setup in the Network
Settings. The maximum length of host or domain name is up
to 255 characters.
Cycle
Configures the interval at which to retrieve Date and Time
information from the SNTP server (hour:minute).
Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.
• The new configuration settings are activated after restarting the
network connection. When the configuration settings are changed, you must
restart the network connection. You can restart the network connection by
clicking the [Network Restart] on the main menu(
41).
• If you connect the projector to an existing network, consult a network
administrator before setting server addresses.
• Once you turn off the projector in the SAVING mode (
SETUP menu in the
Operating Guide) or the AC power, the current date and time setting is reset.
• To enable the SNTP function, the time difference must be set.
• The projector will retrieve Date and Time information from the time server and
override time settings when SNTP is enabled.
• The internal clock’s time may not remain accurate. Using SNTP is
recommended to maintain accurate time.
NOTE
3.1 Projector Web Control - Date/Time Settings (continued)
3. Web Control
32
3.1.9 Security Settings
Displays and configures passwords and other
security settings.
Item Description
User Account Configures the user name and password.
User name
Configures the user name.
The length of the text can be up to 32 alphanumeric
characters.
Password
Configures the password.
The length of the text can be up to 255 alphanumeric
characters.
Re-enter Password Reenter the above password for verification.
Network Control
Configures the Authentication password for Network Control
Port1 (Port: 23), Network Control Port2 (Port: 9715),
PJLink™ Port (Port: 4352), My Image Port (Port: 9716),
and Messenger Port (Port: 9719)
(
22, 23)
.
Authentication
Password
Configures the Authentication password.
The length of the text can be up to 32 alphanumeric
characters.
Re-enter
Authentication
Password
Reenter the above password for verification.
SNMP Configures the community name if SNMP is used.
Community name
Configures the community name. The length of the text can
be up to 64 alphanumeric characters.
Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.
• The new configuration settings are activated after restarting the
network connection. When the configuration settings are changed, you must
restart the network connection. You can restart the network connection by
clicking the [Network Restart] on the main menu(
41).
• Only numbers ‘0-9’ and alphabet ‘a-z’, ‘A-Z’ can be used.
NOTE
3. Web Control
3.1 Projector Web Control (continued)
33
3.1.10 Projector Control
Item Description
MAIN
POWER Turns the power on/off.
INPUT SOURCE Selects the input source.
PICTURE MODE Selects the picture mode setting.
BLANK ON/OFF Turns Blank on/off.
MUTE Turns Mute on/off.
FREEZE Turns Freeze on/off.
MAGNIFY
Controls the magnify setting.
In some input signal sources, it might stop “Magnify” even
though it does not reach to maximum setting value.
MAGNIFY POSITION V
Adjusts the vertical magnify position.
MAGNIFY POSITION H
Adjusts the horizontal magnify position.
TEMPLATE Turns template on/off.
MY IMAGE Selects MY IMAGE data.
MY IMAGE DELETE Deletes MY IMAGE data.
(continued on next page)
The items shown in the table below can be
performed using the Projector Control menu.
Select an item with the mouse.
Most of the items have a submenu. Refer to the
table below for details.
Controls the projector.
• The setting value may not match with the actual value if the user
changes the value manually. In that case, please refresh the page by clicking
the [Refresh] button.
NOTE
3. Web Control
3.1 Projector Web Control (continued)
34
3.1 Projector Web Control - Projector Control (continued)
Item Description
PICTURE
BRIGHTNESS Adjusts the brightness setting.
CONTRAST Adjusts the contrast setting.
GAMMA Selects the gamma setting.
COLOR TEMP Selects the color temperature setting.
COLOR Adjusts the color setting.
TINT Adjusts the tint setting.
SHARPNESS Adjusts the sharpness setting.
ACTIVE IRIS Selects the active iris setting.
MYMEMORY SAVE Saves the MyMemory data.
MYMEMORY RECALL Recalls the MyMemory data.
IMAGE
ASPECT Selects the aspect setting.
OVER SCAN Adjusts the over scan setting.
V POSITION Adjusts the vertical position.
H POSITION Adjusts the horizontal position.
H PHASE Adjusts the horizontal phase.
H SIZE Adjusts the horizontal size.
AUTO ADJUST
EXECUTE
Performs the automatic adjustment.
INPUT
PROGRESSIVE Selects the progressive setting.
VIDEO NR Selects the video noise reduction setting.
COLOR SPACE Selects the color space.
VIDEO FORMAT -
S-VIDEO
Selects the s-video format setting.
VIDEO FORMAT -
VIDEO
Selects the video format setting.
HDMI FORMAT Selects the HDMI
TM
format setting.
HDMI RANGE Selects the HDMI
TM
range setting.
COMPUTER IN -
COMPUTER IN1
Selects the COMPUTER IN1 input signal type.
COMPUTER IN -
COMPUTER IN2
Selects the COMPUTER IN2 input signal type.
FRAME LOCK -
COMPUTER IN1
Turns the FRAME LOCK-COMPUTER IN1 function on/off.
FRAME LOCK -
COMPUTER IN2
Turns the FRAME LOCK-COMPUTER IN2 function on/off.
FRAME LOCK - HDMI Turns the FRAME LOCK-HDMI function on/off.
(continued on next page)
3. Web Control
35
3.1 Projector Web Control - Projector Control (continued)
Item Description
SETUP
AUTO KEYSTONE
EXECUTE
Performs the automatic keystone distortion setting.
KEYSTONE V Adjusts the vertical keystone distortion setting.
AUTO ECO MODE Turns on/off the automatic eco mode function.
ECO MODE Selects the eco mode.
INSTALLATION Selects the installation status.
STANDBY MODE Selects the standby mode.
MONITOR OUT -
COMPUTER IN1
Assigns the MONITOR OUT when the COMPUTER IN1 input
port is selected.
MONITOR OUT -
COMPUTER IN2
Assigns the MONITOR OUT when the COMPUTER IN2 input
port is selected.
MONITOR OUT - LAN
Assigns the MONITOR OUT when the LAN input port is
selected.
MONITOR OUT -
USB TYPE A
Assigns the MONITOR OUT when the USB TYPE A input
port is selected.
MONITOR OUT -
USB TYPE B
Assigns the MONITOR OUT when the USB TYPE B input
port is selected.
MONITOR OUT -
HDMI
Assigns the MONITOR OUT when the HDMI input port is
selected.
MONITOR OUT -
S-VIDEO
Assigns the MONITOR OUT when the S-VIDEO input port is
selected.
MONITOR OUT -
VIDEO
Assigns the MONITOR OUT when the VIDEO input port is
selected.
MONITOR OUT -
STANDBY
Assigns the MONITOR OUT in the standby mode.
(continued on next page)
3. Web Control
36
3.1 Projector Web Control - Projector Control (continued)
3. Web Control
Item Description
AUDIO
VOLUME Adjusts the volume setting.
SPEAKER Turns the built-in speaker on/off.
AUDIO SOURCE -
COMPUTER IN1
Assigns the AUDIO SOURCE - COMPUTER IN1 input port.
AUDIO SOURCE -
COMPUTER IN2
Assigns the AUDIO SOURCE - COMPUTER IN2 input port.
AUDIO SOURCE - LAN Assigns the AUDIO SOURCE - LAN input port.
AUDIO SOURCE - USB
TYPE A
Assigns the AUDIO SOURCE - USB TYPE A input port.
AUDIO SOURCE - USB
TYPE B
Assigns the AUDIO SOURCE - USB TYPE B input port.
AUDIO SOURCE -
HDMI
Assigns the AUDIO SOURCE - HDMI input port.
AUDIO SOURCE -
S-VIDEO
Assigns the AUDIO SOURCE - S-VIDEO input port.
AUDIO SOURCE -
VIDEO
Assigns the AUDIO SOURCE - VIDEO input port.
AUDIO SOURCE -
STANDBY
Assigns the AUDIO SOURCE in the standby mode.
MIC LEVEL Selects the microphone level.
MIC VOLUME Adjusts the microphone volume setting.
SCREEN
LANGUAGE Selects the language for the OSD.
MENU POSITION V Adjusts the vertical Menu position.
MENU POSITION H Adjusts the horizontal Menu position.
BLANK Selects the Blank mode.
START UP Selects the start up screen mode.
MyScreen LOCK Turns MyScreen lock function on/off.
MESSAGE Turns the message function on/off.
TEMPLATE Selects the template setting.
C.C. - DISPLAY Selects Closed Caption DISPLAY setting.
C.C. - MODE Selects Closed Caption MODE setting.
C.C. - CHANNEL Selects Closed Caption CHANNEL setting.
(continued on next page)
37
Item Description
OPTION
AUTO SEARCH Turns the automatic signal search function on/off.
AUTO KEYSTONE
Turns the automatic keystone distortion correction function
on/off.
DIRECT POWER ON Turns the direct power on function on/off.
AUTO POWER OFF
Configures the timer to shut off the projector when no signal
is detected.
MY BUTTON-1
Assigns the functions for the MY BUTTON-1 button on the
included remote control.
MY BUTTON-2
Assigns the functions for the MY BUTTON-2 button on the
included remote control.
MY SOURCE Selects the My Source setting.
REMOTE FREQ. -
NORMAL
Turns the remote control signal frequency normal function
on/off.
REMOTE FREQ. -
HIGH
Turns the remote control signal frequency high function on/
off.
(continued on next page)
3.1 Projector Web Control - Projector Control (continued)
3. Web Control
38
The items shown in the table below can be
performed using the Projector Control menu.
Click the [Quit Presenter Mode].
Item Description
SERVICE
Quit Presenter Mode Quit compulsorily from the Presenter mode.
3.1 Projector Web Control - Projector Control (continued)
3. Web Control
39
3.1.11 Remote Control
You can use your Web browser to control the
projector. The functions on the bundled remote
control are assigned to the Web Remote Control
screen.
• Do not attempt to control the projector with
the projector’s remote control and via your Web
browser at the same time. It may cause some
operational errors in the projector.
Item Description
POWER Assigned the same operation as STANDBY/ON button.
COMPUTER Assigned the same operation as COMPUTER button.
VIDEO Assigned the same operation as VIDEO button.
BLANK Assigned the same operation as BLANK button.
FREEZE Assigned the same operation as FREEZE button.
MUTE Assigned the same operation as MUTE button.
MENU Assigned the same operation as MENU button.
▲ Assigned the same operation as ▲ button.
▼ Assigned the same operation as ▼ button.
◄ Assigned the same operation as ◄ button.
► Assigned the same operation as ► button.
ENTER Assigned the same operation as ENTER button.
RESET Assigned the same operation as RESET button.
PAGE UP Assigned the same operation as PAGE UP button.
PAGE DOWN Assigned the same operation as PAGE DOWN button.
SLIDESHOW Starts the Slideshow.
3. Web Control
• The Web Remote Control does not support repeat function that
performs an action while holding a button clicked down.
• Since the repeat function is not available, click the button repeatedly as many
times as you require.
•
Even if you hold the button clicked down for a while, the Web Remote Control
sends your request command one time only. Release the button, then click it again.
•
When the [POWER] button is pushed, a message window comes up to confirm
the operation. To control the power, push [OK], otherwise push [Cancel].
• The [PAGE DOWN] and [PAGE UP] buttons on the Web Remote Control
cannot be used as mouse emulation function of the projector.
NOTE
3.1 Projector Web Control (continued)
40
3.1.12 Projector Status
Displays the settings and status of the projector.
Item Description
Error Status Displays the current error status
Lamp Time Displays the usage time for the current lamp.
Filter Time Displays the usage time for the current filter.
Power Status Displays the current power status.
Input Status Displays the current input signal source.
Blank On/Off Displays the current Blank on/off status.
Mute Displays the current Mute on/off status.
Freeze Displays the current Freeze status.
3. Web Control
3.1 Projector Web Control (continued)
41
3.1.13 Network Restart
Restarts the projector’s network connection.
Item Description
Restart
Restarts the projector’s network connection in order to
activate new configuration settings.
• Restarting requires you to re-log on in order to further control or
configure the projector via a web browser. Wait 30 seconds or more after
clicking the [Restart] button to log on again.
NOTE
3. Web Control
3.1 Projector Web Control (continued)
42
3. Web Control
The Main window as shown above is
displayed at first. However, if you have
enabled User Password on the Tools window
(
46), a dialog prompting you to enter
the password as shown on the right will be
displayed, and no operation is enabled until
you have entered the password. After entering
the preset password, the dialog disappears
and the Main window will be displayed.
As shown below, you can open a window by
clicking the corresponding tab at the top right
of the window.
• If Crestron e-Control in the Network Settings (21) is set to
Disable, Crestron e-Control
®
cannot be used to operate the projector. Enable
Crestron e-Control and close the web browser. Next, restart the web browser,
followed by entering the projector's IP address.
• Only English is supported on Crestron e-Control
®
.
• If the connection is terminated, the "Loading..." screen will appear. Check the
connection between the projector and the computer, then return or refresh the
Web page.
NOTE
3.2 Crestron e-Control
®
User Password dialog
Tab
Tab Description
Logout
Logs out from e-Control
®
.
This tab appears only when User Password of the Tools window is
enabled.
Tools Opens Tools window
(
45)
.
Info Opens Info window
(
47)
.
Contact IT Help Opens Help Desk window
(
48)
.
43
3. Web Control
3.2 Crestron e-Control
®
(continued)
3.2.1 Main window
You can operate the basic controls of the projector on this screen.
• If the projector is in the standby mode, only the Power button can be
operated.
NOTE
1 Click a button and operate as follows.
Button Description
Power Turns the power on/off.
Vol -/ Vol + Adjusts the volume setting.
Mute Turns Mute on/off.
2 Sources List
You can click a button to switch the input channel. The cursor will move
according to the currently selected input port.
Button Description
Computer in1 Selects input from COMPUTER IN1 port.
Computer in2 Selects input from COMPUTER IN2 port.
LAN Selects input from LAN port.
USB Type A Selects input from USB TYPE A port.
USB Type B Selects input from USB TYPE B port.
HDMI Selects input from HDMI port.
S-Video Selects input from S-VIDEO port.
Video Selects input from VIDEO port.
1
4
2
3
44
3. Web Control
3.2 Crestron e-Control
®
- Main window (continued)
3 Click a button and operate as follows. To show the hidden buttons, click the ◄ /
► icons at the left and right ends.
Button Description
Freeze Turns Freeze on/off.
Contrast Adjusts the contrast setting.
Brightness Adjusts the brightness setting.
Color Adjusts the color setting.
Sharpness Adjusts the sharpness setting.
Magnify
Controls the magnification setting using the [+] / [-] buttons.
Use the [▲] [▼] [◄] [►] buttons to move to the area you want
to magnify.
Auto Performs the automatic adjustment.
Blank Turns Blank on/off.
4 Click the button and operate in the same way as the bundled remote control.
Button Description
Menu Assigned the same operation as MENU button.
Enter Assigned the same operation as ENTER button.
Reset Assigned the same operation as RESET button.
▲ Assigned the same operation as ▲ button.
▼ Assigned the same operation as ▼ button.
◄ Assigned the same operation as ◄ button.
► Assigned the same operation as ► button.
45
3. Web Control
3.2 Crestron e-Control
®
(continued)
3.2.2 Tools window
Configures the settings between the projector and Crestron
®
control system.
Click the [Exit] button to return to the Main window.
1 Crestron Control
Configures the settings of Crestron
®
control system devices.
Item Description
IP Address Configures the IP address of the control system.
IP ID Configures the IP ID of the control system.
Port
Specifies the port number used for communication by the
control system.
To apply the settings, click the [Send] button.
2 Projector
Configures the network settings of the projector.
Item Description
Projector Name
Configures the name of the projector. The length of the
Projector Name can be up to 64 alphanumeric characters.
Location
Configures the location name of the projector. You can specify
a Location name up to 32 alphanumeric characters.
Assigned To:
Configures the user name for the projector. You can specify a
user name up to 32 alphanumeric characters.
The usable symbols are space and the following:
!"#$%&'()*+,-./:;<=>?@[\]^_`{|}~
To apply the settings, click the [Send] button.
1
4
5
3
2
• If two-byte characters are used, the input text or numbers cannot be
set correctly.
• All items on this window cannot be left blank.
NOTE
46
3. Web Control
3.2 Crestron e-Control
®
- Tools window (continued)
3 Projector (continued)
Configures the network settings of the projector.
Item Description
DHCP Enables DHCP.
IP Address Configures the IP address when DHCP is disabled.
Subnet Mask Configures the subnet mask when DHCP is disabled.
Default Gateway Configures the default gateway when DHCP is disabled.
DNS Server Configures the DNS server address.
To apply the settings, click the [Send] button.
4 User Password
Configures the User Password. To prompt the entry of User Password before
starting e-Control
®
, select the checkbox.
Item Description
New Password
Configures the password.
You can specify a password up to 26 alphanumeric characters.
The usable symbols are space and the following:
!"#$%&'()*+,-./:;<=>?@[\]^_`{|}~
Confirm
Reenter the above password for verification. If the password is
incorrect, an error message is displayed.
To apply the settings, click the [Send] button.
5 Admin Password
Configures the Admin Password. To prompt the entry of Admin Password before
displaying the Tools window, select the checkbox.
Item Description
New Password
Configures the password.
You can specify a password up to 26 alphanumeric characters.
The usable symbols are space and the following:
!"#$%&'()*+,-./:;<=>?@[\]^_`{|}~
Confirm
Reenter the above password for verification. If the password is
incorrect, an error message is displayed.
To apply the settings, click the [Send] button.
47
3. Web Control
3.2 Crestron e-Control
®
(continued)
3.2.3 Info window
Displays the settings and status of the projector.
Click the [Exit] button to return to the Main window.
1 Projector Information
Item Description
Projector Name Displays the projector name settings.
Location Displays the location name of the projector.
MAC Address Displays the wired LAN MAC address of the projector.
Resolution
Displays the resolution and vertical frequency of the signal
input selected on the projector.
Lamp Hours Displays the usage time for the current lamp.
Assigned To: Displays the user name for the projector.
2 Projector Status
Item Description
Power Status Displays the current power status.
Input Source Displays the current input signal source.
Picture Mode Displays the current picture mode setting.
Installation Displays the current installation setting.
Eco Mode Displays the current eco mode setting.
Error Status Displays the current error status.
1 2
• Projector Name, Location and the user name for Assigned To: may
appear truncated if they are too long.
NOTE
48
3. Web Control
3.2 Crestron e-Control
®
(continued)
3.2.4 Help Desk window
Sends/receives messages to/from the administrator for Crestron RoomView󰙽
Express.
Button Description
Send Sends a message.
Check the received message.
49
3. Web Control
3.2 Crestron e-Control
®
(continued)
3.2.5 Emergency Alert
When the administrator for Crestron RoomView
®
Express sends out an alert
message, it will be displayed on the screen.
You can reply to the alert message via a chat format. Input a message in the box
below the alert message, and click the [Send] button.
• For details of Emergency Alert, refer to the manual of Crestron
RoomView
®
Express.
•
The alert message from Crestron RoomView
®
is displayed on the screen of the
projector in a way similar to the real-time text of the Messenger function
(51).
If another real-time text is currently being displayed, it will be overwritten by the
alert message. However, if the priority of the real-time text is set to high, it will
not be overwritten by the alert message, and the latter will not appear on the
screen of the projector. For details, refer to the manual for the application of the
Messenger.
NOTE
50
1
43
2
4. My Image Function
The projector can display still images that are transferred via the network.
• It is possible to allocate the image file up to 4 in the maximum.
• Using MY BUTTON that registered MY IMAGE can display transferred image.
(OPTION menu in the Operating Guide)
• The image file also can be displayed by using schedule function from the web
browser. Refer to item 7.3 Event Scheduling (
59) in detail.
• If you display MY IMAGE data on screen while you are using the USB Display
function, the application for the USB Display will be closed. To restart the
application, exit the MY IMAGE function, and then the software in the projector,
LiveViewerLiteUSB.exe, will run again. (
USB Display in the Operating
Guide)
• If data is transferred via wireless and wired LAN at the same time, the
projector may not be able to process the data correctly.
NOTE
Transfer image data
Display image data (ex.
)
MY IMAGE transmission requires an exclusive application for your computer.
Use the application to transfer the image data.
It can be downloaded from the Hitachi web site (http://www.hitachi-america.us/
digitalmedia or http://www.hitachidigitalmedia.com).
For information on the necessary settings and operations for the computer and
projector, refer to the manual for the application.
To display the transferred image, select the MY IMAGE item in the NETWORK
menu. For more information, please see the description of the MY IMAGE item of
the NETWORK menu. (NETWORK menu in the Operating Guide)
4. My Image Function
51
1
4
3
2
12
5. Messenger Function
The projector can display text data transferred via the network on the screen and
play back audio data inside the projector.
The text data can be displayed on the screen in two ways that displays the text
transferred from the computer on real time, and the other chooses and displays
the text data from the ones once stored in the projector.
• It is possible to store the text data up to 12 in the maximum.
• Using MY BUTTON that registered MESSENGER can turn the displaying
messenger text on/off. (
OPTION menu in the Operating Guide)
• The text file also can be displayed by using schedule function via the web
browser. Refer to item 7.3 Event Scheduling (
59) for the detail.
• If data is transferred via wireless and wired LAN at the same time, the
projector may not be able to process the data correctly.
NOTE
Transfer text data
Display text data (ex.
)
Messenger function requires an exclusive application for your computer. To
edit, transfer and display the text data, use the application. You can download
it from the Hitachi web site (http://www.hitachi-america.us/digitalmedia or http://
www.hitachidigitalmedia.com). For information on the necessary settings and
operations for the computer and projector, refer to the manual for the application.
5. Messenger Function
52
6. Network Bridge Function
This projector is equipped with the NETWORK BRIDGE function to perform
mutual conversion of a network protocol and a serial interface.
By making use of the NETWORK BRIDGE function, a computer that is connected
to the projector via wireless or wired LAN is able to control an external device via
RS-232C communication using the projector as a network terminal.
6.1 Connecting devices
1) Connect the projector’s LAN port to the computer’s LAN port with a LAN
cable, or insert the USB wireless adapter into the USB TYPE A port.
2) Connect the projector’s CONTROL port and the device’s RS-232C port with
an RS-232C cable, for RS-232C communication.
• Before connecting the devices, read the manuals for the devices to
ensure the connection.
For RS-232C connection, check the specifications of each port and use the
suitable cable. (
Connection to the ports in the Operating Guide - Technical)
NOTE
6. Network Bridge Function
RS-232C
RS-232C cable
CONTROL port
LAN port
External device
Wired LAN
LAN cable
Computer
Protocol change
TCP/IP data Serial data
USB TYPE A port
Wireless LAN
53
6. Network Bridge Function
6.2 Communication setup
6.3 Communication port
1) In the COMMUNICATION TYPE menu, select NETWORK BRIDGE
(WIRELESS or WIRED depending on the type of connection you use) for the
CONTROL port.
2) Using the SERIAL SETTINGS menu, select the proper baud rate and parity
for the CONTROL port, according to the specification of the RS-232C port of
the connected device.
For the NETWORK BRIDGE function, send the data from the computer to the
projector with using the Network Bridge Port that is configured in the Port
Settings of web browser. (
23)
3) Using the TRANSMISSION METHOD menu, set up the proper method for the
CONTROL port according to your use.
• The OFF is selected for the COMMUNICATION TYPE as the default
setting.
• Using the COMMUNICATION menu, set up the communication. Remember
that an unsuitable setup could cause malfunction of communication.
• When either one of the NETWORK BRIDGE settings is selected in the
COMMUNICATION TYPE menu, RS-232C commands cannot be received from
the CONTROL port.
• Except for 41794, 9715, 9716, 9719, 9720, 5900, 5500, 4352
between 1024 and 65535 can be set up as the Network Bridge Port number.
It is set to 9717 as the default setting.
NOTE
NOTE
Item Condition
BAUD RATE 4800bps/9600bps/19200bps/38400bps
PARITY NONE/ODD/EVEN
Data length 8 bit (fixed)
Start bit 1 bit (fixed)
Stop bit 1 bit (fixed)
To configure the setup of the communication using NETWORK BRIDGE for
the projector, use items in the COMMUNICATION menu. Open the menu of
the projector and select the OPTION - SERVICE - COMMUNICATION menu.
(
OPTION menu > SERVICE > COMMUNICATION in the Operating Guide)
54
6.4 Transmission method
6.4.1 HALF-DUPLEX
The transmission method can be selected from the menus, only when the
NETWORK BRIDGE is selected for the COMMUNICATION TYPE.
(
OPTION menu > SERVICE > COMMUNICATION in the Operating Guide)
HALF-DUPLEX FULL-DUPLEX
This method lets the projector make two way communication, but only one
direction, either transmitting or receiving data, is allowed at a time.
The method does not allow the projector to receive the data from the computer
while waiting for response data from an external device. After the projector
receives the response data from an external device or the response limit time is
past, the projector can receive the data from the computer.
That means that the projector controls transmitting and receiving the data to
synchronize the communication.
To use the HALF-DUPLEX method, set up the RESPONSE LIMIT TIME following
the instructions below.
Using the RESPONSE LIMIT TIME menu, set the waiting time for response data
from an external device. (
OPTION menu > SERVICE > COMMUNICATION
in the Operating Guide)
OFF 1s 2s 3s ( OFF)
6. Network Bridge Function
RS-232C
RS-232C cable
External device
Wired LAN
LAN cable
Computer
Protocol change
TCP/IP data Serial data
Transmitting data
Discarding data
Transmitting data
Response limit
time
Transmitting data
Response data
Response data
Wireless LAN
55
• With using the HALF-DUPLEX method, the projector can send out
254 byte data as maximum at once.
• If it is not required to monitor the response data from an external device and
the RESPONSE LIMIT TIME is set to OFF, the projector can receive the data
from the computer and send it out to an external device continuously.
The OFF is selected as the default setting.
• In case that the computer controls to synchronize transmitting
and receiving the data, it may not be able to control an external device well
depending on the processing status of the projector.
NOTE
NOTE
6.4.2 FULL-DUPLEX
This method lets the projector make two way communication, transmitting and
receiving data at the same time, without monitoring response data from an
external device.
With using this method, the computer and an external device will send the data
out of synchronization. If it is required to synchronize them, set the computer to
make the synchronization.
6. Network Bridge Function
6.4 Transmission method (continued)
56
7. Other Functions
7.1 E-mail Alerts
The projector can automatically send an alert message to the specified e-mail
addresses when the projector detects a certain condition that is requiring
maintenance or detected an error.
• Up to five e-mail addresses can be specified.
• The projector may be not able to send e-mail if the projector suddenly loses
power.
NOTE
Mail Settings (
24
)
To use the projector’s e-mail alert function, please configure the following items
through a web browser.
Example: If the IP address of the projector is set to 192.168.1.10:
1) Enter “http://192.168.1.10/” into the address bar of the web browser, and select
Projector Web Control from the selection window.
2) Enter your user name and password, and then click the [OK].
3) Click the [Mail Settings] and configure each item. Refer to item 3.1.5 Mail
Settings (
24) for further information.
4) Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.
• Click the [Send Test Mail] button in the [Mail Settings] to confirm
that the e-mail settings are correct. The following mail will be delivered to the
specified addresses.
NOTE
Subject line :Test Mail <Projector name>
Text :Send Test Mail
Date <Testing date>
Time <Testing time>
IP Address <Projector IP address>
MAC Address <Projector MAC address>
7. Other Functions
57
7.1 E-mail Alerts (continued)
7. Other Functions
5) Click the [Alert Settings] on the main menu to configure the E-mail Alerts
settings.
6) Select and configure each alert item. Refer to item 3.1.6 Alert Settings (
25)
for further information.
7) Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.
Failure/Warning e-mails are formatted as follows:
Subject line : <Mail title> <Projector name>
Text : <Mail text>
Date <Failure/Warning date>
Time <Failure/Warning time>
IP Address <Projector IP address>
MAC Address <Projector MAC address>
58
7.2 Projector Management using SNMP
The SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) enables to manage the
projector information, which is a failure or warning status, from the computer on
the network. The SNMP management software will be required on the computer
to use this function.
• It is recommended that SNMP functions be carried out by a network
administrator.
• SNMP management software must be installed on the computer to monitor
the projector via SNMP.
• To use the downloaded MIB file, specify the file by your SNMP
manager.
NOTE
NOTE
SNMP Settings (
23
)
Configure the following items via a web browser to use SNMP.
Example: If the IP address of the projector is set to 192.168.1.10:
1) Enter “http://192.168.1.10/” into the address bar of the web browser, and select
Projector Web Control from the selection window.
2) Enter your user name and password, and then click the [OK].
3) Click the [Port Settings] on the main menu.
4) Click the [Download MIB file] to download a MIB file.
5) Click the [Enable] check box to open the SNMP Port. Set the IP address to
send the SNMP trap to when a Failure/Warning occurs.
6) Click the [Security Settings] on the main menu.
7) Click the [SNMP] and set the community name on the screen that is displayed.
8) Configure the settings for Trap transmission of Failures/Warnings. Click the
[Alert Settings] on the main menu and select the Failure/Warning item to be
configured.
9) Click the [Enable] check box to send out the SNMP trap for Failures/Warnings.
Clear the [Enable] check box when SNMP trap transmission is not required.
10) Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.
7. Other Functions
• A Network Restart is required after the Community name has been
changed. Click the [Network Restart] and configure the following items.
NOTE
• A Network Restart is required after the SNMP Port configuration
settings have been changed. Click the [Network Restart] and configure the
following items.
NOTE
59
7.3 Event Scheduling
The scheduling function enables to setup scheduled events including power on /
power off. It enables to be “self-management” projector.
• You can schedule the following control events: Power, Input Source,
My Image, Messenger, Slideshow. (
28)
• The power on event has the lowest priority among the all events that are
defined at the same time.
• There are 3 types of Scheduling, 1) daily 2) weekly 3) specific date. (
27)
• The priority for scheduled events is as follows 1) specific date 2) weekly 3)
daily.
• Up to five specific dates are available for scheduled events. Priority is given to
those with the lower numbers when more than one event has been scheduled
for the same date and time (e.g., ‘Specific date No. 1’ has priority over ‘Specific
date No. 2’ and so on.
• Be sure to set the date and time before enabling scheduled events. (
30)
Once you turn off the projector in the SAVING mode (
SETUP menu in the
Operating Guide) or the AC power, the current date and time setting is reset.
NOTE
7. Other Functions
60
• In standby mode, the POWER indicator will flash green for approx. 3
seconds when at least 1 “Power ON” schedule is saved.
• When the schedule function is used, the power cord must be connected to the
projector and the outlet. The schedule function does not work when the breaker
in a room is tripped. The power indicator will lights orange or green when the
projector is receiving AC power.
NOTE
Schedule Settings (
27
)
7.3 Event Scheduling(continued)
Schedule settings can be configured from a web browser.
Example: If the IP address of the projector is set to 192.168.1.10:
1) Enter “http://192.168.1.10/” into the address bar of the web browser, and select
Projector Web Control from the selection window.
2) Enter your user name and password, and then click the [OK].
3) Click the [Schedule Settings] on the main menu and select the required
schedule item. For example, if you want to perform the command every
Sunday, please select the [Sunday].
4) Click the [Enable] check box to enable scheduling.
5) Enter the date (month/day) for specific date scheduling.
6) Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.
7) After configure the time, command and parameters, click the [Register] to add
the new event.
8) Click the [Delete] button when you want to delete a schedule.
There are three types of scheduling.
1) Daily: Perform the specified operation at a specified time every day.
2) Sunday ~ Saturday: Perform the specified operation at the specified time on a
specified day of the week.
3) Specific date: Perform the specified operation on the specified date and time.
7. Other Functions
61
7.3 Event Scheduling(continued)
Date/Time Settings (
30
)
• The internal clock’s time may not remain accurate. Using SNTP is
recommended to maintain accurate time (
31).
• Once you turn off the projector in the SAVING mode (
SETUP menu in the
Operating Guide) or the AC power, the current date and time setting is reset.
NOTE
The Date/Time setting can be adjusted via a web browser.
Example: If the IP address of the projector is set to 192.168.1.10:
1) Enter “http://192.168.1.10/” into the address bar of the web browser, and select
Projector Web Control from the selection window.
2) Enter your user name and password, and then click the [OK].
3) Click the [Date/Time Settings] on the main menu and configure each item.
Refer to item 3.1.8 Date/Time Settings (
30) for further information.
4) Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.
7. Other Functions
62
7.4 Command Control via the Network
You can configure and control the projector via the network using RS-232C
commands.
Communication Port
The following two ports are assigned for the command control.
Command Control Settings (
22
)
4) Click the [Enable] check box to open Network Control Port1 (Port: 23) to use
TCP #23. Click the [Enable] check box for the [Authentication] setting when
authentication is required, otherwise clear the check box.
5) Click the [Enable] check box to open Network Control Port2 (Port: 9715) to
use TCP #9715. Click the [Enable] check box for the [Authentication] setting
when authentication is required, otherwise clear the check box.
6) Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.
Configure the following items from a web browser when command control is used.
Example: If the IP address of the projector is set to 192.168.1.10:
1) Enter “http://192.168.1.10/” into the address bar of the web browser, and select
Projector Web Control from the selection window.
2) Enter your user name and password, and then click the [OK].
3) Click the [Port Settings] on the main menu.
7. Other Functions
TCP #23 (Network Control Port1 (Port: 23))
TCP #9715 (Network Control Port2 (Port: 9715))
• Command control is available only via the specified port above.
NOTE
63
7.4 Command Control via the Network (continued)
When the authentication setting is enabled, the following settings are required.
(
32)
7) Click the [Security Settings] on the main menu.
8) Click the [Network Control] and enter the desired authentication password.
* See NOTE.
9) Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.
NOTE
7. Other Functions
• The Authentication Password will be the same for Network Control
Port1 (Port: 23), Network Control Port2 (Port: 9715), PJLink™ Port (Port:
4352), My Image Port (Port: 9716) and Messenger Port (Port: 9719).
• The new configuration settings are activated after restarting the network
connection. When the configuration settings are changed, you must restart the
network connection. You can restart the network connection by clicking the
[Network Restart] on the main menu(
41).
64
Command Format
Command formats differ among the different communication ports.
● TCP #23
You can use the RS-232C commands without any changes. The reply data
format is the same as the RS-232C commands. (
RS-232C Communication
in the Operating Guide - Technical)
However, the following reply will be sent back in the event of authentication
failure when authentication is enabled.
Header Data length RS-232Ccommand Check Sum
Connection
ID
0x02 0x0D 13 bytes 1 byte 1 byte
Reply Error code
0x1F 0x04 0x00
<Reply in the event of an authentication error>
Header → 0x02, Fixed
Data length → RS-232C commands byte length (0x0D, Fixed)
RS-232C command → RS-232C commands that start with 0xBE 0xEF
(13 bytes)
Check Sum → This is the value to make zero on the addition of the
lower 8 bits from the header to the checksum.
Connection ID → Random value from 0 to 255 (This value is attached
to the reply data)
● TCP #9715
Send Data format
The following formatting is added to the header (0 x 02), Data length (0 x 0D),
Checksum (1 byte) and Connection ID (1 byte) of the RS-232C commands.
7. Other Functions
7.4 Command Control via the Network (continued)
65
Reply Data format
The connection ID (the data is same as the connection ID data on the sending
data format) is attached to the RS-232C commands reply data.
<ACK reply>
Reply
Connection
ID
0x06 1 byte
<NAK reply>
Reply
Connection
ID
0x15 1 byte
<Error reply>
Reply Error code
Connection
ID
0x1C 2 bytes 1 byte
<Data reply>
<Projector busy reply>
<Authentication error reply>
Reply Data
Connection
ID
0x1D 2 bytes 1 byte
Reply Status code
Connection
ID
0x1F 2 bytes 1 byte
Reply
Authentication
Error code
Connection
ID
0x1F 0x04 0x00 1 byte
7. Other Functions
7.4 Command Control via the Network (continued)
66
Automatic Connection Break
The TCP connection will be automatically disconnected after there is no
communication for 30 seconds after being established.
The projector does not accept commands without authentication success
when authentication is enabled. The projector uses a challenge response type
authentication with an MD5 (Message Digest 5) algorithm.
When the projector is using a LAN, a random 8 bytes will be returned if
authentication is enabled. Bind this received 8 bytes and the Authentication
Password and digest this data with the MD5 algorithm and add this in front of the
commands to send.
Following is a sample if the Authentication Password is set to “password” and the
random 8 bytes are “a572f60c”.
Authentication
1) Connect the projector.
2) Receive the random 8 bytes “a572f60c” from the projector.
3) Bind the random 8 bytes “a572f60c” and the Authentication Password
“password” and it becomes “a572f60cpassword”.
4) Digest this bind “a572f60cpassword” with MD5 algorithm.
It will be “e3d97429adffa11bce1f7275813d4bde”.
5) Add this “e3d97429adffa11bce1f7275813d4bde” in front of the commands
and send the data.
Send “e3d97429adffa11bce1f7275813d4bde”+command.
6) When the sending data is correct, the command will be performed and the
reply data will be returned. Otherwise, an authentication error will be returned.
• As for the transmission of the second or subsequent commands, the
authentication data can be omitted when the same connection.
NOTE
7. Other Functions
7.4 Command Control via the Network (continued)
67
7. Other Functions
7.5 Crestron RoomView
®
Crestron RoomView
®
is a multi-user resource management program provided
by Crestron Electronics, Inc. It is an application for managing and controlling the
projector and other AV devices collectively.
For details of Crestron RoomView
®
, refer to the Crestron
®
website.
URL: http://www.crestron.com
The following communication interfaces can be used to manage the entire facility.
1) Crestron RoomView
®
Express / Crestron RoomView
®
Server Edition
RoomViewTM Express and RoomViewTM Server Edition are software provided
by Crestron Electronics, Inc. They are used for managing all the AV devices,
and are also able to communicate with the help desk as well as send out alert
messages.
For details of the software, refer to the following website.
URL: http://www.crestron.com/getroomview
2) Crestron e-Control
®
Crestron e-Control
®
is a system controller that can be operated via a web
browser (
42
).
68
8. Troubleshooting
8. Troubleshooting
Problem Likely Cause Things to Check
Reference
Page
Number
Can't communicate
Weak radio signal
• Bring the computer and
projector closer together.
• Radio waves won’t go
through concrete and metal
(steel doors, etc.)
–
Cannot communicate due
to configure wireless /
encryption settings.
If there is a wireless
configuration utility loaded
on your computer, check its
settings.
Please refer the manual of
your configuration utility.
–
The computer and/or
projector's network settings
are not configured correctly.
Check the network
configurations of the
computer and projector.
–
The same network address
is set for both wireless and
wired LAN.
Change the network address
setting for wireless or wired
LAN.
20, 21
<Only for wireless LAN>
The USB wireless adapter
is not inserted into the
projector.
Insert the optional USB
wireless adapter.
–
<Only for wireless LAN>
There is closely another
projector or other that has
the same wireless setting.
Try changing of SSID and IP
Address.
20
Others
- Information from
the projector
to computer is
not correct or
completed
- The projector does
not respond
Communication between the
projector and computer is not
working well.
NETWORK Functions of the
projector is not working well.
Try “NETWORK RESTART”
in SERVICE menu under the
NETWORK menu.
In the
Operating
Guide
69
Item Specifications
Control software Dedicated computer application and Web browser
Corresponding
protocol
TCP/IP, DHCP client and HTTP server
Network
Wireless LAN (IEEE802.11b/g/n)
(Ad-Hoc and Infrastructure modes)
Wired LAN(100Base-TX/10Base-T)
Security
WEP (64/128bit), WPA-PSK (TKIP/AES),
WPA2-PSK (TKIP/AES), SSID
Computer
application's system
requirements
OS: Windows
®
XP Home
Windows
®
XP Professional
Windows Vista
®
Home Basic
Windows Vista
®
Home Premium
Windows Vista
®
Business
Windows Vista
®
Ultimate
Windows Vista
®
Enterprise
Windows
®
7 Starter
Windows
®
7 Home Basic
Windows
®
7 Home Premium
Windows
®
7 Professional
Windows
®
7 Ultimate
Windows
®
7 Enterprise
CPU: Pentium 4 (2.8 GHz or higher)
Graphic card: 16 bit, XGA or higher
Memory: 512 MB or higher
Hard disk space: 100 MB or higher
Web browser: Internet Explorer
®
6.0 or higher
CD-ROM drive
USB wireless adapter Gemtek USB-Link11n
9. Specifications
9. Specifications
70
10. Warranty and after-sales service
10. Warranty and after-sales service
If a problem occurs with the equipment, please read 8. Troubleshooting (68)
section first and review all suggested check points. After that, please contact your
dealer or service company, if you still have the problem. They will tell you what
warranty condition is applied.
1
Example of PC signal
Projector
User's Manual (detailed)
Operating Guide – Technical
CP-X2015WN/CP-X2515WN/CP-X3015WN/
CP-X4015WN/CP-WX2515WN/CP-WX3015WN
*1) Supported except for HDMI input.
*2) Only for CP-X2015WN/CP-X2515WN/CP-X3015WN/CP-X4015WN.
*3) Only for CP-WX2515WN/CP-WX3015WN.
Resolution (H x V) H. frequency (kHz) V. frequency (Hz) Rating Signal mode
720 x 400
37.9 85.0 VESA TEXT
640 x 480 31.5 59.9 VESA VGA (60Hz)
640 x 480 37.9 72.8 VESA VGA (72Hz)
640 x 480 37.5 75.0 VESA VGA (75Hz)
640 x 480 43.3 85.0 VESA VGA (85Hz)
800 x 600 35.2 56.3 VESA SVGA (56Hz)
800 x 600 37.9 60.3 VESA SVGA (60Hz)
800 x 600 48.1 72.2 VESA SVGA (72Hz)
800 x 600 46.9 75.0 VESA SVGA (75Hz)
800 x 600 53.7 85.1 VESA SVGA (85Hz)
832 x 624 49.7 74.5 Mac 16” mode
1024 x 768 48.4 60.0 VESA XGA (60Hz)
1024 x 768 56.5 70.1 VESA XGA (70Hz)
1024 x 768 60.0 75.0 VESA XGA (75Hz)
1024 x 768 68.7 85.0 VESA XGA (85Hz)
1152 x 864 67.5 75.0 VESA
1152 x 864 (75Hz)
1280 x 768 47.7 60.0 VESA WXGA (60Hz)
1280 x 800 49.7 60.0 VESA
1280 x 800 (60Hz)
1280 x 960 60.0 60.0 VESA
1280 x 960 (60Hz)
1280 x 1024 64.0 60.0 VESA SXGA (60Hz)
1280 x 1024 80.0 75.0 VESA SXGA (75Hz)
*1 1280 x 1024 91.1 85.0 VESA SXGA (85Hz)
*2 1400 x 1050 65.2 60.0 VESA SXGA+ (60Hz)
1440 x 900 55.9 59.9 VESA WXGA+ (60Hz)
*3 1680 x 1050 65.3 60.0 VESA WSXGA+ (60Hz)
*1 1600 x 1200 75.0 60.0 VESA UXGA (60Hz)
NOTE
• Be sure to check jack type, signal level, timing and resolution before connecting this
projector to a PC.
• Some PCs may have multiple display screen modes. Use of some of these modes will not be possible with
this projector.
• Depending on the input signal, full-size display may not be possible in some cases. Refer to the number of
display pixels above.
• Although the projector can display signals with resolution up to UXGA (1600x1200), the signal will be
converted to the projector’s panel resolution before being displayed. The best display performance will be
achieved if the resolutions of the input signal and projector panel are identical.
• Automatic adjustment may not function correctly with some input signals.
• The image may not be displayed correctly when the input sync signal is a composite sync or a sync on G.
2
Initial set signals
Initial set signals
The following signals are used for the initial settings. The signal timing of some
PC models may be different. In such case, adjust the items V POSITION and H
POSITION in the IMAGE menu.
Resolution
(H x V)
Horizontal signal timing (μs) Vertical signal timing (lines)
Signal mode
(A) (B) (C) (D) (a) (b) (c) (d)
720 x 400
2.0 3.0 20.3 1.0 3 42 400 1 TEXT
640 x 480 3.8 1.9 25.4 0.6 2 33 480 10 VGA (60Hz)
640 x 480 1.3 4.1 20.3 0.8 3 28 480 9 VGA (72Hz)
640 x 480 2.0 3.8 20.3 0.5 3 16 480 1 VGA (75Hz)
640 x 480 1.6 2.2 17.8 1.6 3 25 480 1 VGA (85Hz)
800 x 600 2.0 3.6 22.2 0.7 2 22 600 1 SVGA (56Hz)
800 x 600 3.2 2.2 20.0 1.0 4 23 600 1 SVGA (60Hz)
800 x 600 2.4 1.3 16.0 1.1 6 23 600 37 SVGA (72Hz)
800 x 600 1.6 3.2 16.2 0.3 3 21 600 1 SVGA (75Hz)
800 x 600 1.1 2.7 14.2 0.6 3 27 600 1 SVGA (85Hz)
832 x 624 1.1 3.9 14.5 0.6 3 39 624 1 Mac 16" mode
1024 x 768 2.1 2.5 15.8 0.4 6 29 768 3 XGA (60Hz)
1024 x 768 1.8 1.9 13.7 0.3 6 29 768 3 XGA (70Hz)
1024 x 768 1.2 2.2 13.0 0.2 3 28 768 1 XGA (75Hz)
1024 x 768 1.0 2.2 10.8 0.5 3 36 768 1 XGA (85Hz)
1152 x 864 1.2 2.4 10.7 0.6 3 32 864 1 1152 x 864 (75Hz)
1280 x 768 1.7 2.5 16.0 0.8 3 23 768 1 WXGA (60Hz)
1280 x 800 1.6 2.4 15.3 0.8 3 24 800 1 WXGA (60Hz)
1280 x 960 1.0 2.9 11.9 0.9 3 36 960 1 WXGA (60Hz)
1280 x 1024 1.0 2.3 11.9 0.4 3 38 1024 1 SXGA (60Hz)
1280 x 1024 1.1 1.8 9.5 0.1 3 38 1024 1 SXGA (75Hz)
1280 x 1024 1.0 1.4 8.1 0.4 3 44 1024 1 SXGA (85Hz)
1400 x 1050 1.2 2.0 11.4 0.7 3 33 1050 1 SXGA+ (60Hz)
1440 x 900 1.4 2.2 13.5 0.8 6 25 900 3 WXGA+ (60Hz)
1680 x 1050 1.2 1.9 11.5 0.7 6 30 1050 3 WSXGA+ (60Hz)
1600 x 1200 1.2 1.9 9.9 0.4 3 46 1200 1 UXGA (60Hz)
Back porch (B) Front porch (D) Back porch (b) Front porch (d)
Active video (C)
Data Data
H. Sync. V. Sync.
Sync (A) Sync (a)
Active video (c)
3
Connection to the ports
Connection to the ports
NOTICE
►Use the cables with straight plugs, not L-shaped ones, as the
input ports of the projector are recessed.


 
AUDIO IN
1
2
3
AUDIO OUT
A
B
C
A
COMPUTER IN1,
B
COMPUTER IN2,
C
MONITOR OUT
D-sub 15pin mini shrink jack
<Computer signal>
• Video signal: RGB separate, Analog, 0.7Vp-p, 75Ω terminated (positive)
• H/V. sync. signal: TTL level (positive/negative)
• Composite sync. signal: TTL level
<Component video signal>
• Video signal:
-Y, Analog, 1.0±0.1Vp-p with composite sync, 75Ω terminated
-Cb/Pb, Analog, 0.7±0.1Vp-p, 75Ω terminated
-C
r
/P
r
, Analog, 0.7±0.1Vp-p 75Ω terminated
System: 480i@60, 480p@60, 576i@50, 576p@50, 720p@50/60, 1080i@50/60, 1080p@50/60
Pin Signal Pin Signal
1
Video Red, Cr/Pr
9
(No connection)
2 Video Green, Y 10 Ground
3 Video Blue, Cb/Pb 11 (No connection)
4 (No connection)
12
A
: SDA (DDC data), (No connection)
5 Ground
B
,
C
: (No connection)
6 Ground Red, Ground Cr/Pr 13 H. sync / Composite sync., (No connection)
7 Ground Green, Ground Y 14 V. sync., (No connection)
8 Ground Blue, Ground Cb/Pb
15
A
: SCL (DDC clock), (No connection)
B
,
C
: (No connection)
4
D
S-VIDEO
Mini DIN 4pin jack
• System: NTSC, PAL, SECAM, PAL-M, PAL-N, NTSC4.43, PAL (60Hz)
Pin Signal
1
Color signal 0.286Vp-p (NTSC, burst), 75Ω terminator
Color signal 0.300Vp-p (PAL/SECAM, burst) 75Ω terminator
2 Brightness signal, 1.0Vp-p, 75Ω terminator
3 Ground
4 Ground
Connection to the ports (continued)
4
3
2
1
E
VIDEO
RCA jack
• System: NTSC, PAL, SECAM, PAL-M, PAL-N, NTSC4.43, PAL (60Hz)
• 1.0±0.1Vp-p, 75Ω terminator
AUDIO IN
1
2
3
AUDIO OUT
D
F
E
F
HDMI
• Type :HDMI
TM
connector
• Audio signal : Linear PCM (Sampling rate; 32/44.1/48 kHz)
Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal
1 T.M.D.S. Data2 + 8 T.M.D.S. Data0 Shield 15 SCL
2 T.M.D.S. Data2 Shield 9 T.M.D.S. Data0 - 16 SDA
3 T.M.D.S. Data2 - 10 T.M.D.S. Clock + 17 DDC/CEC Ground
4
T.M.D.S. Data1 + 11 T.M.D.S. Clock Shield
18
+5V Power
5 T.M.D.S. Data1 Shield 12 T.M.D.S. Clock - 19 Hot Plug Detect
6 T.M.D.S. Data1 - 13 CEC
7 T.M.D.S. Data0 + 14 Reserved(N.C. on device)
19 17 15 13 11 9 7 5 3 1
18 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2
5
AUDIO IN
1
2
3
AUDIO OUT
Connection to the ports (continued)
K
M
G
AUDIO IN1,
H
AUDIO IN2
Ø3.5 stereo mini jack
• 200 mVrms 47kΩ terminator
AUDIO IN3
I
R,
J
L AUDIO OUT
K
R,
L
L
RCA jack x2 RCA jack x2
• 200 mVrms 47kΩ terminator • 200 mVrms 1kΩ output impedance
M
MIC
Ø3.5 mono mini jack
<Low level>
• 2 mVrms, 1kΩ terminator
<High level>
• 20 mVrms, 1kΩ terminator
I
J
G
H
L
6
Connection to the ports (continued)
N
CONTROL
D-sub 9pin plug
• About the details of RS-232C communication,
please refer to the next chapter.
Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal
1 (No connection) 4 (No connection) 7 RTS
2 RD 5 Ground 8 CTS
3 TD 6 (No connection) 9 (No connection)
6
54321
9
8
7
AUDIO IN
1
2
3
AUDIO OUT
P
USB
TYPE B
USB B type jack
Pin Signal
1 +5V
2 - Data
3 + Data
4 Ground
4
3
12
O
USB TYPE A (x2)
USB A type jack
4
3
2 1
Pin Signal
1 +5V
2 - Data
3 + Data
4 Ground
Q
LAN
RJ-45 jack
87654
3
21
Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal
1TX+ 4- 7-
2TX- 5- 8-
3 RX+ 6 RX-
P
O
N
Q
7
AUDIO IN
1
2
3
AUDIO OUT
Y CB/PB CR/PR
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
To input component video signal to COMPUTER IN ports
ex.
Connection to the ports (continued)
To input component video signal to the COMPUTER IN1 or COMPUTER IN2 port
of the projector, use a RCA to D-sub cable or adapter.
For about the pin description of the required cable or adapter, refer to the
descriptions about COMPUTER IN
1 or COMPUTER IN2 port (
3
).
RCA plugs
D-sub plug
VCR/DVD/Blu-ray
Disc player
RCA connectors
8
RS-232C Communication
RS-232C Communication
When the projector connects to the computer by RS-232C communication, the
projector can be controlled with RS-232C commands from the computer.
For details of RS-232C commands, refer to RS-232C Communication / Network
command table (
17
).
Connection
1.
Turn off the projector and the computer.
2.
Connect the projector's CONTROL port and the computer's RS-232C port
with a RS-232C cable (cross). Use the cable that fulfi lls the specifi cation
shown in fi gure.
3.
Turn the computer on, and after the computer has started up turn the projector
on.
4.
Set the COMMUNICATION TYPE to OFF. (
OPTION menu - SERVICE -
COMMUNICATION in the Operating Guide)
RS-232C Cable
(cross)
CONTROL
RS-232C
CD (1) (1)
−
RD(2) (2) RD
TD (3) (3) TD
DTR (4) (4)
−
GND (5) (5) GND
DSR (6) (6)
−
RTS (7) (7) RTS
DTS (8) (8) CTS
RI (9) (9)
−
CONTROL port
of the projector
RS-232C port
of the computer
1
2
4
3
8
9
5
76
6
54321
9
8
7
9
RS-232C Communication (continued)
Communication settings
1. Protocol
19200bps,8N1
2. Command format
("h" shows hexadecimal)
Byte Number
01 2 3456
789101112
Command
Action
Header Data
Header
code
Packet
Data
size
CRC
flag
Action Type
Setting
code
LH LHLHLHLHLH
<SET>
Change setting to
desired value [(bL)(bH)]
by [(cL)(cH)].
BEh EFh 03h 06h 00h
(aL) (aH) 01h 00h (bL) (bH) (cL) (cH)
<GET>
Read projector
internal setup value [(bL)
(bH)] .
(aL) (aH) 02h 00h (bL) (bH) 00h 00h
<INCREMENT>
Increment setup value
[(bL)(bH)] by 1.
(aL) (aH) 04h 00h (bL) (bH) 00h 00h
<DECREMENT>
Decrement setup value
[(bL)(bH)] by 1.
(aL) (aH) 05h 00h (bL) (bH) 00h 00h
<EXECUTE> Run a
command [(bL)(bH)].
(aL) (aH) 06h 00h (bL) (bH) 00h 00h
[Header code], [Packet], [Data size]
Set [BEh, EFh, 03h, 06h, 00h] to byte number 0
~
4.
[CRC flag]
For byte number
5, 6,
refer to
RS-232C Communication / Network command
table
(
17
)
.
[Action]
Set functional code to byte number 7, 8.
<
SET
> = [01h, 00h], <
GET
> = [02h, 00h], <
INCREMENT
> = [04h, 00h]
<DECREMENT> = [05h, 00h], <EXECUTE> = [06h, 00h]
Refer
to
the
command table above.
[Type], [Setting code]
For byte number
9
∼
12
, refer to
RS-232C Communication / Network command
table
(
17
)
.
10
RS-232C Communication (continued)
3. Response code / Error code
("h" shows hexadecimal)
(1) ACK reply : 06h
When the projector receives the Set, Increment, Decrement or Execute
command correctly, the projector changes the setting data for the specified
item by [Type], and it returns the code.
(2) NAK reply : 15h
When the projector cannot understand the received command, the projector
returns the error code.
In such a case, check the sending code and send the same command again.
(3) Error reply : 1Ch + 0000h
When the projector cannot execute the received command for any reasons,
the projector returns the error code.
In such a case, check the sending code and the setting status of the projector.
(4) Data reply : 1Dh + xxxxh
When the projector receives the GET command correctly, the projector returns
the responce code and 2 bytes of data.
NOTE • For connecting the projector to your devices, please read the
manual for each devices, and connect them correctly with suitable cables.
• Operation cannot be guaranteed when the projector receives an undefined
command or data.
• Provide an interval of at least 40ms between the response code and any other
code.
• The projector outputs test data when the power supply is switched ON, and
when the lamp is lit. Ignore this data.
• Commands are not accepted during warm-up.
• When the data length is greater than indicated by the data length code, the
projector ignore the excess data code. Conversely when the data length is
shorter than indicated by the data length code, the projector returns the error
code to the computer.
11
When the projector connects network, the projector can be controlled with RS-
232C commands from the computer with web browser.
For details of RS-232C commands, refer to RS-232C Communication / Network
command table
(
17
).
Command Control via the Network
Connection
1.
Turn off the projector and the computer.
2.
If you use wired LAN, connect the projector's LAN port to the computer's
LAN port with a LAN cable. Use the cable that fulfi lls the specifi cation shown
in fi gure. If you use wireless LAN, insert the USB wireless adapter into the
projector's USB TYPE A port.
3.
Turn the computer on, and after the computer has started up turn the
projector on.
NOTE • If data is transferred via wireless and wired LAN at the same time,
the projector may not be able to process the data correctly.
Command Control via the Network
LAN cable (CAT-5 or greater)
LAN
LAN
12
Communication Port
The following two ports are assigned for the command control.
TCP #23
TCP #9715
Configure the following items form a web browser when command control is used.
Port Settings
Network Control
Port1 (Port: 23)
Port open
Click the [Enable] check box to open [Network
Control Port1 (Port: 23)] to use TCP #23.
Default setting is “Enable”.
Authentication
Click the [Enable] check box for the
[Authentication] setting when authentication
is required.
Default setting is “Disable”.
Network Control
Port2 (Port: 9715)
Port open
Click the [Enable] check box to open [Network
Control Port2 (Port: 9715)] to use TCP
#9715.
Default setting is “Enable”.
Authentication
Click the [Enable] check box for the
[Authentication] setting when authentication
is required.
Default setting is “Enable”.
Command Control via the Network (continued)
When the authentication setting is enabled, the following settings are required.
Security Settings
Network Control
Authentication
Password
Enter the desired authentication password.
ConfirmThis setting will be the same for
[Network Control Port1 (Port: 23)] and
[Network Control Port2 (Port: 9715)].
Default setting is blank.
Re-enter
Authentication
Password
13
Command Control via the Network (continued)
Command control settings
[TCP #23]
1. Command format
Same as RS-232C communication, refer to RS-232C Communicaton command format.
2. Response code / Error code ("h" shows hexadecimal)
Four of the response / error code used for TCP#23 are the same as RS-232C
Communication (1)~(4). One authentication error reply (5) is added.
(1) ACK reply : 06h
Refer to RS-232C communication
(
10
).
(2) NAK reply : 15h
Refer to RS-232C communication
(
10
).
(3) Error reply : 1Ch + 0000h
Refer to RS-232C communication
(
10
).
(4) Data reply : 1Dh + xxxxh
Refer to RS-232C communication
(
10
).
(5) Authentication error reply : 1Fh + 0400h
When authentication error occurred, the projector returns the error code.
[TCP #9715]
1. Command format
The commands some datum are added to the head and the end of the ones of
TCP#9715 are used.
Header Data length RS-232C command Check sum Connection ID
0×02 0×0D 13 bytes 1 byte 1 byte
[Header]
02, Fixed
[Data Length]
RS-232C commands byte length (0×0D, Fixed)
[RS-232C commands]
Refer to RS-232C Communication command format
(
9
)
.
[Check Sum]
This is the value to make zero on the addition of the lower 8 bits from the header
to the checksum.
[Connection ID]
Random value from 0 to 255 (This value is attached to the reply data).
NOTE • Operation cannot be guaranteed when the projector receives an
undefined command or data.
• Provide an interval of at least 40ms between the response code and any other
code.
• Commands are not accepted during warm-up.
14
2.
Response code / Error code
("h" shows hexadecimal)
The connection ID is attached for the TCP#23's response / error codes are
used. The connection ID is same as the sending command format.
(1) ACK reply : 06h + ××h (××h : connection ID)
(2) NAK reoly : 15h + ××h
(3) Error reply : 1Ch + 0000h + ××h
(4) Data reply : 1Dh + xxxxh + ××h
(5) Authentication error reply : 1Fh + 0400h + ××h
(6) Projector busy reply: 1Fh + ××××h + ××h
When the projector is too busy to receives the command ,the projector
returens the error code.
In such a case, check the sending code and send the same command again.
Automatic Connection Break
The TCP connection will be automatically disconnected after there is no
communication for 30 seconds after being established.
Authentication
The projector does not accept commands without authentication success
when authentication is enabled. The projector uses a challenge response type
authentication with an MD5 (Message Digest 5) algorithm. When the projector is
using a LAN, a random 8 bytes will be returned if authentication is enabled. Bind
this received 8 bytes and the authentication password and digest this data with
the MD5 algorithm and add this in front of the commands to send.
Following is a sample if the authentication password is set to “password” and the
random 8 bytes are “a572f60c”.
1) Select the projector.
2) Receive the random 8 bytes “a572f60c” from the projector.
3) Bind the random 8 bytes “a572f60c” and the authentication password
“password” and it becomes “a572f60cpassword”.
4) Digest this bind “a572f60cpassword” with MD5 algorithm.
It will be “e3d97429adffa11bce1f7275813d4bde”.
5) Add this “e3d97429adffa11bce1f7275813d4bde” in front of the commands and
send the data.
Send “e3d97429adffa11bce1f7275813d4bde”+command.
6) When the sending data is correct, the command will be performed and the
reply data will be returned. Otherwise, an authentication error will be returned.
NOTE • As for the transmission of the second or subsequent commands,
the authentication data can be omitted when the same connection.
Command Control via the Network (continued)
15
This projector is equipped with NETWORK BRIDGE function.
When the projector connects to the computer by wired or wireles LAN
communicaton, an external device that is connected with this projector by RS-
232C communication can be controlled from the computer as a network terminal.
For details, see the 6. Network Bridge function in the Network Guide.
Network Bridge Communication
NOTE • If data is transferred via wireless and wired LAN at the same time,
the projector may not be able to process the data correctly.
Connection
1.
If you use wired LAN, connect the computer's LAN port and the projector's LAN
port with a LAN cable. Use the cable that fulfi lls the specifi cation shown in fi gure.
If you use wireless LAN, insert the USB wireless adapter into the projector’s
USB TYPE A port.
2.
Connect the projector's CONTROL port and the RS-232C port of the devices
that you want to control with a RS-232C cable.
3.
Turn the computer on, and after the computer has started up turn the
projector on.
4.
Set the COMMUNICATION TYPE to
NETWORK BRIDGE
. (
OPTION menu
- SERVICE - COMMUNICATION in the Operating Guide)
Network Bridge Communication
LAN
CONTROL
LAN
RS-232C
LAN cable
(CAT-5 or greater)
16
Communication settings
For communication setting, use the OPTION - SERVICE - COMMUNICATION
menu. (
OPTION menu - SERVICE - COMMUNICATION in the Operating
Guide)
Item Condition
BAUD RATE 4800bps / 9600bps / 19200bps / 38400bps
Data length 8 bit (fixed)
PARITY NONE/ODD/EVEN
Start bit 1 bit (fixed)
Stop bit 1 bit (fixed)
Transmission method HALF-DUPLEX/FULL-DUPLEX
NOTE •
For connecting the projector to your devices, please read the
manual for each devices, and connect them correctly with suitable cables.
• Turn off (the power of ) both the projector and other devices and unplug ,
beore connecting them.
• For details of Transmission method, refer to 6.4 Transmission method in the
Network Guide.
Network Bridge Communication (continued)
17
RS-232C Communication / Network command table
(continued on next page)
RS-232C Communication / Network command table
Names Operation Type Header
Command Data
CRC Action Type Setting Code
Power
Set
Turn off BE EF 03 06 00 2A D3 01 00 00 60 00 00
Turn on BE EF 03 06 00 BA D2 01 00 00 60 01 00
Get
BE EF 03 06 00 19 D3 02 00 00 60 00 00
[Example return]
00 00 01 00 02 00
[Off] [On] [Cool down]
Input Source
Set
COMPUTER IN1 BE EF 03 06 00 FE D2 01 00 00 20 00 00
COMPUTER IN2 BE EF 03 06 00 3E D0 01 00 00 20 04 00
HDMI BE EF 03 06 00 0E D2 01 00 00 20 03 00
S-VIDEO BE EF 03 06 00 9E D3 01 00 00 20 02 00
VIDEO BE EF 03 06 00 6E D3 01 00 00 20 01 00
LAN BE EF 03 06 00 CE D5 01 00 00 20 0B 00
USB TYPE A BE EF 03 06 00 5E D1 01 00 00 20 06 00
USB TYPE B BE EF 03 06 00 FE D7 01 00 00 20 0C 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 CD D2 02 00 00 20 00 00
Error Status Get
BE EF 03 06 00 D9 D8 02 00 20 60 00 00
[Example return]
00 00 01 00 02 00 03 00
[Normal] [Cover error] [Fan error] [Lamp error]
04 00 05 00 07 00 08 00
[Temp error] [Air flow error] [Cold error] [Filter error]
MAGNIFY
Get BE EF 03 06 00 7C D2 02 00 07 30 00 00
Increment BE EF 03 06 00 1A D2 04 00 07 30 00 00
Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 CB D3 05 00 07 30 00 00
Magnify Position H
Get BE EF 03 06 00 C8 D7 02 00 10 30 00 00
Increment BE EF 03 06 00 AE D7 04 00 10 30 00 00
Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 7F D6 05 00 10 30 00 00
Magnify Position V
Get BE EF 03 06 00 34 D6 02 00 11 30 00 00
Increment BE EF 03 06 00 52 D6 04 00 11 30 00 00
Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 83 D7 05 00 11 30 00 00
FREEZE
Set
NORMAL BE EF 03 06 00 83 D2 01 00 02 30 00 00
FREEZE BE EF 03 06 00 13 D3 01 00 02 30 01 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 B0 D2 02 00 02 30 00 00
PICTURE MODE
Set
NORMAL BE EF 03 06 00 23 F6 01 00 BA 30 00 00
CINEMA BE EF 03 06 00 B3 F7 01 00 BA 30 01 00
DYNAMIC BE EF 03 06 00 E3 F4 01 00 BA 30 04 00
BOARD(BLACK) BE EF 03 06 00 E3 EF 01 00 BA 30 20 00
BOARD(GREEN) BE EF 03 06 00 73 EE 01 00 BA 30 21 00
WHITEBOARD BE EF 03 06 00 83 EE 01 00 BA 30 22 00
DAYTIME BE EF 03 06 00 E3 C7 01 00 BA 30 40 00
PHOTO BE EF 03 06 00 73 F5 01 00 BA 30 05 00
Get
BE EF 03 06 00 10 F6 02 00 BA 30 00 00
[Example return]
00 00 01 00 04 00 10 00
[Normal] [Cinema] [Dynamic] [Custom]
20 00 21 00 22 00 40 00
[BOARD(BLACK)] [BOARD(GREEN)] [WHITEBOARD] [DAY TIME]
18
RS-232C Communication / Network command table (continued)
(continued on next page)
Names Operation Type Header
Command Data
CRC Action Type Setting Code
BRIGHTNESS
Get
BE EF 03 06 00 89 D2 02 00 03 20 00 00
Increment
BE EF 03 06 00 EF D2 04 00 03 20 00 00
Decrement
BE EF 03 06 00 3E D3 05 00 03 20 00 00
BRIGHTNESS Reset Execute
BE EF 03 06 00 58 D3 06 00 00 70 00 00
CONTRAST
Get
BE EF 03 06 00 FD D3 02 00 04 20 00 00
Increment
BE EF 03 06 00 9B D3 04 00 04 20 00 00
Decrement
BE EF 03 06 00 4A D2 05 00 04 20 00 00
CONTRAST Reset Execute
BE EF 03 06 00 A4 D2 06 00 01 70 00 00
GAMMA
Set
DEFAULT-1
BE EF 03 06 00 07 E9 01 00 A1 30 20 00
CUSTOM-1
BE EF 03 06 00 07 FD 01 00 A1 30 10 00
DEFAULT-2
BE EF 03 06 00 97 E8 01 00 A1 30 21 00
CUSTOM-2
BE EF 03 06 00 97 FC 01 00 A1 30 11 00
DEFAULT-3
BE EF 03 06 00 67 E8 01 00 A1 30 22 00
CUSTOM-3
BE EF 03 06 00 67 FC 01 00 A1 30 12 00
DEFAULT-4
BE EF 03 06 00 F7 E9 01 00 A1 30 23 00
CUSTOM-4
BE EF 03 06 00 F7 FD 01 00 A1 30 13 00
DEFAULT-5
BE EF 03 06 00 C7 EB 01 00 A1 30 24 00
CUSTOM-5
BE EF 03 06 00 C7 FF 01 00 A1 30 14 00
DEFAULT-6
BE EF 03 06 00 57 EA 01 00 A1 30 25 00
CUSTOM-6
BE EF 03 06 00 57 FE 01 00 A1 30 15 00
DEFAULT-7
BE EF 03 06 00 A7 EA 01 00 A1 30 26 00
CUSTOM-7
BE EF 03 06 00 A7 FE 01 00 A1 30 16 00
Get
BE EF 03 06 00 F4 F0 02 00 A1 30 00 00
User Gamma Pattern
Set
Off
BE EF 03 06 00 FB FA 01 00 80 30 00 00
9 steps gray scale
BE EF 03 06 00 6B FB 01 00 80 30 01 00
15 steps gray scale
BE EF 03 06 00 9B FB 01 00 80 30 02 00
Ramp
BE EF 03 06 00 0B FA 01 00 80 30 03 00
Get
BE EF 03 06 00 C8 FA 02 00 80 30 00 00
User Gamma Point 1
Get
BE EF 03 06 00 08 FE 02 00 90 30 00 00
Increment
BE EF 03 06 00 6E FE 04 00 90 30 00 00
Decrement
BE EF 03 06 00 BF FF 05 00 90 30 00 00
User Gamma Point 1 Reset
Execute
BE EF 03 06 00 58 C2 06 00 50 70 00 00
User Gamma Point 2
Get
BE EF 03 06 00 F4 FF 02 00 91 30 00 00
Increment
BE EF 03 06 00 92 FF 04 00 91 30 00 00
Decrement
BE EF 03 06 00 43 FE 05 00 91 30 00 00
User Gamma Point 2 Reset
Execute
BE EF 03 06 00 A4 C3 06 00 51 70 00 00
User Gamma Point 3
Get
BE EF 03 06 00 B0 FF 02 00 92 30 00 00
Increment
BE EF 03 06 00 D6 FF 04 00 92 30 00 00
Decrement
BE EF 03 06 00 07 FE 05 00 92 30 00 00
User Gamma Point 3 Reset
Execute
BE EF 03 06 00 E0 C3 06 00 52 70 00 00
User Gamma Point 4
Get
BE EF 03 06 00 4C FE 02 00 93 30 00 00
Increment
BE EF 03 06 00 2A FE 04 00 93 30 00 00
Decrement
BE EF 03 06 00 FB FF 05 00 93 30 00 00
User Gamma Point 4 Reset
Execute
BE EF 03 06 00 1C C2 06 00 53 70 00 00
User Gamma Point 5
Get
BE EF 03 06 00 38 FF 02 00 94 30 00 00
Increment
BE EF 03 06 00 5E FF 04 00 94 30 00 00
Decrement
BE EF 03 06 00 8F FE 05 00 94 30 00 00
User Gamma Point 5 Reset
Execute
BE EF 03 06 00 68 C3 06 00
54 70 00 00
19
RS-232C Communication / Network command table (continued)
Names Operation Type Header
Command Data
CRC Action Type Setting Code
User Gamma Point 6
Get
BE EF 03 06 00 C4 FE 02 00 95 30 00 00
Increment
BE EF 03 06 00 A2 FE 04 00 95 30 00 00
Decrement
BE EF 03 06 00 73 FF 05 00 95 30 00 00
User Gamma Point 6 Reset
Execute
BE EF 03 06 00 94 C2 06 00 55 70 00 00
User Gamma Point 7
Get
BE EF 03 06 00 80 FE 02 00 96 30 00 00
Increment
BE EF 03 06 00 E6 FE 04 00 96 30 00 00
Decrement
BE EF 03 06 00 37 FF 05 00 96 30 00 00
User Gamma Point 7 Reset
Execute
BE EF 03 06 00 D0 C2 06 00 56 70 00 00
User Gamma Point 8
Get BE EF 03 06 00 7C FF 02 00 97 30 00 00
Increment BE EF 03 06 00 1A FF 04 00 97 30 00 00
Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 CB FE 05 00 97 30 00 00
User Gamma Point 8 Reset
Execute BE EF 03 06 00 2C C3 06 00 57 70 00 00
COLOR TEMP
Set
1 HIGH BE EF 03 06 00 0B F5 01 00 B0 30 03 00
1 CUSTOM BE EF 03 06 00 CB F8 01 00 B0 30 13 00
2 MID BE EF 03 06 00 9B F4 01 00 B0 30 02 00
2 CUSTOM BE EF 03 06 00 5B F9 01 00 B0 30 12 00
3 LOW BE EF 03 06 00 6B F4 01 00 B0 30 01 00
3 CUSTOM BE EF 03 06 00 AB F9 01 00 B0 30 11 00
4 Hi-BRIGHT-1 BE EF 03 06 00 3B F2 01 00 B0 30 08 00
4 CUSTOM BE EF 03 06 00 FB FF 01 00 B0 30 18 00
5 Hi-BRIGHT-2 BE EF 03 06 00 AB F3 01 00 B0 30 09 00
5 CUSTOM BE EF 03 06 00 6B FE 01 00 B0 30 19 00
6 Hi-BRIGHT-3 BE EF 03 06 00 5B F3 01 00 B0 30 0A 00
6 CUSTOM BE EF 03 06 00 9B FE 01 00 B0 30 1A 00
7 Hi-BRIGHT-4 BE EF 03 06 00 CB F2 01 00 B0 30 0B 00
7 CUSTOM BE EF 03 06 00 0B FF 01 00 B0 30 1B 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 C8 F5 02 00 B0 30 00 00
COLOR TEMP GAIN R
Get BE EF 03 06 00 34 F4 02 00 B1 30 00 00
Increment BE EF 03 06 00 52 F4 04 00 B1 30 00 00
Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 83 F5 05 00 B1 30 00 00
COLOR TEMP GAIN R
Reset
Execute BE EF 03 06 00 10 C6 06 00 46 70 00 00
COLOR TEMP GAIN G
Get BE EF 03 06 00 70 F4 02 00 B2 30 00 00
Increment BE EF 03 06 00 16 F4 04 00 B2 30 00 00
Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 C7 F5 05 00 B2 30 00 00
COLOR TEMP GAIN G
Reset
Execute BE EF 03 06 00 EC C7 06 00 47 70 00 00
COLOR TEMP GAIN B
Get BE EF 03 06 00 8C F5 02 00 B3 30 00 00
Increment BE EF 03 06 00 EA F5 04 00 B3 30 00 00
Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 3B F4 05 00 B3 30 00 00
COLOR TEMP GAIN B
Reset
Execute BE EF 03 06 00 F8 C4 06 00 48 70 00 00
COLOR TEMP
OFFSET R
Get BE EF 03 06 00 04 F5 02 00 B5 30 00 00
Increment BE EF 03 06 00 62 F5 04 00 B5 30 00 00
Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 B3 F4 05 00 B5 30 00 00
COLOR TEMP
OFFSET R Reset
Execute BE EF 03 06 00 40 C5 06 00 4A 70 00 00
(continued on next page)
20
RS-232C Communication / Network command table (continued)
Names Operation Type Header
Command Data
CRC Action Type Setting Code
COLOR TEMP
OFFSET G
Get BE EF 03 06 00 40 F5 02 00 B6 30 00 00
Increment BE EF 03 06 00 26 F5 04 00 B6 30 00 00
Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 F7 F4 05 00 B6 30 00 00
COLOR TEMP
OFFSET G Reset
Execute BE EF 03 06 00 BC C4 06 00 4B 70 00 00
COLOR TEMP
OFFSET B
Get BE EF 03 06 00 BC F4 02 00 B7 30 00 00
Increment BE EF 03 06 00 DA F4 04 00 B7 30 00 00
Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 0B F5 05 00 B7 30 00 00
COLOR TEMP
OFFSET B Reset
Execute BE EF 03 06 00 C8 C5 06 00 4C 70 00 00
COLOR
Get BE EF 03 06 00 B5 72 02 00 02 22 00 00
Increment BE EF 03 06 00 D3 72 04 00 02 22 00 00
Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 02 73 05 00 02 22 00 00
COLOR Reset Execute BE EF 03 06 00 80 D0 06 00 0A 70 00 00
TINT
Get BE EF 03 06 00 49 73 02 00 03 22 00 00
Increment BE EF 03 06 00 2F 73 04 00 03 22 00 00
Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 FE 72 05 00 03 22 00 00
TINT Reset Execute BE EF 03 06 00 7C D1 06 00 0B 70 00 00
SHARPNESS
Get BE EF 03 06 00 F1 72 02 00 01 22 00 00
Increment BE EF 03 06 00 97 72 04 00 01 22 00 00
Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 46 73 05 00 01 22 00 00
SHARPNESS Reset Execute BE EF 03 06 00 C4 D0 06 00 09 70 00 00
MY MEMORY Load Set
1 BE EF 03 06 00 0E D7 01 00 14 20 00 00
2 BE EF 03 06 00 9E D6 01 00 14 20 01 00
3 BE EF 03 06 00 6E D6 01 00 14 20 02 00
4 BE EF 03 06 00 FE D7 01 00 14 20 03 00
PRESET BE EF 03 06 00 CE AD 01 00 14 20 10 00
MY MEMORY Save Set
1 BE EF 03 06 00 F2 D6 01 00 15 20 00 00
2 BE EF 03 06 00 62 D7 01 00 15 20 01 00
3 BE EF 03 06 00 92 D7 01 00 15 20 02 00
4 BE EF 03 06 00 02 D6 01 00 15 20 03 00
ASPECT
Set
4:3 BE EF 03 06 00 9E D0 01 00 08 20 00 00
16:9 BE EF 03 06 00 0E D1 01 00 08 20 01 00
14:9 BE EF 03 06 00 CE D6 01 00 08 20 09 00
16:10 BE EF 03 06 00 3E D6 01 00 08 20 0A 00
(*) NATIVE BE EF 03 06 00 5E D7 01 00 08 20 08 00
NORMAL BE EF 03 06 00 5E DD 01 00 08 20 10 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 AD D0 02 00 08 20 00 00
OVER SCAN
Get BE EF 03 06 00 91 70 02 00 09 22 00 00
Increment BE EF 03 06 00 F7 70 04 00 09 22 00 00
Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 26 71 05 00 09 22 00 00
OVER SCAN Reset Execute
BE EF 03 06 00 EC D9 06 00 27 70 00 00
V POSITION
Get BE EF 03 06 00 0D 83 02 00 00 21 00 00
Increment BE EF 03 06 00 6B 83 04 00 00 21 00 00
Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 BA 82 05 00 00 21 00 00
V POSITION Reset Execute
BE EF 03 06 00 E0 D2 06 00 02 70 00 00
(*) only for CP-WX2515WN/CP-WX3015WN
(continued on next page)
21
RS-232C Communication / Network command table (continued)
Names Operation Type Header
Command Data
CRC Action Type Setting Code
H POSITION
Get
BE EF 03 06 00 F1 82 02 00 01 21 00 00
Increment
BE EF 03 06 00 97 82 04 00 01 21 00 00
Decrement
BE EF 03 06 00 46 83 05 00 01 21 00 00
H POSITION Reset Execute
BE EF 03 06 00 1C D3 06 00 03 70 00 00
H PHASE
Get
BE EF 03 06 00 49 83 02 00 03 21 00 00
Increment
BE EF 03 06 00 2F 83 04 00 03 21 00 00
Decrement
BE EF 03 06 00 FE 82 05 00 03 21 00 00
H SIZE
Get
BE EF 03 06 00 B5 82 02 00 02 21 00 00
Increment
BE EF 03 06 00 D3 82 04 00 02 21 00 00
Decrement
BE EF 03 06 00 02 83 05 00 02 21 00 00
H SIZE Reset Execute
BE EF 03 06 00 68 D2 06 00 04 70 00 00
AUTO ADJUST
EXECUTE
Execute BE EF 03 06 00 91 D0 06 00 0A 20 00 00
PROGRESSIVE
Set
OFF
BE EF 03 06 00 4A 72 01 00 07 22 00 00
TV
BE EF 03 06 00 DA 73 01 00 07 22 01 00
FILM
BE EF 03 06 00 2A 73 01 00 07 22 02 00
Get
BE EF 03 06 00 79 72 02 00 07 22 00 00
VIDEO NR
Set
LOW
BE EF 03 06 00 26 72 01 00 06 22 01 00
MID
BE EF 03 06 00 D6 72 01 00 06 22 02 00
HIGH
BE EF 03 06 00 46 73 01 00 06 22 03 00
Get
BE EF 03 06 00 85 73 02 00 06 22 00 00
COLOR SPACE
Set
AUTO
BE EF 03 06 00 0E 72 01 00 04 22 00 00
RGB
BE EF 03 06 00 9E 73 01 00 04 22 01 00
SMPTE240
BE EF 03 06 00 6E 73 01 00 04 22 02 00
REC709
BE EF 03 06 00 FE 72 01 00 04 22 03 00
REC601
BE EF 03 06 00 CE 70 01 00 04 22 04 00
Get
BE EF 03 06 00 3D 72 02 00 04 22 00 00
S-VIDEO FORMAT
Set
AUTO
BE EF 03 06 00 E6 70 01 00 12 22 0A 00
NTSC
BE EF 03 06 00 86 74 01 00 12 22 04 00
PAL
BE EF 03 06 00 16 75 01 00 12 22 05 00
SECAM
BE EF 03 06 00 16 70 01 00 12 22 09 00
NTSC4.43
BE EF 03 06 00 26 77 01 00 12 22 02 00
M-PAL
BE EF 03 06 00 86 71 01 00 12 22 08 00
N-PAL
BE EF 03 06 00 76 74 01 00 12 22 07 00
Get
BE EF 03 06 00 75 76 02 00 12 22 00 00
C-VIDEO FORMAT
Set
AUTO
BE EF 03 06 00 A2 70 01 00 11 22 0A 00
NTSC
BE EF 03 06 00 C2 74 01 00 11 22 04 00
PAL
BE EF 03 06 00 52 75 01 00 11 22 05 00
SECAM
BE EF 03 06 00 52 70 01 00 11 22 09 00
NTSC4.43
BE EF 03 06 00 62 77 01 00 11 22 02 00
M-PAL
BE EF 03 06 00 C2 71 01 00 11 22 08 00
N-PAL
BE EF 03 06 00 32 74 01 00 11 22 07 00
Get
BE EF 03 06 00 31 76 02 00 11 22 00 00
HDMI FORMAT
Set
AUTO
BE EF 03 06 00 BA 77 01 00 13 22 00 00
VIDEO
BE EF 03 06 00 2A 76 01 00 13 22 01 00
COMPUTER
BE EF 03 06 00 DA 76 01 00 13 22 02 00
Get
BE EF 03 06 00 89 77 02 00 13 22 00 00
(continued on next page)
22
RS-232C Communication / Network command table (continued)
Names Operation Type Header
Command Data
CRC Action Type Setting Code
HDMI RANGE
Set
AUTO
BE EF 03 06 00 86 D8 01 00 22 20 00 00
NORMAL
BE EF 03 06 00 16 D9 01 00 22 20 01 00
ENHANCED
BE EF 03 06 00 E6 D9 01 00 22 20 02 00
Get
BE EF 03 06 00 B5 D8 02 00 22 20 00 00
COMPUTER IN1
Set
AUTO
BE EF 03 06 00 CE D6 01 00 10 20 03 00
SYNC ON G OFF
BE EF 03 06 00 5E D7 01 00 10 20 02 00
Get
BE EF 03 06 00 0D D6 02 00 10 20 00 00
COMPUTER IN2
Set
AUTO BE EF 03 06 00 32 D7 01 00 11 20 03 00
SYNC ON G OFF BE EF 03 06 00 A2 D6 01 00 11 20 02 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 F1 D7 02 00 11 20 00 00
FRAME LOCK –
COMPUTER IN1
Set
OFF
BE EF 03 06 00 3B C2 01 00 50 30 00 00
ON
BE EF 03 06 00 AB C3 01 00 50 30 01 00
Get
BE EF 03 06 00 08 C2 02 00 50 30 00 00
FRAME LOCK –
COMPUTER IN2
Set
OFF BE EF 03 06 00 0B C3 01 00 54 30 00 00
ON BE EF 03 06 00 9B C2 01 00 54 30 01 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 38 C3 02 00 54 30 00 00
FRAME LOCK –
HDMI
Set
OFF
BE EF 03 06 00 7F C2 01 00 53 30 00 00
ON
BE EF 03 06 00 EF C3 01 00 53 30 01 00
Get
BE EF 03 06 00 4C C2 02 00 53 30 00 00
AUTO KEYSTONE
EXECUTE
Execute BE EF 03 06 00 E5 D1 06 00 0D 20 00 00
KEYSTONE V
Get
BE EF 03 06 00 B9 D3 02 00 07 20 00 00
Increment
BE EF 03 06 00 DF D3 04 00 07 20 00 00
Decrement
BE EF 03 06 00 0E D2 05 00 07 20 00 00
KEYSTONE V Reset Execute
BE EF 03 06 00 08 D0 06 00 0C 70 00 00
AUTO ECO MODE
Set
OFF
BE EF 03 06 00 FB 27 01 00 10 33 00 00
ON
BE EF 03 06 00 6B 26 01 00 10 33 01 00
Get
BE EF 03 06 00 C8 27 02 00 10 33 00 00
ECO MODE
Set
NORMAL
BE EF 03 06 00 3B 23 01 00 00 33 00 00
ECO
BE EF 03 06 00 AB 22 01 00 00 33 01 00
INTELLIGENT ECO
BE EF 03 06 00 FB 2E 01 00 00 33 10 00
SAVER
BE EF 03 06 00 FB 3A 01 00 00 33 20 00
Get
BE EF 03 06 00 08 23 02 00 00 33 00 00
INSTALLATION
Set
FRONT / DESKTOP
BE EF 03 06 00 C7 D2 01 00 01 30 00 00
REAR / DESKTOP
BE EF 03 06 00 57 D3 01 00 01 30 01 00
REAR / CEILING
BE EF 03 06 00 A7 D3 01 00 01 30 02 00
FRONT / CEILING
BE EF 03 06 00 37 D2 01 00 01 30 03 00
Get
BE EF 03 06 00 F4 D2 02 00 01 30 00 00
STANDBY MODE
Set
NORMAL
BE EF 03 06 00 D6 D2 01 00 01 60 00 00
SAVING
BE EF 03 06 00 46 D3 01 00 01 60 01 00
Get
BE EF 03 06 00 E5 D2 02 00 01 60 00 00
MONITOR OUT -
COMPUTER IN1
Set
COMPUTER IN1
BE EF 03 06 00 3E F4 01 00 B0 20 00 00
OFF
BE EF 03 06 00 CE B5 01 00 B0 20 FF 00
Get
BE EF 03 06 00 0D F4 02 00 B0 20 00 00
MONITOR OUT -
COMPUTER IN2
Set
COMPUTER IN2 BE EF 03 06 00 CE F7 01 00 B4 20 04 00
OFF BE EF 03 06 00 FE B4 01 00 B4 20 FF 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 3D F5 02 00 B4 20
00 00
(continued on next page)
23
RS-232C Communication / Network command table (continued)
Names Operation Type Header
Command Data
CRC Action Type Setting Code
MONITOR OUT -
S-VIDEO
Set
COMPUTER IN1
BE EF 03 06 00 86 F5 01 00 B2 20 00 00
COMPUTER IN2 BE EF 03 06 00 46 F7 01 00 B2 20 04 00
OFF
BE EF 03 06 00 76 B4 01 00 B2 20 FF 00
Get
BE EF 03 06 00 B5 F5 02 00 B2 20 00 00
MONITOR OUT -
VIDEO
Set
COMPUTER IN1
BE EF 03 06 00 C2 F5 01 00 B1 20 00 00
COMPUTER IN2 BE EF 03 06 00 02 F7 01 00 B1 20 04 00
OFF
BE EF 03 06 00 32 B4 01 00 B1 20 FF 00
Get
BE EF 03 06 00 F1 F5 02 00 B1 20 00 00
MONITOR OUT -
HDMI
Set
COMPUTER IN1
BE EF 03 06 00 7A F4 01 00 B3 20 00 00
COMPUTER IN2 BE EF 03 06 00 BA F6 01 00 B3 20 04 00
OFF
BE EF 03 06 00 8A B5 01 00 B3 20 FF 00
Get
BE EF 03 06 00 49 F4 02 00 B3 20 00 00
MONITOR OUT
- LAN
Set
COMPUTER IN1 BE EF 03 06 00 1A F6 01 00 BB 20 00 00
COMPUTER IN2 BE EF 03 06 00 DA F4 01 00 BB 20 04 00
OFF BE EF 03 06 00 EA B7 01 00 BB 20 FF 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 29 F6 02 00 BB 20 00 00
MONITOR OUT
- USB TYPE A
Set
COMPUTER IN1 BE EF 03 06 00 B6 F4 01 00 B6 20 00 00
COMPUTER IN2 BE EF 03 06 00 76 F6 01 00 B6 20 04 00
OFF BE EF 03 06 00 46 B5 01 00 B6 20 FF 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 85 F4 02 00 B6 20 00 00
MONITOR OUT
- USB TYPE B
Set
COMPUTER IN1 BE EF 03 06 00 6E F7 01 00 BC 20 00 00
COMPUTER IN2 BE EF 03 06 00 AE F5 01 00 BC 20 0 4 00
OFF BE EF 03 06 00 9E B6 01 00 BC 20 FF 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 5D F7 02 00 BC 20 00 00
MONITOR OUT -
STANDBY
Set
COMPUTER IN1
BE EF 03 06 00 2A F7 01 00 BF 20 00 00
COMPUTER IN2 BE EF 03 06 00 EA F5 01 00 BF 20 04 00
OFF
BE EF 03 06 00 DA B6 01 00 BF 20 FF 00
Get
BE EF 03 06 00 19 F7 02 00 BF 20 00 00
VOLUME -
COMPUTER IN1
Get
BE EF 03 06 00 CD CC 02 00 60 20 00 00
Increment
BE EF 03 06 00 AB CC 04 00 60 20 00 00
Decrement
BE EF 03 06 00 7A CD 05 00 60 20 00 00
VOLUME -
COMPUTER IN2
Get BE EF 03 06 00 FD CD 02 00 64 20 00 00
Increment BE EF 03 06 00 9B CD 04 00 64 20 00 00
Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 4A CC 05 00 64 20 00 00
VOLUME - S-VIDEO
Get
BE EF 03 06 00 75 CD 02 00 62 20 00 00
Increment
BE EF 03 06 00 13 CD 04 00 62 20 00 00
Decrement
BE EF 03 06 00 C2 CC 05 00 62 20 00 00
VOLUME - VIDEO
Get
BE EF 03 06 00 31 CD 02 00 61 20 00 00
Increment
BE EF 03 06 00 57 CD 04 00 61 20 00 00
Decrement
BE EF 03 06 00 86 CC 05 00 61 20 00 00
VOLUME - HDMI
Get
BE EF 03 06 00 89 CC 02 00 63 20 00 00
Increment
BE EF 03 06 00 EF CC 04 00 63 20 00 00
Decrement
BE EF 03 06 00 3E CD 05 00 63 20 00 00
VOLUME - LAN
Get BE EF 03 06 00 E9 CE 02 00 6B 20 00 00
Increment BE EF 03 06 00 8F CE 04 00 6B 20 00 00
Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 5E CF 05 00 6B 20 00 00
(continued on next page)
24
RS-232C Communication / Network command table (continued)
Names Operation Type Header
Command Data
CRC Action Type Setting Code
VOLUME - USB TYPE
A
Get BE EF 03 06 00 45 CC 02 00 66 20 00 00
Increment BE EF 03 06 00 23 CC 04 00 66 20 00 00
Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 F2 CD 05 00 66 20 00 00
VOLUME - USB TYPE
B
Get BE EF 03 06 00 9D CF 02 00 6C 20 00 00
Increment BE EF 03 06 00 FB CF 04 00 6C 20 00 00
Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 2A CE 05 00 6C 20 00 00
VOLUME - STANDBY
Get BE EF 03 06 00 D9 CF 02 00 6F 20 00 00
Increment BE EF 03 06 00 BF CF 04 00 6F 20 00 00
Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 6E CE 05 00 6F 20 00 00
MUTE
Set
OFF BE EF 03 06 00 46 D3 01 00 02 20 00 00
ON BE EF 03 06 00 D6 D2 01 00 02 20 01 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 75 D3 02 00 02 20 00 00
SPEAKER
Set
ON BE EF 03 06 00 FE D4 01 00 1C 20 01 00
OFF BE EF 03 06 00 6E D5 01 00 1C 20 00 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 5D D5 02 00 1C 20 00 00
AUDIO SOURCE -
COMPUTER IN1
Set
AUDIO IN1 BE EF 03 06 00 6E DC 01 00 30 20 01 00
AUDIO IN2 BE EF 03 06 00 9E DC 01 00 30 20 02 00
AUDIO IN3 BE EF 03 06 00 0E DD 01 00 30 20 03 00
OFF BE EF 03 06 00 FE DD 01 00 30 20 00 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 CD DD 02 00 30 20 00 00
AUDIO SOURCE -
COMPUTER IN2
Set
AUDIO IN1 BE EF 03 06 00 5E DD 01 00 34 20 01 00
AUDIO IN2 BE EF 03 06 00 AE DD 01 00 34 20 02 00
AUDIO IN3 BE EF 03 06 00 3E DC 01 00 34 20 03 00
OFF BE EF 03 06 00 CE DC 01 00 34 20 00 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 FD DC 02 00 34 20 00 00
AUDIO SOURCE -
HDMI
Set
OFF BE EF 03 06 00 BA DD 01 00 33 20 00 00
AUDIO IN1 BE EF 03 06 00 2A DC 01 00 33 20 01 00
AUDIO IN2 BE EF 03 06 00 DA DC 01 00 33 20 02 00
AUDIO IN3 BE EF 03 06 00 4A DD 01 00 33 20 03 00
AUDIO_HDMI BE EF 03 06 00 7A C4 01 00 33 20 20 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 89 DD 02 00 33 20 00 00
AUDIO SOURCE -
S-VIDEO
Set
AUDIO IN1 BE EF 03 06 00 D6 DD 01 00 32 20 01 00
AUDIO IN2 BE EF 03 06 00 26 DD 01 00 32 20 02 00
AUDIO IN3 BE EF 03 06 00 B6 DC 01 00 32 20 03 00
OFF BE EF 03 06 00 46 DC 01 00 32 20 00 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 75 DC 02 00 32 20 00 00
AUDIO SOURCE -
VIDEO
Set
AUDIO IN1 BE EF 03 06 00 92 DD 01 00 31 20 01 00
AUDIO IN2 BE EF 03 06 00 62 DD 01 00 31 20 02 00
AUDIO IN3 BE EF 03 06 00 F2 DC 01 00 31 20 03 00
OFF BE EF 03 06 00 02 DC 01 00 31 20 00 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 31 DC 02 00 31 20 00 00
(continued on next page)
25
RS-232C Communication / Network command table (continued)
Names Operation Type Header
Command Data
CRC Action Type Setting Code
AUDIO SOURCE -
LAN
Set
OFF BE EF 03 06 00 DA DF 01 00 3B 20 00 00
AUDIO IN1 BE EF 03 06 00 4A DE 01 00 3B 20 01 00
AUDIO IN2 BE EF 03 06 00 BA DE 01 00 3B 20 02 00
AUDIO IN3 BE EF 03 06 00 2A DF 01 00 3B 20 03 00
AUDIO_LAN BE EF 03 06 00 8A D3 01 00 3B 20 11 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 E9 DF 02 00 3B 20 00 00
AUDIO SOURCE -
USB TYPE A
Set
OFF BE EF 03 06 00 76 DD 01 00 36 20 00 00
AUDIO IN1 BE EF 03 06 00 E6 DC 01 00 36 20 01 00
AUDIO IN2 BE EF 03 06 00 16 DC 01 00 36 20 02 00
AUDIO IN3 BE EF 03 06 00 86 DD 01 00 36 20 03 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 45 DD 02 00 36 20 00 00
AUDIO SOURCE -
USB TYPE B
Set
OFF BE EF 03 06 00 AE DE 01 00 3C 20 00 00
AUDIO IN1 BE EF 03 06 00 3E DF 01 00 3C 20 01 00
AUDIO IN2 BE EF 03 06 00 CE DF 01 00 3C 20 02 00
AUDIO IN3 BE EF 03 06 00 5E DE 01 00 3C 20 03 00
AUDIO_USB TYPE B BE EF 03 06 00 0E D2 01 00 3C 20 12 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 9D DE 02 00 3C 20 00 00
AUDIO SOURCE -
STANDBY
Set
AUDIO IN1 BE EF 03 06 00 7A DF 01 00 3F 20 01 00
AUDIO IN2 BE EF 03 06 00 8A DF 01 00 3F 20 02 00
AUDIO IN3 BE EF 03 06 00 1A DE 01 00 3F 20 03 00
OFF BE EF 03 06 00 EA DE 01 00 3F 20 00 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 D9 DE 02 00 3F 20 00 00
LAN SOUND ENABLE
Set
Disable BE EF 03 06 00 BA F0 01 00 A3 20 00 00
Enable BE EF 03 06 00 2A F1 01 00 A3 20 01 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 89 F0 02 00 A3 20 00 00
USB TYPE A SOUND
ENABLE
Set
Disable BE EF 03 06 00 CE F1 01 00 A4 20 00 00
Enable BE EF 03 06 00 5E F0 01 00 A4 20 01 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 FD F1 02 00 A4 20 00 00
USB TYPE B SOUND
ENABLE
Set
Disable BE EF 03 06 00 32 F0 01 00 A5 20 00 00
Enable BE EF 03 06 00 A2 F1 01 00 A5 20 01 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 01 F0 02 00 A5 20 00 00
MIC LEVEL
Set
LOW BE EF 03 06 00 02 F1 01 00 A1 20 00 00
HIGH BE EF 03 06 00 92 F0 01 00 A1 20 01 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 31 F1 02 00 A1 20 00 00
MIC VOLUME
Get BE EF 03 06 00 75 F1 02 00 A2 20 00 00
Increment BE EF 03 06 00 13 F1 04 00 A2 20 00 00
Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 C2 F0 05 00 A2 20 00 00
(continued on next page)
26
Names Operation Type Header
Command Data
CRC Action Type Setting Code
LANGUAGE *
Set
ENGLISH BE EF 03 06 00 F7 D3 01 00 05 30 00 00
FRANÇAIS BE EF 03 06 00 67 D2 01 00 05 30 01 00
DEUTSCH BE EF 03 06 00 97 D2 01 00 05 30 02 00
ESPAÑOL BE EF 03 06 00 07 D3 01 00 05 30 03 00
ITALIANO BE EF 03 06 00 37 D1 01 00 05 30 04 00
NORSK BE EF 03 06 00 A7 D0 01 00 05 30 05 00
NEDERLANDS BE EF 03 06 00 57 D0 01 00 05 30 06 00
PORTUGUÊS BE EF 03 06 00 C7 D1 01 00 05 30 07 00
BE EF 03 06 00 37 D4 01 00 05 30 08 00
BE EF 03 06 00 A7 D5 01 00 05 30 09 00
BE EF 03 06 00 37 DE 01 00 05 30 10 00
BE EF 03 06 00 57 D5 01 00 05 30 0A 00
SVENSKA BE EF 03 06 00 C7 D4 01 00 05 30 0B 00
PУCCKИЙ BE EF 03 06 00 F7 D6 01 00 05 30 0C 00
SUOMI BE EF 03 06 00 67 D7 01 00 05 30 0D 00
POLSKI BE EF 03 06 00 97 D7 01 00 05 30 0E 00
TÜRKÇE BE EF 03 06 00 07 D6 01 00 05 30 0F 00
DANSK BE EF 03 06 00 A7 DF 01 00 05 30 11 00
ČESKY BE EF 03 06 00 57 DF 01 00 05 30 12 00
MAGYAR BE EF 03 06 00 C7 DE 01 00 05 30 13 00
ROMÂNĂ BE EF 03 06 00 F7 DC 01 00 05 30 14 00
SLOVENSKI BE EF 03 06 00 67 DD 01 00 05 30 15 00
HRVATSKI BE EF 03 06 00 97 DD 01 00 05 30 16 00
ΕΛΛΗΝΙΚΑ BE EF 03 06 00 07 DC 01 00 05 30 17 00
LIETUVIŲ BE EF 03 06 00 F7 D9 01 00 05 30 18 00
EESTI BE EF 03 06 00 67 D8 01 00 05 30 19 00
LATVIEŠU BE EF 03 06 00 97 D8 01 00 05 30 1A 00
ไทย
BE EF 03 06 00 07 D9 01 00 05 30 1B 00
ﺍﻝﻝﻍﺓ ﺍﻝﻉﺭﺏیﺓ
BE EF 03 06 00 37 DB 01 00 05 30 1C 00
ﻑﺍﺭﺱﻯ‎
BE EF 03 06 00 A7 DA 01 00 05 30 1D 00
PORTUGUÊS BRA BE EF 03 06 00 57 DA 01 00 05 30 1E 00
BAHASA IND
BE EF 03 06 00 C7 DB 01 00 05 30 1F 00
TIENG VIET BE EF 03 06 00 37 CA 01 00 05 30 20 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 C4 D3 02 00 05 30 00 00
MENU POSITION H
Get BE EF 03 06 00 04 D7 02 00 15 30 00 00
Increment BE EF 03 06 00 62 D7 04 00 15 30 00 00
Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 B3 D6 05 00 15 30 00 00
MENU POSITION H
Reset
Execute BE EF 03 06 00 DC C6 06 00 43 70 00 00
MENU POSITION V
Get BE EF 03 06 00 40 D7 02 00 16 30 00 00
Increment BE EF 03 06 00 26 D7 04 00 16 30 00 00
Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 F7 D6 05 00 16 30 00 00
MENU POSITION V
Reset
Execute BE EF 03 06 00 A8 C7 06 00 44 70 00 00
* Not all of the languages in the table are supported.
(continued on next page)
RS-232C Communication / Network command table (continued)
27
Names Operation Type Header
Command Data
CRC Action Type Setting Code
BLANK
Set
MyScreen BE EF 03 06 00 FB CA 01 00 00 30 20 00
ORIGINAL BE EF 03 06 00 FB E2 01 00 00 30 40 00
BLUE BE EF 03 06 00 CB D3 01 00 00 30 03 00
WHITE BE EF 03 06 00 6B D0 01 00 00 30 05 00
BLACK BE EF 03 06 00 9B D0 01 00 00 30 06 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 08 D3 02 00 00 30 00 00
BLANK On/Off
Set
OFF BE EF 03 06 00 FB D8 01 00 20 30 00 00
ON BE EF 03 06 00 6B D9 01 00 20 30 01 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 C8 D8 02 00 20 30 00 00
START UP
Set
MyScreen BE EF 03 06 00 CB CB 01 00 04 30 20 00
ORIGINAL BE EF 03 06 00 0B D2 01 00 04 30 00 00
OFF BE EF 03 06 00 9B D3 01 00 04 30 01 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 38 D2 02 00 04 30 00 00
MyScreen Lock
Set
OFF BE EF 03 06 00 3B EF 01 00 C0 30 00 00
ON BE EF 03 06 00 AB EE 01 00 C0 30 01 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 08 EF 02 00 C0 30 00 00
MESSAGE
Set
OFF BE EF 03 06 00 8F D6 01 00 17 30 00 00
ON BE EF 03 06 00 1F D7 01 00 17 30 01 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 BC D6 02 00 17 30 00 00
TEMPLATE
Set
TEST PATTERN BE EF 03 06 00 43 D9 01 00 22 30 00 00
DOT-LINE1 BE EF 03 06 00 D3 D8 01 00 22 30 01 00
DOT-LINE2 BE EF 03 06 00 23 D8 01 00 22 30 02 00
DOT-LINE3 BE EF 03 06 00 B3 D9 01 00 22 30 03 00
DOT-LINE4 BE EF 03 06 00 83 DB 01 00 22 30 04 00
CIRCLE 1 BE EF 03 06 00 13 DA 01 00 22 30 05 00
CIRCLE 2 BE EF 03 06 00 E3 DA 01 00 22 30 06 00
MAP 1 BE EF 03 06 00 83 D4 01 00 22 30 10 00
MAP 2 BE EF 03 06 00 13 D5 01 00 22 30 11 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 70 D9 02 00 22 30 00 00
TEMPLATE On/Off
Set
OFF BE EF 03 06 00 BF D8 01 00 23 30 00 00
ON BE EF 03 06 00 2F D9 01 00 23 30 01 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 8C D8 02 00 23 30 00 00
C. C. - DISPLAY
Set
OFF BE EF 03 06 00 FA 62 01 00 00 37 00 00
ON BE EF 03 06 00 6A 63 01 00 00 37 01 00
AUTO BE EF 03 06 00 9A 63 01 00 00 37 02 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 C9 62 02 00 00 37 00 00
C. C. - MODE
Set
CAPTIONS BE EF 03 06 00 06 63 01 00 01 37 00 00
TEXT BE EF 03 06 00 96 62 01 00 01 37 01 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 35 63 02 00 01 37 00 00
C. C. - CHANNEL
Set
1 BE EF 03 06 00 D2 62 01 00 02 37 01 00
2 BE EF 03 06 00 22 62 01 00 02 37 02 00
3 BE EF 03 06 00 B2 63 01 00 02 37 03 00
4 BE EF 03 06 00 82 61 01 00 02 37 04 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 71 63 02 00 02 37 00 00
(continued on next page)
RS-232C Communication / Network command table (continued)
28
Names Operation Type Header
Command Data
CRC Action Type Setting Code
AUTO SEARCH
Set
OFF BE EF 03 06 00 B6 D6 01 00 16 20 00 00
ON BE EF 03 06 00 26 D7 01 00 16 20 01 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 85 D6 02 00 16 20 00 00
AUTO KEYSTONE
Set
OFF BE EF 03 06 00 EA D1 01 00 0F 20 00 00
ON BE EF 03 06 00 7A D0 01 00 0F 20 01 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 D9 D1 02 00 0F 20 00 00
DIRECT POWER ON
Set
OFF BE EF 03 06 00 3B 89 01 00 20 31 00 00
ON BE EF 03 06 00 AB 88 01 00 20 31 01 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 08 89 02 00 20 31 00 00
AUTO POWER OFF
Get BE EF 03 06 00 08 86 02 00 10 31 00 00
Increment BE EF 03 06 00 6E 86 04 00 10 31 00 00
Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 BF 87 05 00 10 31 00 00
LAMP TIME Get BE EF 03 06 00 C2 FF 02 00 90 10 00 00
LAMP TIME Reset Execute BE EF 03 06 00 58 DC 06 00 30 70 00 00
FILTER TIME Get BE EF 03 06 00 C2 F0 02 00 A0 10 00 00
FILTER TIME Reset Execute BE EF 03 06 00 98 C6 06 00 40 70 00 00
MY BUTTON-1
Set
COMPUTER IN1 BE EF 03 06 00 3A 33 01 00 00 36 00 00
COMPUTER IN2 BE EF 03 06 00 FA 31 01 00 00 36 04 00
HDMI BE EF 03 06 00 CA 33 01 00 00 36 03 00
S-VIDEO BE EF 03 06 00 5A 32 01 00 00 36 02 00
VIDEO BE EF 03 06 00 AA 32 01 00 00 36 01 00
LAN BE EF 03 06 00 0A 34 01 00 00 36 0B 00
USB TYPE A BE EF 03 06 00 9A 30 01 00 00 36 06 00
USB TYPE B BE EF 03 06 00 3A 36 01 00 00 36 0C 00
INFORMATION BE EF 03 06 00 FA 3E 01 00 00 36 10 00
AUTO KEYSTONE BE EF 03 06 00 6A 3F 01 00 00 36 11 00
MY MEMORY BE EF 03 06 00 9A 3F 01 00 00 36 12 00
ACTIVE IRIS BE EF 03 06 00 AA 3D 01 00 00 36 15 00
PICTURE MODE BE EF 03 06 00 0A 3E 01 00 00 36 13 00
FILTER RESET BE EF 03 06 00 3A 3C 01 00 00 36 14 00
AV MUTE BE EF 03 06 00 AA 38 01 00 00 36 19 00
TEMPLATE BE EF 03 06 00 CA 39 01 00 00 36 1B 00
MIC VOLUME BE EF 03 06 00 9A 24 01 00 00 36 36 00
RESOLUTION BE EF 03 06 00 9A 3A 01 00 00 36 1E 00
ECO MODE BE EF 03 06 00 0A 25 01 00 00 36 37 00
SAVER MODE BE EF 03 06 00 6A 21 01 00 00 36 39 00
MY IMAGE BE EF 03 06 00 5A 3D 01 00 00 36 16 00
SLIDESHOW BE EF 03 06 00 9A 2B 01 00 00 36 22 00
MESSENGER BE EF 03 06 00 AA 29 01 00 00 36 25 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 09 33 02 00 00 36 00 00
(continued on next page)
RS-232C Communication / Network command table (continued)
29
RS-232C Communication / Network command table (continued)
Names Operation Type Header
Command Data
CRC Action Type Setting Code
MY BUTTON-2
Set
COMPUTER IN1 BE EF 03 06 00 C6 32 01 00 01 36 00 00
COMPUTER IN2 BE EF 03 06 00 06 30 01 00 01 36 04 00
HDMI BE EF 03 06 00 36 32 01 00 01 36 03 00
S-VIDEO BE EF 03 06 00 A6 33 01 00 01 36 02 00
VIDEO BE EF 03 06 00 56 33 01 00 01 36 01 00
LAN BE EF 03 06 00 F6 35 01 00 01 36 0B 00
USB TYPE A BE EF 03 06 00 66 31 01 00 01 36 06 00
USB TYPE B BE EF 03 06 00 C6 37 01 00 01 36 0C 00
INFORMATION BE EF 03 06 00 06 3F 01 00 01 36 10 00
AUTO KEYSTONE BE EF 03 06 00 96 3E 01 00 01 36 11 00
MY MEMORY BE EF 03 06 00 66 3E 01 00 01 36 12 00
ACTIVE IRIS BE EF 03 06 00 56 3C 01 00 01 36 15 00
PICTURE MODE BE EF 03 06 00 F6 3F 01 00 01 36 13 00
FILTER RESET BE EF 03 06 00 C6 3D 01 00 01 36 14 00
AV MUTE BE EF 03 06 00 56 39 01 00 01 36 19 00
TEMPLATE BE EF 03 06 00 36 38 01 00 01 36 1B 00
RESOLUTION BE EF 03 06 00 66 3B 01 00 01 36 1E 00
MIC VOLUME BE EF 03 06 00 66 25 01 00 01 36 36 00
ECO MODE BE EF 03 06 00 F6 24 01 00 01 36 37 00
SAVER MODE BE EF 03 06 00 96 20 01 00 01 36 39 00
MY IMAGE BE EF 03 06 00 A6 3C 01 00 01 36 16 00
SLIDESHOW BE EF 03 06 00 66 2A 01 00 01 36 22 00
MESSENGER BE EF 03 06 00 56 28 01 00 01 36 25 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 F5 32 02 00 01 36 00 00
(continued on next page)
30
Names Operation Type Header
Command Data
CRC Action Type Setting Code
MY SOURCE
Set
COMPUTER IN1 BE EF 03 06 00 FA 38 01 00 20 36 00 00
COMPUTER IN2 BE EF 03 06 00 3A 3A 01 00 20 36 04 00
HDMI BE EF 03 06 00 0A 38 01 00 20 36 03 00
S-VIDEO BE EF 03 06 00 9A 39 01 00 20 36 02 00
VIDEO BE EF 03 06 00 6A 39 01 00 20 36 01 00
LAN BE EF 03 06 00 CA 3F 01 00 20 36 0B 00
USB TYPE A BE EF 03 06 00 5A 3B 01 00 20 36 06 00
USB TYPE B BE EF 03 06 00 FA 3D 01 00 20 36 0C 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 C9 38 02 00 20 36 00 00
REMOTE FREQ.
NORMAL
Set
OFF BE EF 03 06 00 FF 3D 01 00 30 26 00 00
ON BE EF 03 06 00 6F 3C 01 00 30 26 01 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 CC 3D 02 00 30 26 00 00
REMOTE FREQ.
HIGH
Set
OFF BE EF 03 06 00 03 3C 01 00 31 26 00 00
ON BE EF 03 06 00 93 3D 01 00 31 26 01 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 30 3C 02 00 31 26 00 00
MY IMAGE
Set
OFF BE EF 03 06 00 3A C3 01 00 00 35 00 00
IMAGE-1 BE EF 03 06 00 AA C2 01 00 00 35 01 00
IMAGE-2 BE EF 03 06 00 5A C2 01 00 00 35 02 00
IMAGE-3 BE EF 03 06 00 CA C3 01 00 00 35 03 00
IMAGE-4 BE EF 03 06 00 FA C1 01 00 00 35 04 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 09 C3 02 00 00 35 00 00
MY IMAGE IMAGE-1
Delete
Execute BE EF 03 06 00 71 C3 06 00 01 35 00 00
MY IMAGE IMAGE-2
Delete
Execute BE EF 03 06 00 35 C3 06 00 02 35 00 00
MY IMAGE IMAGE-3
Delete
Execute BE EF 03 06 00 C9 C2 06 00 03 35 00 00
MY IMAGE IMAGE-4
Delete
Execute BE EF 03 06 00 BD C3 06 00 04 35 00 00
VOLUME - ALL
Get BE EF 03 06 00 CD C3 02 00 50 20 00 00
Increment BE EF 03 06 00 AB C3 04 00 50 20 00 00
Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 7A C2 05 00 50 20 00 00
RS-232C Communication / Network command table (continued)
31
PJLink command
PJLink command
POWR Power Contorol
0 = Standby
1 = Power On
POWR ? Power Status inquiry
0 = Standby
1 = Power On
2 = Cool Down
INPT Input Source selection
11 = COMPUTER IN 1
12 = COMPUTER IN 2
22 = S-VIDEO
23 = VIDEO
31 = HDMI
41 = USB TYPE A
51 = LAN
52 = USB TYPE B
INPT ? Input Source inquiry
11 = COMPUTER IN 1
12 = COMPUTER IN 2
22 = S-VIDEO
23 = VIDEO
31 = HDMI
41 = USB TYPE A
51 = LAN
52 = USB TYPE B
AVMT AV Mute
10 = BLANK off
11 = BLANK on
20 = Mute off
21 = Mute on
30 = AV Mute off
31 = AV Mute on
AVMT ? AV Mute inquiry
10 = BLANK off
11 = BLANK on
20 = Mute off
21 = Mute on
30 = AV Mute off
31 = AV Mute on
Commands Control Description Parameter or Response
(continued on next page)
32
PJLink command (continued)
Commands Control Description Parameter or Response
ERST ? Error Status inquiry
1st byte: Refers to Fan error; one of 0 to 2
2nd byte
: Refers to Lamp error; one of 0 to 2
3rd byte: Refers to Temptrature error; one of 0 to
2
4th byte: Refers to Cover error; one of 0 to 2
5th byte: Refers to Filter error; one of 0 to 2
6th byte: Refers to Other error; one of 0 to 2
The mearning of 0 to 2 is as given below
0 = Error is not detected; 1 = Warning; 2 =
Error
LAMP ? Lamp Status inquiry
1st number (digits 1 to 5): Lamp Time
2nd number : 0 = Lamp off, 1 = Lamp on
INST ? Input Source List inquiry 11 12 22 23 31 41 51 52
NAME ? Projector Name inquiry
Responds with the name set in "PROJECTOR
NAME" of "NETWORK"
INF1 ?
Manufucturer's Name
inquiry
HITACHI
INF2 ? Model Name inquiry
Your model name,
"CP-X2015WN", "CP-
X2515WN", "CP-X3015WN", "CP-X4015WN",
"CP-WX2515WN" or "CP-WX3015WN".
INFO ? Other Information inquiry
Responds with the factory information and so
on
CLSS ? Class Information inquiry 1
NOTE
• The password used in PJLink
TM
is the same as the password set in
the Web Browser Control. To use PJLink
TM
without authentication, do not set
any password in Web Browser Control.
• For specifications of PJLink
TM
, see the web site of the Japan Business
Machine and Information System Industries Association.
URL: http://pjlink.jbmia.or.jp/
1
ENGLISH
WARNING ►Before using this product, be sure to read all manuals for this
product. After reading them, store them in a safe place for future reference.
►Heed all the warnings and cautions in the manuals or on the product.
►Follow all the instructions in the manuals or on the product.
First of all ............................................ 2
Entries and graphical symbols explanation ......2
Important safety instruction ..............................2
Regulatory notices .............................. 3
About Electro-Magnetic Interference ................
3
About Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment
... 4
Contents of package........................... 4
Preparing for the remote control ......... 5
Arrangement ....................................... 6
Connecting with your devices ............. 7
Fastening the adapter cover ............... 8
Connecting power supply ................... 8
Turning on the power .......................... 9
Adjusting the projector's elevator ..... 10
Displaying the picture ....................... 11
Turning off the power ........................ 12
Replacing the lamp ........................... 13
Cleaning and replacing the air filter
.. 15
Using the CD manual ....................... 16
Specifications ................................... 17
Troubleshooting
- Warranty and after-service ........... 18
Contents
NOTE • In this manual, unless any comments are accompanied, “the
manuals” means all the documents provided with this product, and “the product”
means this projector and all the accessories came with the projector.
Projector
CP-X2015WN/CP-X2515WN/CP-X3015WN/
CP-X4015WN/CP-WX2515WN/CP-WX3015WN
User's Manual (concise)
Thank you for purchasing this projector.
Please read through this manual before using this product, in order to use safely
and utilize well the product.
2
First of all
Entries and graphical symbols explanation
The following entries and graphical symbols are used for the manuals and the
product as follows, for safety purpose. Please know their meanings beforehand,
and heed them.
Important safety instruction
The followings are important instructions for safely using the product. Be sure to
follow them always when handling the product. The manufacturer assumes no
responsibility for any damage caused by mishandling that is beyond normal usage
defined in these manuals of this projector.
WARNING
This entry warns of a risk of serious personal injury or even death.
CAUTION This entry warns of a risk of personal injury or physical damage.
NOTICE This entry notices of fear of causing trouble.
WARNING ►Never use the product in or after an abnormality (ex. giving
off smoke, smelling strange, took a liquid or an object inside, broken, etc.) If an
abnormality should occur, unplug the projector urgently.
►Situate the product away from children and pets.
►Keep small parts away from children and pets. If swallowed, consult a
physician immediately for emergency treatment.
►Do not use the product when there is fear of a thunderbolt.
►Unplug the projector from the power outlet if the projector is not used for the
time being.
►Do not open or remove any portion of the product, unless the manuals direct
it. For internal maintenance, leave it to your dealer or their service personnel.
►Use only the accessories specified or recommended by the manufacturer.
►Do not modify the projector or accessories.
►Do not let any things or any liquids enter to the inside of the product.
►Do not wet the product.
►Do not place the projector where any oils, such as cooking or machine oil,
are used. Oil may harm the product, resulting in malfunction, or falling from the
mounted position.
►Do not apply a shock or pressure to this product.
- Do not place the product on an unstable place such as the uneven surface or
the leaned table.
- Do not place the product unstably. Place the projector so that it does not
protrude from the surface where the projector is placed on.
- Remove all the attachments including the power cord and cables, from the
projector when carrying the projector.
►
Do not look into the lens and the openings on the projector, while the lamp is on.
►
Do not approach the lamp cover and the exhaust vents, while the projection lamp
is on. Also after the lamp goes out, do not approach them for a while, since too hot.
3
ENGLISH
Regulatory notices
About Electro-Magnetic Interference
In CANADA
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
In the US, and other places where the FCC regulations are applicable
Declaration of Conformity
Trade name HITACHI
Model Number CP-X2015WN, CP-X2515WN, CP-X3015WN,
CP-X4015WN, CP-WX2515WN, CP-WX3015WN
Responsible Party Hitachi America, Ltd.
Address 900 Hitachi way, Chula Vista, CA 91914-3556 U.S.A.
Telephone Number +1 -800-448-2244
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.This equipment has
been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can
radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However,
there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this
equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which
can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to
try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
- Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
- Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
- Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the
receiver is connected.
- Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
INSTRUCTIONS TO USERS: This equipment complies with the requirements of
FCC (Federal Communication Commission) equipment provided that the following
conditions are met. Some cables have to be used with the core set. Use the
accessory cable or a designated-type cable for the connection. For cables that
have a core only at one end, connect the core to the projector.
CAUTION: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
4
NOTE • Keep the original packing materials for future reshipment. Be sure
to use the original packing materials when moving the projector. Use special
caution for the lens.
• The projector may make a rattling sound when tilted, moved or shaken, since
a fl ap to control the air fl ow inside of the projector has moved. Be aware that
this is not a failure or malfunction.
About Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment
The mark is in compliance with the Waste Electrical and Electronic
Equipment Directive 2002/96/EC (WEEE).
The mark indicates the requirement NOT to dispose the equipment
including any spent or discarded batteries or accumulators as unsorted
municipal waste, but use the return and collection systems available.
If the batteries or accumulators included with this equipment, display
the chemical symbol Hg, Cd, or Pb, then it means that the battery has a
heavy metal content of more than 0.0005% Mercury or more than, 0.002%
Cadmium, or more than 0.004% Lead.
Regulatory notices (continued)
WARNING ►Keep small parts away from children and pets. Take care
not to put in the mouth. If swallowed, consult a physician immediately for
emergency treatment.
Contents of package
Your projector should come with the items
shown below. Check that all the items are
included. Require of your dealer immediately if
any items are missing.
(1) Remote control with two AA batteries
(2) Power cord
(3) Computer cable
(4) Adapter cover
(5) Lens cover
(6) User’s manuals (Book x1, CD x1)
(7) Security label
(8) Application CD
(6)
(7)
(2)
(3)
(5)
(1)
VIDEO
DOC.CAMERA
KEYSTONE
ASPECT
SEARCH
BLANK
MUTE
MY BUTTON
POSITION
ESC
MENU
RESET
COMPUTER
MY SOURCE/
AUTO
MAGNIFY
PAGE
DOWN
ON
OFF
FREEZE
UP
࡯
㧗
VOLUME
ENTER
(8)
(4)
5
ENGLISH
Preparing for the remote control
Please insert the batteries into the remote control before using it. If the remote
control starts to malfunction, try to replace the batteries. If you will not use the
remote control for long period, remove the batteries from the remote control and
store them in a safe place.
1.
Holding the hook part of the battery
cover, remove it.
2.
Align and insert the two AA batteries
(
HITACHI MAXELL or HITACHI MAXELL
ENERGY, Part No.LR6 or R6P
) according
to their plus and minus terminals as
indicated in the remote control.
3.
Replace the battery cover in the direction of the arrow and snap it back into
place.
WARNING ►Always handle the batteries with care and use them only as
directed. Improper use may result in battery explosion, cracking or leakage,
which could result in fi re, injury and/or pollution of the surrounding environment.
• When replacing the batteries, replace both of the batteries with new batteries
of the same type. Do not use a new battery with a used battery.
• Be sure to use only the batteries specifi ed. Do not use batteries of different
types at the same time. Do not mix a new battery with used one.
•
Make sure the plus and minus terminals are correctly aligned when loading a battery.
• Keep a battery away from children and pets.
• Do not recharge, short circuit, solder or disassemble a battery.
•
Do not place a battery in a fi re or water. Keep batteries in a dark, cool and dry place.
•
If you observe battery leakage, wipe out the leakage and then replace a battery.
If the leakage adheres to your body or clothes, rinse well with water immediately.
•
Obey the local laws on disposing the battery.
213
6
WARNING ►Install the projector where you can access the power outlet
easily.
►Install the projector in a stable horizontal position.
• Do not use any mounting accessories except the accessories specified by the
manufacturer. Read and keep the manuals of the accessories used.
•
For special installation such as ceiling mounting, be sure to consult your dealer
beforehand. Specific mounting accessories and services may be required.
• Do not put the projector on its side, front or rear position.
• Do not attach nor place anything on the projector unless otherwise specified
in the manual.
►Do not install the projector near thermally conductive or flammable things.
►Do not place the projector where any oils, such as cooking or machine oil, are
used.
►Do not place the projector in a place where it may get wet.
CAUTION ►Place the projector in a cool place with sufficient ventilation.
• Keep a space of 30 cm or more between a side of the projector and other
objects such as walls.
• Do not stop up, block nor cover the projector's vent holes.
• Do not place the projector at places that are exposed to magnetic fields, doing
so can cause the cooling fans inside the projector to malfunction.
►Avoid placing the projector in smoky, humid or dusty place.
• Do not place the projector near humidifiers.
NOTICE ►Position the projector to prevent light from directly hitting the
projector’s remote sensor.
►Do not place the product in a place where radio interference may be caused.
►Check and correct the setting for
ALTITUDE
of SERVICE in the OPTION
menu according to the usage environment. For details, see User’s Manual -
Operating Guide.
Arrangement
Refer to table T-1,T-2 and T-3 and figures F-1 and F-2 at the end of this manual
to determine the screen size and projection distance (from the projector’s end).
The values shown in the table are calculated for a full size screen.
b
Projection distance (±10%, from the projector's end)
c1
,
c2
Screen height (±10%)
a
Screen size (diagonal)
• If the projector is used at an altitude of about 1600 m (5250 feet) or higher, set ALTITUDE
of the SERVICE item in the OPTION menu to HIGH. Otherwise, set it to NORMAL.
If the projector is used with a wrong setting, it may cause damage to the projector itself or
the parts inside.
7
ENGLISH
Connecting with your devices
Before connecting the projector to a device, consult the manual of the device to
confirm that the device is suitable for connecting with this projector and prepare
the required accessories, such as a cable in accord with the signal of the device.
Consult your dealer when the required accessory did not come with the product or
the accessory is damaged.
After making sure that the projector and the devices are turned off, perform the
connection, according to the following instructions. Refer to figures F-3 to F-6 at the
end of this manual.
For details, see User’s Manual - Operating Guide. Before connecting the projector
to a network system, be sure to read User’s Manual - Network Guide too.
WARNING ►Use only the appropriate accessories. Otherwise it could
cause a fire or damage the projector and devices.
• Use only the accessories specified or recommended by the projector’s
manufacturer. It may be regulated under some standard.
• Neither disassemble nor modify the projector and the accessories.
• Do not use the damaged accessory. Be careful not to damage the accesso-
ries. Route a cable so that it is neither stepped on nor pinched out.
CAUTION ►For a cable with a core at only one end, connect the end with
the core to the projector. That may be required by EMI regulations.
►Before connecting the projector to a network system be sure to obtain the
consent of the administrator of the network.
►Do not connect the LAN port to any network that might have the excessive
voltage.
►The designated USB wireless adapter that is sold as an option is required to
use the wireless network function of this projector.
►Before removing the USB storage device from the port of the projector, be
sure to use the REMOVE USB function on the thumbnail screen to secure your
data. Before you insert or pull out the USB wireless adapter from the projector,
turn off the power of the projector and pull out the power cord’s plug from the
outlet. Do not touch the USB wireless adapter while the projector is receiving
AC power.
NOTE • Do not turn on or off the projector while connected to a device in
operation, unless that is directed in the manual of the device.
• Some input ports are selectable in the use. For details, see User’s Manual -
Operating Guide.
• Be careful not to mistakenly connect a connector to a wrong port.
• If an oversized USB storage device blocks the LAN port, use a USB extension
cable to connect the USB storage device.
8
Connecting power supply
1.
Put the connector of the power cord into the
AC IN (AC inlet) of the projector.
2.
Firmly plug the power cord’s plug into the
outlet. In a couple of seconds after the power
supply connection, the POWER indicator will
light up in steady orange.
Please remember that when the DIRECT POWER
ON function activated, the connection of the power
supply make the projector turn on.
WARNING ►Please use extra caution when connecting the power cord, as
incorrect or faulty connections may result in fire and/or electrical shock.
• Do not touch the power cord with a wet hand.
• Only use the power cord that came with the projector. If it is damaged, consult
your dealer to get a new one. Never modify the power cord.
• Only plug the power cord into an outlet whose voltage is matched to the power
cord. The power outlet should be close to the projector and easily accessible.
Remove the power cord for complete separation.
• Do not distribute the power supply to multiple devices. Doing so may overload
the outlet and connectors, loosen the connection, or result in fire, electric
shock or other accidents.
• Connect the ground terminal for the AC inlet of this unit to the ground terminal
of the building using an appropriate power cord (bundled).
NOTICE ►This product is also designed for IT power systems with a phase-
to-phase voltage of 220 to 240 V.
AC IN
Power
cord
Fastening the adapter cover
Use the supplied adapter cover to prevent the
USB wireless adapter (optional) from coming
off easily and prevention from burn injury.
1.
Loosen the screw (marked with triangle)
on the bottom left of the USB TYPE A port.
2.
Insert the tab of the cover into the hole
at the upper right of the USB TYPE A
port in the direction of the arrow.
3.
Align the screw holes on the projector
and the cover. Then insert the screw
removed from the projector into the hole
and tighten the screw.
WARNING ►
Keep small parts away from children and pets. Take care not to
put in the mouth. Heat may build up in the USB wireless adapter, to avoid possible
burns disconnect the projector power cord for more than 5min. before touching it.
Tab
2
1
3
9
ENGLISH
Turning on the power
1.
Make sure that the power cord is firmly and correctly connected to the
projector and the outlet.
2.
Make sure that the POWER indicator is
steady orange. Then remove the lens
cover.
3.
Press the STANDBY/ON button on the
projector or the remote control.
The projection lamp will light up and the
POWER indicator will begin blinking in
green. When the power is completely on, the
indicator will stop blinking and light in steady
green.
WARNING ►A strong light is emitted when the projector’s power is on. Do
not look into the lens of the projector or look inside of the projector through any
of the projector’s openings.
NOTE • Please power on the projector prior to the connected devices.
• The projector has the DIRECT POWER ON function, which can make the
projector automatically turn on. For more information, please see User’s
Manual - Operating Guide.
VIDE
O
DOC.CAMERA
KEYSTONE
ASPE
CT
SEARCH
BLANK
MUT
E
MY BUT
TO
N
POSI
TION
ESC
MENU
RESET
COMPUTER
MY SOURCE/
AU
TO
MAGNIFY
PAG
E
DOWN
ON
OF
F
FREEZE
UP
࡯
㧗
VOLUME
ENT
E
R
STANDBY/ON button
POWER indicator
10
Adjusting the projector’s elevator
When the place to put the projector is slightly uneven to
the left or right, use the elevator feet to place the projector
horizontally. Using the feet can also tilt the projector
in order to project at a suitable angle to the screen,
elevating the front side of the projector within 14 degrees.
This projector has 2 elevator feet and 2 elevator buttons.
An elevator foot is adjustable while pushing the elevator
button on the same side as it.
1.
Holding the projector, push the elevator buttons to
loose the elevator feet.
2.
Position the front side of the projector to the desired
height.
3.
Release the elevator buttons in order to lock the
elevator feet.
4.
After making sure that the elevator feet are locked,
put the projector down gently.
5.
If necessary, the elevator feet can be manually
twisted to make more precise adjustments. Hold the
projector when twisting the feet.
CAUTION ►Do not handle the elevator buttons without holding the
projector, since the projector may drop down.
►Do not tilt the projector other than elevating its front within 14 degrees using
the adjuster feet. A tilt of the projector exceeding the restriction could cause
malfunction or shortening the lifetime of consumables, or the projector itself.
14°
To loose an
elevator foot, push
the elevator button
on the same side
as it.
To finely
adjust, twist
the foot.
11
ENGLISH
Displaying the picture
1.
Activate your signal source. Turn the
signal source on, and make it send the
signal to the projector.
2.
Press the INPUT button on the projector.
Each time you press the button, the
projector switches its input port in turn.
You can also use the remote control to
select an input signal. Press the VIDEO
button for selecting an input signal from
the HDMI, S-VIDEO or VIDEO port, or
the COMPUTER button for selecting an
input signal from the COMPUTER IN1,
COMPUTER IN2, LAN, USB TYPE A or
USB TYPE B port.
3.
Use the VOLUME + / VOLUME - buttons
to adjust the volume.
To have the projector silent, press the
MUTE button on the remote control.
4.
Press the ASPECT button on the remote
control. Each time you press the button,
the projector switches the mode for aspect
ratio in turn.
5.
Use the ZOOM ring to adjust the screen
size.
6.
Use the FOCUS ring to focus the picture.
VOLUME+ button
VOLUME- button
MUTE button
VIDEO button
COMPUTER button
ASPECT button
VIDEO
DOC.CAMERA
KEYSTONE
ASPECT
SEARCH
BLANK
MUTE
MY BUTTON
POSITION
ESC
MENU
RESET
COMPUTER
MY SOURCE/
AUTO
MAGNIFY
PAGE
DOWN
ON
OFF
FREEZE
UP
࡯
㧗
VOLUME
ENTER
VIDEO
DOC.CAMERA
KEYSTONE
ASPECT
SEARCH
BLANK
MUTE
MY BUTTON
POSITION
ESC
MENU
RESET
COMPUTER
MY SOURCE/
AUTO
MAGNIFY
PAGE
DOWN
ON
OFF
FREEZE
UP
࡯
㧗
VOLUME
ENTER
CAUTION ►If you wish to have a blank screen while the projector's lamp is
on, use the BLANK function. (see User’s Manual - Operating Guide)
Taking any other action may cause the damage on the projector.
NOTE • The ASPECT button does not work when no proper signal is inputted.
• For the details of how to adjust the picture, please see User’s Manual -
Operating Guide.
INPUT button
FOCUS ring
ZOOM ring
12
Turning off the power
1.
Press the STANDBY/ON button on the
projector or the remote control.
The message “Power off?” will appear
on the screen for about 5 seconds.
2.
Press the STANDBY/ON button again
while the message appears.
The projector lamp will go off, and the
POWER indicator will begin blinking in
orange. Then the POWER indicator will
stop blinking and light in steady orange
when the lamp cooling is complete.
3.
Attach the lens cover, after the POWER
indicator turns in steady orange.
Do not turn the projector on for about 10 minutes or more after turning it off.
Also, do not turn the projector off shortly after turning it on. Such operations might
cause the lamp to malfunction or shorten the lifetime of some parts including the lamp.
WARNING ►Do not touch around the lamp cover and the exhaust vents
during use or just after use, since it is too hot.
►Remove the power cord for complete separation. The power outlet should be
close to the projector and easily accessible.
NOTE • Please power off the projector after any connected devices are
powered off.
• This projector has the AUTO POWER OFF function that can make the
projector turn off automatically. For more information, please see User’s
Manual - Operating Guide.
VIDE
O
DOC.
CAMERA
KEYSTONE
ASPECT
SEARCH
BLANK
MU
T
E
MY BUT
TO
N
POSI
TION
ESC
MENU
RESET
COMPUTER
MY SOURCE/
AU
TO
MAGNIFY
PAG
E
DOWN
ON
OFF
FREEZE
UP
࡯
㧗
VOLUME
ENT
E
R
STANDBY/ON button
POWER indicator
13
ENGLISH
Replacing the lamp
A lamp has finite product life. Using the lamp for long periods of time could cause
the pictures darker or the color tone poor. Note that each lamp has a different
lifetime, and some may burst or burn out soon after you start using them.
Preparation of a new lamp and early replacement are recommended. To prepare
a new lamp, make contact with your dealer and tell the lamp type number.
Type number : DT01371
1.
Turn the projector off, and unplug the power cord.
Allow the projector to cool for at least 45 minutes.
2.
Prepare a new lamp. If the projector is mounted
on a ceiling, or if the lamp has broken, also ask
the dealer to replace the lamp.
In case of replacement by yourself, follow the
following procedure.
3.
Loosen the screw (marked by arrow) of the lamp
cover and then slide and lift the lamp cover to the
side to remove it.
4.
Loosen the 3 screws (marked by arrow) of the
lamp, and slowly pick up the lamp by the handles.
Never loosen any other screws.
5.
Insert the new lamp, and retighten firmly the
3 screws of the lamp that are loosened in the
previous process to lock it in place.
6.
While putting the interlocking parts of the lamp
cover and the projector together, slide the lamp
cover back in place. Then firmly fasten the screw
of the lamp cover.
7.
Turn the projector on and reset the lamp time
using the LAMP TIME item in the OPTION menu.
(1) Press the MENU button to display a menu.
(2) Point at the ADVANCED MENU in the menu using
the ▼/▲ button, then press the ► button.
(3) Point at the OPTION in the left column of the menu
using the ▼/▲button, then press the ► button.
(4) Point at the LAMP TIME using the ▼/▲ button, then press the ► button. A
dialog will appear.
(5)
Press the
►
button to select
“
OK
”
on the dialog. It performs resetting the lamp time.
NOTE • Please reset the lamp time only when you have replaced the lamp,
for a suitable indication about the lamp.
CAUTION ►Do not touch any inner space of the projector, while the lamp
is taken out.
Lamp cover
4
3
6
Handles
14
HIGH VOLTAGE
HIGH TEMPERATURE HIGH PRESSURE
WARNING ►The projector uses a high-pressure mercury glass lamp. The
lamp can break with a loud bang, or burn out, if jolted or scratched, handled
while hot, or worn over time. Note that each lamp has a different lifetime, and
some may burst or burn out soon after you start using them. In addition, if the
bulb bursts, it is possible for shards of glass to fly into the lamp housing, and
for gas containing mercury and dust containing fine particles of glass to escape
from the projector’s vent holes.
►About disposal of a lamp: This product contains a mercury lamp; do not put
it in a trash. Dispose of it in accordance with environmental laws.
• For lamp recycling, go to www.lamprecycle.org (in the US).
• For product disposal, consult your local government agency
or www.eiae.org (in the US) or www.epsc.ca (in Canada).
For more information, ask your dealer.
• If the lamp should break (it will make a loud bang when it does),
unplug the power cord from the outlet, and make sure to request a
replacement lamp from your local dealer. Note that shards of glass
could damage the projector’s internals, or cause injury during handling,
so please do not try to clean the projector or replace the lamp yourself.
• If the lamp should break (it will make a loud bang when it does),
ventilate the room well, and make sure not to inhale the gas or fine
particles that come out from the projector's vent holes, and not to get
them into your eyes or mouth.
• Before replacing the lamp, turn the projector off and unplug the power
cord, then wait at least 45 minutes for the lamp to cool sufficiently.
Handling the lamp while hot can cause burns, as well as damaging the lamp.
• Never unscrew except the appointed (marked by an arrow) screws.
• Do not open the lamp cover while the projector is suspended from
a ceiling. This is dangerous, since if the lamp’s bulb has broken, the
shards will fall out when the cover is opened. In addition, working in
high places is dangerous, so ask your local dealer to have the lamp
replaced even if the bulb is not broken.
• Do not use the projector with the lamp cover removed. At the lamp
replacing, make sure that the screws are screwed in firmly. Loose
screws could result in damage or injury.
• Use only the lamp of the specified type. Use of a lamp that does not
meet the lamp specifications for this model could cause a fire, damage or
shorten the life of this product.
• If the lamp breaks soon after the first time it is used, it is possible
that there are electrical problems elsewhere besides the lamp. If this
happens, consult your local dealer or a service representative.
•
Handle with care: jolting or scratching could cause the lamp bulb to burst during use.
• Using the lamp for long periods of time, could cause it dark, not to light
up or to burst. When the pictures appear dark, or when the color tone
is poor, please replace the lamp as soon as possible. Do not use old
(used) lamps; this is a cause of breakage.
Disconnect
the plug
from the
power
outlet
Replacing the lamp (continued)
15
ENGLISH
Please check and clean the air filter periodically. When the indicators or a message
prompts you to clean the air filter, comply with it as soon as possible. The air filter has two
kinds of filters inside. Replace the filters when they are damaged or too soiled. To prepare
the new filters, make contact with your dealer and tell the following type number.
Type number : MU06481 (Filter set)
When you replace the lamp, please replace the air filter. An air
filter of specified type will come together with a replacement
lamp for this projector.
1.
Turn the projector off, and unplug the power cord. Allow the
projector to sufficiently cool down.
2.
Use a vacuum cleaner on and around the filter cover.
3.
While supporting the projector with one hand, use your
other hand to pull the filter cover forward in the direction of
the arrow.
4.
Use a vacuum cleaner for the filter vent of the projector
and the outer side of the filter unit.
5.
Take the filters out while holding the filter cover.
6.
Use a vacuum cleaner on both sides of the filters. When
vacuuming up the fine meshed filter, hold it so it will not
be sucked in. If the filters are damaged or heavily soiled,
replace them with the new ones.
7.
Put the filters back into the filter cover. Put the coarse
meshed filter into a filter cover first. Then put the fine
meshed filter on the coarse meshed one, turning its
stitched side up.
8.
Put the filter unit back into the projector.
9.
Turn the projector on and reset the filter time using the
FILTER TIME item in the EASY MENU.
(1) Press the MENU button to display a menu.
(2) Point at the FILTER TIME using the ▼/▲ button, then press
the ► button. A dialog will appear.
(3) Press the ► button to select “OK” on the dialog. It performs
resetting the filter time.
Cleaning and replacing the air filter
WARNING ►Before taking care of the air filter, make sure the power cable
is not plugged in, then allow the projector to cool sufficiently.
►
Use only the air filter of the specified type. Do not use the projector without the
air filter or the filter cover. It could result in a fire or malfunction to the projector
.
►
Clean the air filter periodically. If the air filter becomes clogged by dust or the like,
internal temperatures rise and could cause a fire, a burn or malfunction to the projector.
NOTE • Please reset the filter time only when you have cleaned or replaced
the air filter, for a suitable indication about the air filter.
• The projector may display the message such as “CHECK THE AIR FLOW” or
turn off the projector, to prevent the internal heat level rising.
Filter cover
Filter unit
Filter cover
Filter (fine meshed)
Filter (coarse meshed)
2
4
3
7
Stitched
side
16
NOTE • The information in the CD-ROM is subject to change without notice.
Please check our website where you may find the latest information for this
projector.
(
18)
• No responsibility is taken for any obstacle and defect to hardware and
software of your computer as a result of the use of the CD-ROM.
• All or Any part of the information in the CD-ROM must not be copied,
reproduced or republished without notice to our company.
Using the CD manual
The other manuals for this product are written into the included CD-ROM titled
“User’s Manual (detailed)”. Before using the CD-ROM, please read the following
to ensure the proper use.
System requirements
The system for using the CD-ROM requires the following.
Windows
®
: OS:Microsoft
®
Windows
®
XP, Windows Vista
®
, Windows
®
7 or later
Macintosh
®
: OS:Mac OS
®
10.2 or later
CD-ROM/DVD-ROM drive:
Applications: Microsoft
®
Internet Explorer
®
6.0 or later
Adobe
®
Acrobat
®
Reader
®
8.0 or later
How to use the CD
1. Insert CD into computer’s CD-ROM/DVD-ROM drive.
Windows
®
: In a while, Web browser automatically starts. Start up
window comes up.
Macintosh
®
: (1) Double-click on the “Projectors” icon appeared on the
desktop screen.
(2) When “main.html” file is clicked, Web browser will start
and Initial window will appear.
2. Click the model name of your projector first, and then click language you want
from the displayed list. The User’s manual (detailed) will open.
CAUTION ►Only use the CD-ROM in a computer CD/DVD drive. The
CD-ROM is designed for computer use only. NEVER INSERT THE CD-ROM
INTO A NON-COMPUTER CD/DVD PLAYER! Inserting the CD-ROM into an
incompatible CD/DVD drive may produce a loud noise, which in turn MAY
RESULT IN EAR AND SPEAKER DAMAGE!
• After using CD-ROM, please put it into CD case and keep it. Please keep
the CD neither in direct sunlight nor in a high temperature and high humidity
environment.
17
ENGLISH
Item Specification
Product name Liquid crystal projector
Liquid Crystal
Panel
CP-X2015WN, CP-X2515WN, CP-X3015WN, CP-X4015WN:
786,432 pixels (1024 horizontal x 768 vertical)
CP-WX2515WN, CP-WX3015WN:
1,024,000 pixels (1280 horizontal x 800 vertical)
Lamp 215 W UHP
Speaker 16 W mono (8 W x 2)
Power supply/
Rated current
AC 100-120 V: 3.3 A, AC 220-240 V: 1.7 A
Power
consumption
AC 100-120 V: 310 W, AC 220-240 V: 300 W
Temperature
range
5 ~ 35 °C (Operating)
Size
317 (W) x 98 (H) x 288 (D) mm
* Not including protruding parts.
Refer to figure
F-7 at the back of this manual.
Weight (mass) approx. 3.6 kg
Ports
COMPUTER IN1
.......................... D-sub 15 pin mini jack x1
COMPUTER IN2
........................... D-sub 15 pin mini jack x1
HDMI ...................................................... HDMI connector x1
MONITOR OUT
............................. D-sub 15 pin mini jack x1
S-VIDEO
............................................. Mini DIN 4 pin jack x1
VIDEO
............................................................... RCA jack x1
AUDIO IN1
............................... 3.5 mm (stereo) mini jack x1
AUDIO IN2
............................... 3.5 mm (stereo) mini jack x1
AUDIO IN3 (R, L)
.............................................. RCA jack x2
AUDIO OUT (R, L)
............................................ RCA jack x2
USB TYPE A
................................. USB type A connector x2
USB TYPE B
................................. USB type B connector x1
CONTROL
.............................................. D-sub 9 pin plug x1
LAN
.................................................................. RJ45 jack x1
MIC
............................................ 3.5 mm (mono) mini jack x1
Optional parts
Lamp: DT01371
Filter set: MU06481
Mounting accessory:
HAS-3010 (Bracket for ceiling mount)
HAS-204L (Fixing adaptor for low ceilings)
HAS-304H (Fixing adaptor for high ceilings)
Laser remote control: RC-R008
USB wireless adapter: USB-WL-11N
* For more information, please consult your dealer.
Specifications
18
Troubleshooting - Warranty and after-service
If an abnormal operation (such as smoke, strange odor or excessive sound)
should occur, stop using the projector immediately.
Otherwise if a problem occurs with the projector, first refer to “Troubleshooting”
of User’s Manual - Operating Guide and Network Guide, and run through the
suggested checks.
If this does not resolve the problem, please consult your dealer or service
company. They will tell you what warranty condition is applied.
Please check the following web address where you may find the latest information
for this projector.
Product
information and
Manuals :
http://www.hitachi-america.us/digitalmedia
Production
information :
http://www.hitachidigitalmedia.com
Direct link to
manual download :
http://www.hitachiserviceeu.com/support/guides/
userguides.htm
Trademark acknowledgment
• Mac
®
, Macintosh
®
and Mac OS
®
are registered trademarks of Apple Inc.
•
Adobe
®
and Acrobat
®
, Reader
®
are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
• Microsoft
®
, Internet Explorer
®
, Windows
®
, Windows NT
®
and Windows Vista
®
are
registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries.
• HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or
registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries.
•
Blu-ray Disc
TM
and Blu-ray
TM
are trademarks of Blu-ray Disc Association.
All other trademarks are the properties of their respective owners.
NOTE • The information in this manual is subject to change without notice.
• The illustrations in this manual are for illustrative purposes. They may differ
slightly from your projector.
• The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in
this manual.
• The reproduction, transfer or copy of all or any part of this document is not
permitted without express written consent.
End User License Agreement for the Projector Software
• Software in the projector consists of the plural number of independent
software modules and there exist our copyright or/and third party copyrights for
each of such software modules.
• Be sure to read “End User License Agreement for the Projector Software”
which is separated document. (in the CD)
19
ENGLISH
T-1
CP-X2015WN,X2515WN,3015WN
(1024 x 768) (±10%)
T-2
CP-X4015WN
(1280 x 768) (±10%)
Screen size
(diagonal)
4 : 3 screen 16 : 9 screen
Projection distance
Screen
height
Screen
height
Projection distance
Screen
height
Screen height
min. max. min. max.
type
(inch)
m m inch m inch cm inch cm inch m inch m inch cm inch cm inch
30 0.8 0.8 32 1.0 39 39 15 7 3 0.9 35 1.1 43 36 14 1 0
40 1.0 1.1 44 1.4 54 52 21 9 3 1.2 48 1.5 59 49 19 1 0
50 1.3 1.4 56 1.7 68 65 26 11 4 1.6 61 1.9 75 61 24 1 1
60 1.5 1.7 68 2.1 82 78 31 13 5 1.9 74 2.3 90 73 29 2 1
70 1.8 2.0 80 2.5 97 91 36 15 6 2.2 87 2.7 106 85 34 2 1
80 2.0 2.3 92 2.8 111 105 41 17 7 2.6 100 3.1 121 97 38 2 1
90 2.3 2.6 104 3.2 125 118 46 20 8 2.9 113 3.5 137 109 43 3 1
100 2.5 2.9 116 3.5 140 131 51 22 9 3.2 126 3.9 153 122 48 3 1
120 3.0 3.5 140 4.3 168 157 62 26 10 3.9 152 4.7 184 146 57 4 1
150 3.8 4.5 175 5.4 211 196 77 33 13 4.9 191 5.9 231 182 72 4 2
200 5.1 6.0 235 7.2 283 261 103 44 17 6.5 256 7.8 309 243 96 6 2
250 6.4 7.5 295 9.0 355 327 129 54 21 8.2 321 9.8 387 304 120 7 3
300 7.6 9.0 354 10.8 426 392 154 65 26 9.8 386 11.8 465 365 144 9 4
b
a
b
c1
c1 c2
c2
Screen size
(diagonal)
4 : 3 screen 16 : 9 screen
Projection distance
Screen
height
Screen
height
Projection distance
Screen
height
Screen height
min. max. min. max.
type
(inch)
m m inch m inch cm inch cm inch m inch m inch cm inch cm inch
30 0.8 0.8 32 1.0 38 41 16 5 2 0.9 35 1.1 42 39 15 -1 0
40 1.0 1.1 44 1.3 52 55 22 6 2 1.2 48 1.5 57 51 20 -2 -1
50 1.3 1.4 56 1.7 67 69 27 8 3 1.5 61 1.9 73 64 25 -2 -1
60 1.5 1.7 67 2.0 81 82 32 9 4 1.9 74 2.2 88 77 30 -2 -1
70 1.8 2.0 79 2.4 95 96 38 11 4 2.2 87 2.6 104 90 35 -3 -1
80 2.0 2.3 91 2.8 109 110 43 12 5 2.5 100 3.0 119 103 41 -3 -1
90 2.3 2.6 103 3.1 123 123 49 14 5 2.9 113 3.4 134 116 46 -4 -1
100 2.5 2.9 115 3.5 137 137 54 15 6 3.2 126 3.8 150 129 51 -4 -2
120 3.0 3.5 139 4.2 165 165 65 18 7 3.9 152 4.6 181 154 61 -5 -2
150 3.8 4.4 175 5.3 208 206 81 23 9 4.8 191 5.8 227 193 76 -6 -2
200 5.1 6.0 234 7.1 278 274 108 30 12 6.5 256 7.7 304 257 101 -8 -3
250 6.4 7.5 294 8.9 349 343 135 38 15 8.1 321 9.7 381 322 127 -10 -4
300 7.6 9.0 354 10.7 420 411 162 46 18 9.8 386 11.6 458 386 152 -12 -5
b
a
b
c1
c1 c2
c2
20
・
Suspended from the ceiling
・
On a horizontal surface
F-1 F-2
T-3
CP-WX2515WN,CP-WX3015WN
(1280 x 800) (±10%)
Screen size
(diagonal)
16 : 10 screen 4 : 3 screen
Projection distance
Screen
height
Screen
height
Projection distance
Screen
height
Screen
height
min. max. min. max.
type
(inch)
m inch m inch cm inch cm inch m inch m inch cm inch cm inch
30 0.9 35 1.1 43 40 16 1 0 1.0 40 1.2 49 45 18 1 0
40 1.2 48 1.5 58 53 21 1 0 1.4 54 1.7 67 60 24 1 0
50 1.5 61 1.9 74 66 26 1 1 1.8 69 2.1 84 75 29 2 1
60 1.9 73 2.3 89 79 31 2 1 2.1 84 2.6 102 90 35 2 1
70 2.2 86 2.7 105 92 36 2 1 2.5 98 3.0 119 105 41 2 1
80 2.5 99 3.1 121 106 42 2 1 2.9 113 3.5 137 119 47 2 1
90 2.8 112 3.5 136 119 47 2 1 3.2 128 3.9 155 134 53 3 1
100 3.2 125 3.9 152 132 52 3 1 3.6 142 4.4 172 149 59 3 1
120 3.8 151 4.6 183 158 62 3 1 4.4 171 5.3 207 179 71 4 1
150 4.8 190 5.8 229 198 78 4 2 5.5 215 6.6 260 224 88 5 2
200 6.5 254 7.8 307 264 104 5 2 7.3 288 8.8 348 299 118 6 2
250 8.1 319 9.8 385 330 130 7 3 9.2 361 11.1 436 373 147 8 3
300 9.7 383 11.8 463 396 156 8 3 11.0 434 13.3 524 448 176 9 4
a
b
b
c1 c2c1 c2
21
ENGLISH
F-3
AUDIO IN
1
2
3
AUDIO OUT
Computer
F-4
AUDIO IN
1
2
3
AUDIO OUT
Computer External device
Access
point
USB
wireless
adapter
(optional)
USB
storage
device
22
AUDIO IN
1
2
3
AUDIO OUT
F-6
Monitor
Speakers
(with an amplifi er)
Microphone
F-5
AUDIO IN
1
2
3
AUDIO OUT
VCR/DVD/Blu-ray Disc
TM
player
23
ENGLISH
[unit: mm]
AUDIO IN
1
2
3
AUDIO OUT
317mm
113mm
98mm
288mm
F-7
NOTE • The information in this manual is subject to change without notice. • The manufacturer
assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this manual. • The reproduction, transfer
or copy of all or any part of this document is not permitted without express written consent.
REMARQUE • Les informations contenues dans ce manuel peuvent faire l'objet dechangements sans
avertissement préalable. • Le fabricant ne prend aucune responsabilité pour les erreurs qui pourraient
se trouver dans ce manuel. • La reproduction, la transmission ou l'utilisation de ce document ou de
son contenu est interdite sauf autorisation spéciale écrite.
HINWEIS • Die Informationen in diesem Handbuch können ohne vorherige Ankündigung geändert
werden. • Der Hersteller übernimmt keine Verantwortung für etwaige in diesem Handbuch enthaltene
Fehler. • Die Vervielfältigung, Übertragung oder Verwendung dieses Dokuments oder dessen Inhalts
ist ohne ausdrückliche schriftliche Genehmigung nicht gestattet.
NOTA • La información de este manual puede sufrir modificaciones sin previo aviso. • El fabricante
no asume ninguna responsabilidad por los errores que puedan aparecer en este manual. • No
está permitida la reproducción, transmisión o utilización de este documento ni de su contenido sin
autorización expresa por escrito.
NOTA • Le informazioni riportate in questo manuale sono soggette a modifica senza preavviso. • Il
produttore declina qualsiasi responsabilità per eventuali errori che potrebbero comparire nel presente
manuale. • E’ vietata la riproduzione, la trasmissione o l’utilizzo del presente documento o del suo
contenuto senza espressa autorizzazione scritta.
MERK • Informasjonen i denne håndboken kan endres uten varsel. • Produsenten påtar seg intet
ansvar for eventuelle feil som fremkommer i denne håndboken. • Reproduksjon, overføring eller bruk
av dette dokumentet eller deler av det, er ikke tillatt uten uttrykt skriftlig tillatelse.
OPMERKING • De informatie in deze handleiding kan zonder voorafgaande kennisgeving veranderd
worden. • De fabrikant neemt geen enkele verantwoordelijkheid voor de eventuele fouten in deze
handleiding. • Reproductie, overdracht of het gebruik van dit document is niet toegestaan, zonder
uitdrukkelijke toestemming van de betreffende partij.
NOTA • As informações contidas neste manual estão sujeitas a alterações sem aviso prévio.
• O fabricante não se responsabiliza por quaisquer erros que possam surgir neste manual.
• A reprodução, transmissão ou utilização deste documento ou do seu conteúdo não é permitida sem
autorização expressa por escrito.
ཚኪ๚ၜ!
•
Ԩກዐ਽ሜڦాඹᆶ੗ీփঢ়ᇨߢܸ݀ิՎ߸ă
•
Ԩׂ೗ڦ዆ሰኁܔԨກዐڦ਽ሜٱဃփ޶
ඪࢆሴඪă
•
࿄ঢ়ሎႹ൩ကް዆Ăገሜࢅ๑ᆩԨກڦևݴईඇևాඹă
꼁ꍱ
• 본서에 기재되어 있는 내용은 예고 없이 변경하는 일이 있습니다 .• 본제품의 제조자는 , 본서
에 있어서의 기재 오류에 대해서 일절의 책임도 지지 않습니다 .• 본서 내용의 일부 혹은 전부를 무단
으로 복사하거나 전재하여 사용하는 것을 절대 금합니다 .
NOTERA • Informationen i denna bruksanvisning kan komma att ändras utan förvarning. • Tillverkaren
påtar sig inget ansvar för eventuella fel i denna bruksanvisning. • Återgivning, översändande eller
användning av detta dokument eller dess innehåll är inte tillåten utan uttrycklig skriftligt medgivande.
ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ. • Содержание данного руководства может изменяться без предварительного
уведомления. • Производитель не несет ответственности за ошибки в данном руководстве.
• Воспроизведение, передача и использование данного документа или его содержания
запрещено без письменного разрешения.
HUOM! • Tämän ohjekirjan tiedot voivat muuttua ilman eri ilmoitusta. • Valmistaja ei ota mitään
vastuuta ohjekirjassa mahdollisesti olevista virheistä. • Dokumentin tai sen sisällön jäljentäminen,
siirto tai käyttö ei ole sallittua ilmannimenomaista kirjallista valtuutusta.
UWAGA • Informacje podane w tym podręczniku mogą ulec zmianie bez uprzedzenia. • Producent
nie ponosi odpowiedzialności za ewentualne błędy w podręczniku. • Powielanie, przesyłanie lub inne
wykorzystanie tego dokumentu lub jego treści nie jest dozwolone bez wyraźnej pisemnej zgody.
Hitachi America, Ltd.
Business Solutions Group
900 Hitachi way, Chula Vista
CA 91914-3556 USA CANADA
Tel: +1 -800-448-2244
► http://www.hitachi-america.us/projectors
Hitachi Europe Ltd., Digital Media Group
Consumer Affairs Department
Whitebrook Park, Lower Cookham Road,
Maidenhead
Berkshire SL6 8YA UNITED KINGDOM
Tel: 0844 481 0297
Email: consumer.mail@hitachi-eu.com
Hitachi Europe S.A.S.,
Digital Media Group
31 bis rue du 35ème Régiment de l’aviation
ZAC DU CHENE, 69500 BRON FRANCE
Tel: 043 742
8430
Email: france.consommateur@hitachi-eu.com
Hitachi Europe GmbH
Am Seestern 18
40547 Düsseldorf GERMANY
Tel: 0211-5283-801
Email: Service.germany@hitachi-eu.com
Hitachi Europe S.A.
364, Kifissias Ave. & 1, Delfon Str.
152 33 Chalandri
Athens GREECE
Tel: 210 6837200
Email: tech.assist@hitachi-eu.com
Hitachi Europe S.r.l.
Via T. Gulli, 39
20147 MILANO ITALY
Tel: +39 02 487861
Email: customerservice.italy@hitachi-eu.com
Hitachi Europe S.A.
Gran Via Carles III, 86 Planta 5ª
Edificios Trade - Torre Este
08028 Barcelona SPAIN
Tel: 0034 934 092 5 50
Email: Atencion.Cliente@hitachi-eu.com
Hitachi Europe AB
Frösundaviks Alle 15
169 29 Solna SWEDEN
Sweden Tel: +46 8 562 711 00
Finland Tel: +358 10 8503 085
Norway Tel: +47 9847 3898
Denmark Tel: +46 8 562 711 00
► http://www.hitachidigitalmedia.com
Hitachi Australia Pty Ltd.
Level 3, 82 Waterloo Road
North Ryde N.S.W 2113 AUSTRALIA
Tel: +61 -2-9888-4100
► http://www.hitachi.com.au
Hitachi (Hong Kong), Ltd.
18/F., Ever Gain Centre, 28 On Muk Street.,
Shatin, N.T. HONG KONG
Tel: +852 -2113-8883
► http://www.hitachi-hk.com.hk
Hitachi Sales (Malaysia) Sdn. Bhd.
Lot 12, Jalan Kamajuan, Bangi Industrial Estate,
43650 Bandar Baru Bangi, Selangor Darul Ehsan
MALAYSIA
Tel: +60 -3-8911-2670
► http://www.hitachiconsumer.com.my
Hitachi Home Electronics Asia (S) Pte. Ltd.
438A Alexandra Road #01-01/02/03
Alexandra Technopark, 119967 SINGAPORE
Tel: +65 -6536-2520
► http://www.hitachiconsumer.com.sg
Hitachi Sales Corp. of Taiwan
2
nd
Floor, No.65, Nanking East Road, Section 3,
Taipei 104 TAIWAN
Tel: +886-2-2516-0500
► http://www.hsct.com.tw
Hitachi Sales (Thailand), Ltd.
994, 996 Soi Thonglor, Sukhumvit 55 Rd.,
Klongtonnua, Vadhana, Bangkok 10110
THAILAND
Tel: +66 -2381-8381-98
► http://www.hitachi-th.com
Hitachi Consumer Electronics Co.,Ltd.
292 Yoshida-cho, Totsuka-ku
Yokohama 244-0817 JAPAN
► http://www.hitachi.co.jp/proj/
… 136 …

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Spelregels

Misbruik melden

Gebruikershandleiding.com neemt misbruik van zijn services uitermate serieus. U kunt hieronder aangeven waarom deze vraag ongepast is. Wij controleren de vraag en zonodig wordt deze verwijderd.

Product:

Bijvoorbeeld antisemitische inhoud, racistische inhoud, of materiaal dat gewelddadige fysieke handelingen tot gevolg kan hebben.

Bijvoorbeeld een creditcardnummer, een persoonlijk identificatienummer, of een geheim adres. E-mailadressen en volledige namen worden niet als privégegevens beschouwd.

Spelregels forum

Om tot zinvolle vragen te komen hanteren wij de volgende spelregels:

Belangrijk! Als er een antwoord wordt gegeven op uw vraag, dan is het voor de gever van het antwoord nuttig om te weten als u er wel (of niet) mee geholpen bent! Wij vragen u dus ook te reageren op een antwoord.

Belangrijk! Antwoorden worden ook per e-mail naar abonnees gestuurd. Laat uw emailadres achter op deze site, zodat u op de hoogte blijft. U krijgt dan ook andere vragen en antwoorden te zien.

Abonneren

Abonneer u voor het ontvangen van emails voor uw Hitachi CP-X2015WN bij:


U ontvangt een email met instructies om u voor één of beide opties in te schrijven.


Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Vul uw emailadres in en ontvang de handleiding van Hitachi CP-X2015WN in de taal/talen: Engels als bijlage per email.

De handleiding is 6,54 mb groot.

 

U ontvangt de handleiding per email binnen enkele minuten. Als u geen email heeft ontvangen, dan heeft u waarschijnlijk een verkeerd emailadres ingevuld of is uw mailbox te vol. Daarnaast kan het zijn dat uw internetprovider een maximum heeft aan de grootte per email. Omdat hier een handleiding wordt meegestuurd, kan het voorkomen dat de email groter is dan toegestaan bij uw provider.

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Stel uw vraag over deze PDF

Andere handleiding(en) van Hitachi CP-X2015WN

Hitachi CP-X2015WN Gebruiksaanwijzing - Nederlands - 259 pagina's

Hitachi CP-X2015WN Gebruiksaanwijzing - Deutsch - 259 pagina's

Hitachi CP-X2015WN Gebruiksaanwijzing - English - 123 pagina's

Hitachi CP-X2015WN Gebruiksaanwijzing - Français - 123 pagina's

Hitachi CP-X2015WN Gebruiksaanwijzing - Italiano - 259 pagina's

Hitachi CP-X2015WN Gebruiksaanwijzing - Português - 259 pagina's

Hitachi CP-X2015WN Gebruiksaanwijzing - Espanõl - 259 pagina's

Hitachi CP-X2015WN Gebruiksaanwijzing - Polski - 259 pagina's

Hitachi CP-X2015WN Gebruiksaanwijzing - Svenska - 259 pagina's


Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Als u niet binnen een kwartier uw email met handleiding ontvangen heeft, kan het zijn dat u een verkeerd emailadres heeft ingevuld of dat uw emailprovider een maximum grootte per email heeft ingesteld die kleiner is dan de grootte van de handleiding.

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

Controleer uw email en volg de aanwijzingen op om uw inschrijving definitief te maken

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Als u de handleiding per email wilt ontvangen, vul dan een geldig emailadres in.

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Wilt u een email ontvangen bij een antwoord en/of nieuwe vragen? Vul dan hier uw emailadres in.



Info